Date post: | 27-Oct-2015 |
Category: |
Documents |
Upload: | bronsonbaddog |
View: | 224 times |
Download: | 3 times |
SERVICE MANUAL
2008.082008.08Ver. 2.0Ver. 2.0
FIELD SERVICE
i
FIELD SERVICE TOTAL CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS ..............................................................S-1
IMPORTANT NOTICE ................................................................................................S-1
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION .........................S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS .................................................................................................S-2
SAFETY INFORMATION ...............................................................................................S-17
IMPORTANT NOTICE ..............................................................................................S-17
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE .....................................................S-18
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT ....................................................S-20
Composition of the service manual ................................................................................. C-1
Notation of the service manual ....................................................................................... C-2
magicolor 7450/7450 II Main bodyOutline ............................................................................................................................ 1
Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 7
Adjustment/Setting........................................................................................................ 91
Troubleshooting........................................................................................................... 191
Appendix ..................................................................................................................... 253
Lower feeder unitOutline ............................................................................................................................ 1
Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 3
Adjustment/Setting........................................................................................................ 25
Troubleshooting............................................................................................................. 29
Duplex optionOutline ............................................................................................................................ 1
Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 3
Adjustment/Setting.......................................................................................................... 7
Troubleshooting............................................................................................................... 9
ii
Blank Page
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-1
Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing service work.
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as the risk of damage to the product, Konica Minolta Business Technologies, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians.Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed. Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this Service Manual is complete and accurate.The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the product while servicing the product for which this Service Manual is intended.Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the product properly.Keep this Service Manual also for future service.
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions " DANGER", " WARNING", and " CAUTION" is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
IMPORTANT NOTICE
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION
DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury
WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble and property damage
:Precaution when using the copier. General
precautionElectric hazard High
temperature
:Prohibition when using the copier. General
prohibitionDo not touch with wet hand
Do not disassemble
:Direction when using the copier. General
instructionUnplug Ground/Earth
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-2
[1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Konica Minolta brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly prohibited. The points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reason-ing behind this policy.
SAFETY WARNINGS
Prohibited Actions
DANGER• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.
• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT.
Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and
injury.
• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with
wire, metal clips, solder or similar object.
• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between
relay contacts)
• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.)
Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and
injury.
• Making any modification to the product unless instructed
by KMBT
• Using parts not specified by KMBT
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-3
[2] POWER PLUG SELECTION
In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet used in the area. In that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) to attach appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the supply.
Power Cord Set or Power Plug
WARNING• Use power supply cord set which meets the following
criteria:
- provided with a plug having configuration intended for the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the prod-uct's rated voltage and current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- provided with three-conductor cable having enough cur-rent capacity, and
- the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock.
• Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:
- having configuration intended for the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the product's rated voltage and current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connect-ing to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.
• Conductors in the power cable must be connected to ter-
minals of the plug according to the following order:
•Black or Brown:L (line)
•White or Light Blue:N (neutral)
•Green/Yellow:PE (earth)
Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the product, and results in fire or electric shock.
AC230V
AC208V 240V
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-4
[3] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE
Konica Minolta brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and CE from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.
1. Power Supply
Connection to Power Supply
WARNING• Check that mains voltage is as specified.
Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or electric shock.
• Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same
configuration as the plug.
Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.
If proper wall outlet is not available, advice the customer to contact qualified electrician for the installation.
• Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a
capacity greater than the maximum power consumption.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall
outlet, the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall
outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet
securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the risk of fire.
? V
kw
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-5
• Check whether the product is grounded properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product, you may suffer electric shock while operating the product.
Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet.
Connection to Power Supply
WARNING
Power Plug and Cord
WARNING• When using the power cord set (inlet type) that came with
this product, make sure the connector is securely inserted
in the inlet of the product.
When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with
the fixture properly.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the prod-uct securely, a contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or
pinched by a table and so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check
whether the sheath is damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord or cord set (with plug and connec-tor on each end) specified by KMBT.
Using the damaged power cord may result in fire or elec-tric shock.
• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug
and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in fire.
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-6
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet
hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the
cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.
Power Plug and Cord
WARNING
Wiring
WARNING• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords
in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.
Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so
using a too long extension cord may result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may result.
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-7
2. Installation Requirements
Prohibited Installation Places
WARNING• Do not place the product near flammable materials or vola-
tile materials that may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.
• Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such
as rain.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
When not Using the Product for a long time
WARNING• When the product is not used over an extended period of
time (holidays, etc.), switch it off and unplug the power
cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may
cause fire.
Ventilation
CAUTION• The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it
will not be harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly ventilated roomb. When taking a lot of copiesc. When using multiple products at the same time
Fixing
CAUTION• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the product may slide, leading to a injury.
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-8
3. Servicing
Inspection before Servicing
CAUTION• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant docu-
mentation (service manual, technical notices, etc.) and
proceed with the inspection following the prescribed pro-
cedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools.
Do not make any adjustment not described in the docu-
mentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the prod-uct may break and a risk of injury or fire exists.
• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect
the power plugs from the product and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. Arisk of electric shock exists.
• The area around the fixing unit is hot.
You may get burnt.
Work Performed with the Product Powered On
WARNING• Take every care when making adjustments or performing
an operation check with the product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
• Take every care when servicing with the external cover
detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of elec-tric shock exists.
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-9
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING• When taking a report of problems from a user, check each
part and repair properly.
A risk of product trouble, injury, and fire exists.
• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other
damages.
The user or CE may be injured.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and
screws to fall into the product.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire.
• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electri-
cal parts and electrode units such as a charging corona
unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of product trouble or fire.
• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for
deterioration and sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit)
incorporating a laser, make sure that the power cord has
been disconnected.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-10
• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply
power with the write unit shifted from the specified mount-
ing position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lith-
ium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose
of the used lithium battery using the method specified by
local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g.,
optical lamp and fixing lamp), be sure to check the installa-
tion state.
A risk of fire exists.
• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and
check whether the interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in the product (e.g., for clearing paper jam).
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp
edges, burrs, or other pointed parts.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connec-
tors, etc. that were removed for safety check and mainte-
nance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay
special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-11
Handling of Consumables
WARNING• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care
must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the
substances come into contact with eyes, etc. It may be
stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately. When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.
• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.
You may be burned due to dust explosion.
Handling of Service Materials
CAUTION• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Isopropyl alcohol and acetone are highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.
• Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before
any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully
evaporated.
A risk of fire exists.
• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take
care not to spill any liquid. If this happens, immediately
wipe it off.
A risk of fire exists.
• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.
Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-12
4. Fuse
5. Used Batteries Precautions
Fuse
CAUTION• CAUTION
Double pole / neutral fusing
• ATTENTIONDouble pôle / Fusible sur le neutre
Handling of batteries
CAUTION• ALL Areas
CAUTIONDanger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
• GermanyVORSICHT!
Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie.Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ.Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.
• FranceATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie.Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type équivalent recom-mandé par le constructeur.Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
• DenmarkADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.
• Finland, SwedenVAROlTUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
VARNINGExplosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparat-tillverkaren.Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
• NorwayADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-13
[4] Laser Safety
• This is a digital machine certified as a Class 1 laser product. There is no possibility of danger from a laser, provided the machine is serviced according to the instruction in this manual.
1. Internal Laser Radiation
*at laser aperture of the Print Head Unit
• This product employs a Class 3B laser diode that emits an invisible laser beam. The laser diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print head unit.
• The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICEABLE ITEM. Therefore, the print head unit should not be opened under any circumstances.
semiconductor laser
Maximum power of the laser diode 10 mW
Maximum average radiation power (*) 8.0 µW
Wavelength 775-800 nm
4039P0C504DB
Laser Aperture ofthe Print Head Unit
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-14
U.S.A., Canada(CDRH Regulation)• This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Stan-
dard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
• The label shown on page S-16 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
.
All Areas
Denmark
CAUTION• Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
semiconductor laser
Maximum power of the laser diode 10 mW
Wavelength 775-800 nm
CAUTION• Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
semiconductor laser
Maximum power of the laser diode 10 mW
Wavelength 775-800 nm
ADVARSEL• Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion.
Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825-1 sikkerheds kravene.
halvlederlaser
Laserdiodens højeste styrke 10 mW
bølgelængden 775-800 nm
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-15
Finland, Sweden
Norway
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITEKLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
VAROITUS!• Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saat-
taa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle laser-säteilylle.
puolijohdelaser
Laserdiodin suurin teho 10 mW
aallonpituus 775-800 nm
VARNING!• Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksanvisning specificerats,
kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
halvledarlaser
Den maximala effekten för laserdioden 10 mW
våglängden 775-800 nm
VARO!• Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättomälle laser-
säteilylle. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING!• Osynlig laserstråining när denna del är öppnad och spärren är urkopplad.
Betrakta ej stråien.
ADVERSEL• Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisn-
ing, kan brukeren utsettes för unsynlig laserstrålning, som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1.
halvleder laser
Maksimal effekt till laserdiode 10 mW
bølgelengde 775-800 nm
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-16
2. Laser Safety Label
• A laser safety label is attached to the inside of the machine as shown below.
3. Laser Caution Label
• A laser caution label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.
4039P0E506DB
4039P0C502DB
SAFETY INFORMATION
S-17
4. PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT
• When laser protective goggles are to be used, select ones with a lens conforming to the above specifications.
• When a disassembly job needs to be performed in the laser beam path, such as when working around the printerhead and PC drum, be sure first to turn the printer OFF.
• If the job requires that the printer be left ON, take off your watch and ring and wear laser protective goggles.
• A highly reflective tool can be dangerous if it is brought into the laser beam path. Use utmost care when handling tools on the user’s premises.
• The print head is not to be disassembled or adjusted in the field. Replace the unit or assembly including the control board. Therefore, remove the laser diode, and do not per-form control board trimmer adjustment.
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Admin-istration implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.
This copier is certified as a "Class 1" laser product under the U.S.Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emit-ted inside this copier is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT NOTICE
SAFETY INFORMATION
S-18
Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine.When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric shock.
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE
4039P0C505DB
High voltage
• This area generates high voltage.Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned ON to avoid get-ting an electric shock.
High voltage
• This area generates high voltage.Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned ON to avoid getting an electric shock.
SAFETY INFORMATION
S-19
CAUTION:
4039P0C501DB
WARNING
• Do not position the used waste toner box so that it is standing on end or tilted, otherwise toner may spill.
WARNING
• Do not burn used toner cartridges.Toner expelled from the fire is dan-gerous.
WARNING
• Do not burn used imaging units.Toner expelled from the fire is dangerous.
CAUTION
• The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot.Touching any part other than those indicated may result in burns.
• You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised not to touch by any caution label. Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read, contact our service office.
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT
S-20
1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evalua-tion must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations speci-fied by every distributor.
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT
C-1
Composition of the service manualThis service manual consists of Theory of Operation section and Field Service section to
explain the main machine and its corresponding options.
Theory of Operation section gives, as information for the CE to get a full understanding of
the product, a rough outline of the object and role of each function, the relationship
between the electrical system and the mechanical system, and the timing of operation of
each part.
Field Service section gives, as information required by the CE at the site (or at the cus-
tomer’s premise), a rough outline of the service schedule and its details, maintenance
steps, the object and role of each adjustment, error codes and supplementary information.
The basic configuration of each section is as follows. However some options may not be
applied to the following configuration.
<Theory of Operation section>
<Field Service section>
OUTLINE: Explanation of system configuration,
product specifications, unit configuration, and paper path
COMPOSITION/OPERATION: Explanation of configuration of each unit,
operating system, and control system
OUTLINE: Explanation of system configuration, and product
specifications
MAINTENANCE: Explanation of service schedule, maintenance steps, ser-
vice tools, removal/reinstallation methods of major parts,
and firmware version up method etc.
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING: Explanation of utility mode, service mode, and mechanical
adjustment etc.
TROUBLESHOOTING: Explanation of lists of jam codes and error codes, and
their countermeasures etc.
APPENDIX: Parts layout drawings, connector layout drawings, timing
chart, overall layout drawing are attached.
C-2
Notation of the service manualA. Product nameIn this manual, each of the products is described as follows:
B. Brand nameThe company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or
the registered trademark of each company.
(1) magicolor 7450/magicolor 7450 II: Main body
(2) Microsoft Windows 95: Windows 95
Microsoft Windows 98: Windows 98
Microsoft Windows Me: Windows Me
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0: Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT
Microsoft Windows 2000: Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP: Windows XP
Microsoft Windows Vista: Windows Vista
When the description is made in combination of the OS’s mentioned above:
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 4.0/2000
Windows NT/2000/XP/Vista
Windows 95/98/Me/ NT/2000/XP/Vista
SERVICE MANUAL
2008.08Ver. 2.0
FIELD SERVICE
Main body
Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change forimprovement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will beissued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:• To indicate clearly a specific section revised within text, is shown at the left margin of the
corresponding revised section.The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a specific page that contains a revision or revisions, the page number appear-ing at the left or right bottom of the specific page is marked with .The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0: The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0: The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
1
1
11
2008/08 2.0Description addition of magicolor 7450 II, error corrections
2006/05 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ou
tlin
eM
ain
ten
an
ce
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
gT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
gA
pp
en
dix
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
i
CONTENTS
magicolor 7450/7450 II Main body
Outline1. System configuration............................................................................................... 1
2. Product specifications ............................................................................................. 2
Maintenance3. Periodical check ...................................................................................................... 7
3.1 Maintenance items................................................................................................ 7
3.1.1 Parts to be replaced by users (CRU) ............................................................ 7
3.1.2 Periodical parts replacement 1 (per 120,000-print)....................................... 7
3.1.3 Periodical parts replacement 2 (per 200,000-print)....................................... 8
3.1.4 Periodical parts replacement 3 (per 300,000-print)....................................... 8
3.2 Maintenance parts ................................................................................................ 9
3.2.1 Replacement parts........................................................................................ 9
3.3 Concept of parts life............................................................................................ 11
3.4 Maintenance procedure (periodical check parts)................................................ 13
3.4.1 Replacing the tray 2 feed roller (standard) .................................................. 13
3.4.2 Replacing the tray 2 separation roller ......................................................... 14
3.4.3 Replacing the tray 1 feed roller (bypass)..................................................... 15
3.4.4 Replacing the tray 1 separation roller ......................................................... 17
3.4.5 Replacing the waste toner bottle................................................................. 18
3.4.6 Replacing the ozone filter............................................................................ 19
3.4.7 Replacing the deodorant filter ..................................................................... 20
3.4.8 Replacing the dust filter/vertical conveyance .............................................. 20
3.4.9 Replacing the dust filter/cooling fan ............................................................ 21
3.4.10 Replacing the transfer roller ........................................................................ 21
3.4.11 Replacing the transfer belt unit ................................................................... 22
3.4.12 Replacing the toner cartridge Y,M,C,K........................................................ 24
3.4.13 Replacing the imaging unit Y,M,C,K............................................................ 26
3.4.14 Replacing the fusing unit............................................................................. 29
4. Service tool ........................................................................................................... 32
4.1 CE tool list........................................................................................................... 32
4.2 Print materials..................................................................................................... 33
4.2.1 Imaging unit single parts (IU) ...................................................................... 33
4.2.2 Toner cartridge single parts (T/C) ............................................................... 33
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ou
tlin
eM
ain
ten
an
ce
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
gT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
gA
pp
en
dix
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
ii
4.2.3 Waste toner bottle....................................................................................... 33
4.2.4 Maintenance kit........................................................................................... 33
5. Firmware upgrade................................................................................................. 34
5.1 Checking the current firmware version ............................................................... 34
5.2 Firmware upgrading procedure by updater ........................................................ 34
5.2.1 Updating method ........................................................................................ 34
5.2.2 Checking the version after the firmware update ......................................... 46
6. Other ..................................................................................................................... 47
6.1 Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items .......................................................... 47
6.2 Disassembly/assembly/cleaning list (other parts) .............................................. 48
6.2.1 Disassembly/assembly parts list................................................................. 48
6.2.2 Cleaning parts list ....................................................................................... 49
6.3 Disassembly/assembly procedure...................................................................... 50
6.3.1 Rear left cover/front left cover/upper front cover......................................... 50
6.3.2 Rear right cover/rear cover ......................................................................... 51
6.3.3 Tray 1 left cover /tray 1 right cover /tray 1 upper cover ............................... 51
6.3.4 Front Door................................................................................................... 52
6.3.5 Exit tray ....................................................................................................... 52
6.3.6 Control panel .............................................................................................. 54
6.3.7 Tray 2 .......................................................................................................... 55
6.3.8 Front Cover ................................................................................................. 56
6.3.9 Controller board (PWB-P)........................................................................... 58
6.3.10 Memory (DIMM0)........................................................................................ 59
6.3.11 Hard disk kit (Option) .................................................................................. 60
6.3.12 Mechanical control board (PWB-M)............................................................ 60
6.3.13 RTC board (PWB-R)................................................................................... 63
6.3.14 DC power supply (PU1) .............................................................................. 64
6.3.15 High voltage unit (HV1)............................................................................... 65
6.3.16 Tray 2 paper size board (PWB-I)................................................................. 66
6.3.17 PH interface board (PWB-D)....................................................................... 67
6.3.18 Multi bypass unit ......................................................................................... 69
6.3.19 PH unit ........................................................................................................ 70
6.3.20 Transport drive assy.................................................................................... 74
6.3.21 Hopper drive assy....................................................................................... 76
6.3.22 Right door assy........................................................................................... 78
6.3.23 Cooling fan motor/2 (M22) assy.................................................................. 80
6.3.24 Color developing motor (M3) ...................................................................... 80
6.3.25 Color PC drum motor (M2) ......................................................................... 81
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ou
tlin
eM
ain
ten
an
ce
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
gT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
gA
pp
en
dix
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
iii
6.3.26 Toner supply motor C/K (M7) ...................................................................... 81
6.3.27 Toner supply motor Y/M (M6)...................................................................... 82
6.3.28 Main motor (M1).......................................................................................... 82
6.3.29 Fusing drive motor (M4) .............................................................................. 83
6.3.30 IDC/registration sensor/1, IDC/registration sensor/2 (SE1/SE2)................. 83
6.4 Cleaning procedure ............................................................................................ 86
6.4.1 PH window .................................................................................................. 86
6.4.2 Transfer belt ................................................................................................ 87
6.4.3 Tray 2 feed roller (standard) ........................................................................ 87
6.4.4 Tray 2 separation roller................................................................................ 87
6.4.5 Tray 1 feed roller (bypass)........................................................................... 88
6.4.6 Tray 1 separation roller................................................................................ 88
6.4.7 Registration roller ........................................................................................ 89
6.4.8 Area around the waste toner collecting port ............................................... 90
Adjustment/Setting7. How to Use the adjustment section....................................................................... 91
8. Description of the control panel............................................................................. 92
8.1 Control panel display .......................................................................................... 92
8.1.1 Parts of the control panel display ................................................................ 92
8.1.2 Message structure ...................................................................................... 93
8.1.3 Normal messages ....................................................................................... 94
8.1.4 Menu ........................................................................................................... 98
8.1.5 Operator call messages .............................................................................. 99
8.1.6 Service call messages .............................................................................. 100
8.1.7 Help screen............................................................................................... 101
8.2 List of control panel messages ......................................................................... 102
8.2.1 Normal messages ..................................................................................... 102
8.2.2 Operator call messages ............................................................................ 104
8.2.3 Service call messages .............................................................................. 107
8.3 Cancelling a print job ........................................................................................ 109
9. Menu ................................................................................................................... 110
9.1 List of Menu functions....................................................................................... 110
9.2 PROOF/PRINT MENU...................................................................................... 114
9.3 PRINT MENU ................................................................................................... 114
9.3.1 CONFIGURATION PG .............................................................................. 114
9.3.2 DEMO PAGE............................................................................................. 115
9.3.3 STATISTICS PAGE.................................................................................... 115
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ou
tlin
eM
ain
ten
an
ce
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
gT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
gA
pp
en
dix
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
iv
9.3.4 FONT LIST ............................................................................................... 118
9.3.5 MENU MAP .............................................................................................. 119
9.3.6 DIRECTORY LIST .................................................................................... 119
9.4 PAPER MENU .................................................................................................. 119
9.4.1 PAPER SOURCE...................................................................................... 119
9.4.2 DUPLEX ................................................................................................... 123
9.4.3 COPIES .................................................................................................... 124
9.4.4 COLLATE.................................................................................................. 124
9.5 QUALITY MENU............................................................................................... 124
9.5.1 COLOR MODE ......................................................................................... 124
9.5.2 BRIGHTNESS .......................................................................................... 124
9.5.3 PCL SETTING .......................................................................................... 125
9.5.4 PS SETTING ............................................................................................ 127
9.5.5 CALIBRATION .......................................................................................... 132
9.5.6 COLOR SEPARATION.............................................................................. 133
9.5.7 THIN LINE MODE..................................................................................... 133
9.6 CAMERA DIRECT............................................................................................ 133
9.6.1 PAPER SOURCE...................................................................................... 133
9.6.2 LAYOUT .................................................................................................... 134
9.6.3 PAPER MARGIN....................................................................................... 134
9.6.4 IMAGE QUALITY ...................................................................................... 134
9.7 INTERFACE MENU.......................................................................................... 135
9.7.1 JOB TIMEOUT.......................................................................................... 135
9.7.2 ETHERNET .............................................................................................. 136
9.7.3 CAMERA DIRECT.................................................................................... 138
9.8 SYS DEFAULT MENU ...................................................................................... 138
9.8.1 LANGUAGE .............................................................................................. 138
9.8.2 EMULATION ............................................................................................. 139
9.8.3 PAPER ...................................................................................................... 141
9.8.4 STARTUP OPTIONS ................................................................................ 143
9.8.5 AUTO CONTINUE .................................................................................... 143
9.8.6 HOLD JOB TIMEOUT............................................................................... 143
9.8.7 ENERGY SAVER...................................................................................... 144
9.8.8 ENERGY SAVER TIME ............................................................................ 144
9.8.9 MENU TIMEOUT...................................................................................... 144
9.8.10 LCD BRIGHTNESS .................................................................................. 144
9.8.11 SECURITY................................................................................................ 145
9.8.12 CLOCK ..................................................................................................... 146
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ou
tlin
eM
ain
ten
an
ce
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
gT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
gA
pp
en
dix
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
v
9.8.13 HDD FORMAT .......................................................................................... 146
9.8.14 CARD FORMAT ........................................................................................ 147
9.8.15 RESTORE DEFAULTS.............................................................................. 147
9.8.16 ENABLE WARNING.................................................................................. 153
9.8.17 IMAGING UNIT LIFE................................................................................. 154
9.9 MAINTENANCE MENU.................................................................................... 155
9.9.1 How to enter the MAINTENANCE MENU................................................. 155
9.9.2 PRINT MENU............................................................................................ 155
9.9.3 ALIGNMENT ............................................................................................. 156
10. Adjustment item list ............................................................................................. 160
11. SERVICE MENU ................................................................................................. 161
11.1 How to enter the SERVICE MENU ................................................................... 161
11.2 Service mode function tree............................................................................... 161
11.3 SERVICE MENU setting/adjustment ................................................................ 163
11.3.1 SERIAL NUMBER..................................................................................... 163
11.3.2 FIRMWARE VERSION ............................................................................. 163
11.3.3 ALIGNMENT ............................................................................................. 163
11.3.4 DIAGNOSIS MENU................................................................................... 173
11.3.5 RESTORE PASSWARD............................................................................ 186
11.3.6 SOFT SWITCH ......................................................................................... 186
12. Mechanical adjustment ....................................................................................... 187
12.1 Mechanical adjustment of the tray 1 ................................................................. 187
12.1.1 Adjustment of the tray 1 media size unit ................................................... 187
12.2 PH unit mechanical adjustment ........................................................................ 189
12.2.1 Skew adjustment....................................................................................... 189
Troubleshooting13. Jam display ......................................................................................................... 191
13.1 Misfeed display ................................................................................................. 191
13.2 Misfeed display resetting procedure ................................................................. 191
13.3 Sensor layout .................................................................................................... 192
13.4 Solution............................................................................................................. 193
13.4.1 Initial check items...................................................................................... 193
13.4.2 Misfeed at fusing/exit section .................................................................... 193
13.4.3 Misfeed at 2nd image transfer section ...................................................... 194
13.4.4 Misfeed at tray 1 media feed section......................................................... 195
13.4.5 Misfeed at tray 2 media feed section......................................................... 196
14. Service call message .......................................................................................... 197
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ou
tlin
eM
ain
ten
an
ce
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
gT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
gA
pp
en
dix
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
vi
14.1 Trouble codes ................................................................................................... 197
14.1.1 Trouble code list ........................................................................................ 197
14.2 How to reset ..................................................................................................... 201
14.3 Solution ............................................................................................................ 202
14.3.1 0001: Main motor turning at abnormal timing ........................................... 202
14.3.2 0018: Color PC drum motor’s failure to turn ............................................. 202
14.3.3 0019: Color PC drum motor’s turning at abnormal timing......................... 202
14.3.4 001A: Color developing motor’s failure to turn .......................................... 203
14.3.5 001B: Color developing motor’s turning at abnormal timing ..................... 203
14.3.6 0040: Suction fan motor’s failure to turn ................................................... 203
14.3.7 0043: Cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn ................................................ 204
14.3.8 0046: Fusing cooling fan motor /1’s failure to turn .................................... 204
14.3.9 0048: Fusing cooling fan motor /2’s failure to turn .................................... 204
14.3.10 004C: Ozone ventilation fan motor’s failure to turn ................................... 205
14.3.11 004E: Power supply cooling fan motor’s failure to turn ............................. 205
14.3.12 004F: Cooling fan motor 2’s failure to turn................................................ 205
14.3.13 0094: 2nd image transfer roller separation ............................................... 206
14.3.14 0096: Transfer belt separation .................................................................. 206
14.3.15 0301: Polygon motor/C failure to turn ....................................................... 207
14.3.16 0302: Polygon motor/M failure to turn....................................................... 207
14.3.17 0303: Polygon motor/Y failure to turn ....................................................... 207
14.3.18 0304: Polygon motor/K failure to turn ....................................................... 207
14.3.19 0311: Laser malfunction (cyan) ................................................................ 207
14.3.20 0312: Laser malfunction (magenta) .......................................................... 207
14.3.21 0313: Laser malfunction (yellow) .............................................................. 207
14.3.22 0314: Laser malfunction (black)................................................................ 207
14.3.23 0500: Heating roller warm-up failure......................................................... 208
14.3.24 0501: Fusing pressure roller warm-up failure ........................................... 208
14.3.25 0510: Abnormally low heating roller temperature ..................................... 208
14.3.26 0511: Abnormally low fusing pressure roller temperature ........................ 208
14.3.27 0520: Abnormally high heating roller temperature.................................... 208
14.3.28 0521: Abnormally high fusing pressure roller temperature ....................... 208
14.3.29 0960: Manual tray rise descent error ........................................................ 208
14.3.30 0F30: Abnormally low toner density detected cyan TCR sensor .............. 209
14.3.31 0F32: Abnormally low toner density detected magenta TCR sensor........ 209
14.3.32 0F34: Abnormally low toner density detected yellow TCR sensor............ 209
14.3.33 0F31: Abnormally high toner density detected cyan TCR sensor............. 209
14.3.34 0F33: Abnormally high toner density detected magenta TCR sensor ...... 209
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ou
tlin
eM
ain
ten
an
ce
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
gT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
gA
pp
en
dix
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
vii
14.3.35 0F35: Abnormally high toner density detected yellow TCR sensor........... 209
14.3.36 0F36: Abnormally low toner density detected black TCR sensor.............. 210
14.3.37 0F37: Abnormally high toner density detected black TCR sensor ............ 210
14.3.38 0F3A: Cyan TCR sensor adjustment failure.............................................. 211
14.3.39 0F3B: Magenta TCR sensor adjustment failure ........................................ 211
14.3.40 0F3C: Yellow TCR sensor adjustment failure............................................ 211
14.3.41 0F3D: Black TCR sensor adjustment failure ............................................. 211
14.3.42 13B0: RTC failure...................................................................................... 212
14.3.43 13C8: Transfer unit new article release..................................................... 212
14.3.44 13CA: Fusing unit new article release ...................................................... 212
14.3.45 13D1: Cyan imaging unit EEPROM access error ..................................... 213
14.3.46 13D2: Magenta imaging unit EEPROM access error................................ 213
14.3.47 13D3: Yellow imaging unit EEPROM access error.................................... 213
14.3.48 13D4: Black imaging unit EEPROM access error ..................................... 213
14.3.49 13D9: Cyan toner cartridge EEPROM access error ................................. 213
14.3.50 13DA: Yellow toner cartridge EEPROM access error ............................... 213
14.3.51 13DB: Magenta toner cartridge EEPROM access error ........................... 213
14.3.52 13DC: Black toner cartridge EEPROM access error ................................ 213
14.3.53 13E2: Flash ROM write error .................................................................... 214
14.3.54 3000: Main motor’s failure to turn.............................................................. 214
14.3.55 C002: RAM (standard) error at startup ..................................................... 214
14.3.56 C003: RAM (option) error at startup.......................................................... 214
14.3.57 C013: MAC address error ......................................................................... 215
14.3.58 C015: BOOT ROM error ........................................................................... 215
14.3.59 C022: NVRAM error .................................................................................. 215
14.3.60 C025, C026, C027: Controller ROM error................................................. 215
14.3.61 C050: Hard disk access error ................................................................... 216
14.3.62 C051: Hard disk full error .......................................................................... 216
14.3.63 C052: Compact flash access error............................................................ 217
14.3.64 C053: Compact flash full error .................................................................. 217
14.3.65 C054: Compact flash uninstallation .......................................................... 218
14.3.66 C060: Firmware update error.................................................................... 218
14.3.67 C061: Hold job error/no duplex unit .......................................................... 219
14.3.68 C062: Hold job error/no tray 3................................................................... 219
14.3.69 C063: Hold job error/no tray 4................................................................... 219
14.3.70 C064: Hold job error/no memory............................................................... 219
14.3.71 C065: Hold job error/no tray5.................................................................... 219
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ou
tlin
eM
ain
ten
an
ce
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
gT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
gA
pp
en
dix
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
viii
14.3.72 FFFF: Interface communication error ....................................................... 219
15. Power supply trouble........................................................................................... 220
15.1 Machine is not energized at all (PU1 operation check) .................................... 220
15.2 Control panel indicators do not light. ................................................................ 221
15.3 Fusing heaters do not operate ......................................................................... 221
15.4 Power is not supplied to option......................................................................... 222
15.4.1 Optional lower feeder unit ......................................................................... 222
15.4.2 Power is not supplied to duplex option...................................................... 222
16. Image quality problem......................................................................................... 223
16.1 How to read element date ................................................................................ 223
16.2 How to identify problematic part ....................................................................... 224
16.2.1 Initial check items ..................................................................................... 224
16.3 Solution ............................................................................................................ 225
16.3.1 Monocolor: white lines, white bands, colored lines, colored bands in sub scan direction..................................................................................... 225
16.3.2 Monocolor: white lines, white bands, colored lines, colored bands in main scan direction................................................................................... 226
16.3.3 Monocolor: uneven density in sub scan direction ..................................... 227
16.3.4 Monocolor: uneven density in main scan direction ................................... 228
16.3.5 Monocolor: low image density .................................................................. 229
16.3.6 Monocolor: gradation reproduction failure ................................................ 231
16.3.7 Monocolor: foggy background................................................................... 232
16.3.8 Monocolor: void areas, white spots .......................................................... 234
16.3.9 Monocolor: colored spots ......................................................................... 235
16.3.10 Monocolor: blurred image......................................................................... 236
16.3.11 Monocolor: blank print, black print ............................................................ 237
16.3.12 Monocolor: uneven image ........................................................................ 238
16.3.13 4-Color: white lines, white bands, colored lines, colored bands in sub scan direction............................................................................................ 239
16.3.14 4-Color: white lines, white bands, colored lines, colored bands in main scan direction............................................................................................ 240
16.3.15 4-Color: uneven density in sub scan direction .......................................... 241
16.3.16 4-Color: uneven density in main scan direction ........................................ 242
16.3.17 4-Color: low image density ....................................................................... 243
16.3.18 4-Color: poor color reproduction............................................................... 244
16.3.19 4-Color: incorrect color image registration................................................ 245
16.3.20 4-Color: void areas, white spots ............................................................... 246
16.3.21 4-Color: colored spots .............................................................................. 247
16.3.22 4-Color: poor fusing performance, offset .................................................. 248
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ou
tlin
eM
ain
ten
an
ce
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
gT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
gA
pp
en
dix
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
ix
16.3.23 4-Color: brush effect, blurred image ......................................................... 249
16.3.24 4-Color: back marking............................................................................... 250
16.3.25 4-Color: uneven image.............................................................................. 251
Appendix17. Parts layout drawing ............................................................................................ 253
17.1 Main body ......................................................................................................... 253
17.1.1 Engine section .......................................................................................... 253
17.1.2 Tray 1 / Tray 2............................................................................................ 257
17.2 Lower feeder unit (option) ................................................................................. 258
17.3 Duplex option (option)....................................................................................... 259
18. Connector layout drawing.................................................................................... 260
19. Timing chart ........................................................................................................ 262
19.1 Main body ......................................................................................................... 262
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ou
tlin
eM
ain
ten
an
ce
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
gT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
gA
pp
en
dix
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
x
Blank Page
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 1. System configuration
1 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ou
tlin
e
Outline1. System configuration
*1: The color of the outer cover of this option is different between the option for 7450 and that for 7450II.
NOTE• Use the Desk or the paper feed cabinet without fail when installing on the floor in
order to keep the function and quality of the unit.
[1] Main Body (magicolor7450/magicolor7450II) [5] Caster Base
[2] Duplex Option *1 [6] DIMM
[3] Banner Tray [7] Hard Disk Kit
[4] Lower Feeder Unit (500 sheets) *1 [8] Compact Flash Card
4039T1J101AA
[1]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[3][7]
[8]
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 5
1
1
1
1
2. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
2
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ou
tlin
e
2. Product specificationsA. Type
Type Desktop tandem full color A3 laser beam printer
Printing System Electrostatic dry-powdered image transfer to plain paper
PC Drum Type OPC (organic photo conductor)
Paper Feeding Separation System
Tray 1 (Manual bypass) : Small diameter roller separation systemTray 2 : Small diameter roller separation system
Exposure System • Four-multi array PH unit system• Two-beam LD + polygon mirror exposure system for Y, M, C, and K
(8 beams in total)
Exposure Density 600 dpi × 600 dpi × 4 bit
Developing System HMT developing system
Charging System DC comb electrode Scorotron system
Image Transfer System Intermediate transfer belt system
Paper Separating System Selection either application of nonwoven fabric bias or resistor grounding + lower-pressure paper separate claws
Fusing System Roller fusing
Paper Exit System Face down
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 2. Product specifications
3 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ou
tlin
e
B. Functions
Warm-up Time 99 sec. or less (at ambient temperature of 23° C/73.4° F and rated source voltage)
Image Loss Leading edge: 4.2 mm, Trailing edge: 4.2 mm, Rear edge: 4.0 mm, Front edge: 4.0 mm
First Print Time(Tray 2)
Monochrome print A4 8.1 sec. or less
8.5 x 11 8.2 sec. or less
Color print A4 11.4 sec. or less
8.5 x 11 11.4 sec. or less
Processing Speed Plain Paper(64 to 90 g/m2 / 16 to 24 lb)
111 mm/sec
Thick Paper (91 to 256 g/m2 /24.25 to 68 lb), OHP, Post card, Envelope, Label sheet
55.5 mm/sec
Printing Speed for Multi-print Cycle(crosswise feeding)
Monochrome print/ Color print
A4 1-sided: 25 prints/min.2-sided: 23.5 prints/min.
8.5 x 11 1-sided: 24.5 prints/min.2-sided: 23.0 prints/min.
Print Paper Size Tray1:Multi manual feed trayTray2:Multi purpose casette
A3 Wide, A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, 8K, 16K, D8K, Kai8, Kai16, Kai32, Env.C5, Env.C6, Env.DL, Env.#10, Env.You#4,Env.Chou#3, Env.Chou#4, Env.Monarch, 12×18, 11×17, 11×14, Foolscap(8×13), Folio(8.3 ×13),Legal(8.5 ×14), Govt.Legal(8.5 ×13), Letter(8.5 ×11), Letter-R(8.5 ×11R),Govt.Letter-R(8.0 × 10.5R), UK Quart(8 ×10), Executive(7.3 × 10.5), Postcard (Japan only), Double-Postcard (Japan only),Statement-R(5.5 × 8.5R), 4×6-R
Tray3, Tray4, Tray5(Option)
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, 16K, D8K,11×17, 11×14, Legal(8.5 ×14), Govt.Legal(8.5 ×13), Letter(8.5 ×11), Letter-R(8.5 ×11-R),Statement-R(5.5 × 8.5 R)
Long size paper (127 to 160 g/m2)* Tray 1 only* The Expanded Memory Unit is needed.
Width : 210 × 297 mmLength: 458 × 1200 mm
Print Exit Tray Capacity
Plain Paper, A4 350 sheets
1
1
2. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
4
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ou
tlin
e
C. Types of Paper
*1: Image is not guaranteed when thick paper 3 is used.*2: Optional Lower Feeder Unit : Only the Plain paper weighing 64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 24 lb)
is reliably fed.
D. Maintenance
Type Paper Source (maximum tray capacity)
Tray1 (Multiple Bypass)
Tray2 Tray3, 4, 5 (Option) *2
Print paper type
Plain paper (64 to 90 g/m2 / 16 to 24 lb)
❍ (100 sheets) ❍ (250 sheets) ❍ (500 sheets)
OHP transparencies (crosswise feeding only)
❍
(10 sheets or less)❍
(50 sheets or less)–
Thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2 / 24.25 to 40 lb)
–
Thick paper 2 (151 to 210 g/m2
/ 40.25 to 55.75 lb)
–
Thick paper 3 (211 to 256 g/m2
/ 56.25 to 68 lb) *1
❍
(10 sheets or less)–
Envelopes –
Labels ❍
(50 sheets or less)–
Translucent paper – – –
Postcard – – –
Print paper dimensions
Width 90 to 311 mm3.5 to 12.25 inch
90 to 311 mm3.5 to 12.25 inch
140 to 297 mm5.5 to 11.75 inch
Length 140 to 457 mm5.5 to 18 inch
140 to 457 mm5.5 to 18 inch
182 to 432 mm7.25 to 17 inch
Long size paper
Width 210 to 297 mm 8.25 to 11.75 inch
– –
Length 457 to 1200 mm18 to 47.25 inch
– –
1
No. of pages printed per month
Average 4,000 prints(Color:2,000 prints, Monochrome:2,000 prints)
Max 10,000 prints
Standard print mode Color print/ Mono-chrome print
3 pages/job
Standard Original Density
Color print C, M, Y, K 5%
Monochrome print K 5%
1
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 2. Product specifications
5
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ou
tlin
e
E. Machine Specifications
*1: width when the bypass tray is closed*2: Space Requirements are the values, the bypass tray is opened to the maximum.
F. Operating Environment
Power Requirements Voltage: AC 110 V, 120 V, 127 V, 220-240 V
Frequency: 50/60 Hz ± 3.0 Hz
Max Power Consumption Less than 1450 W (120 V, 12 A / 220 - 240 V, 6.5 A)
Dimensions 648 *1 (W) × 606 (D) × 477 (H) mm25.5 *1 (W) × 23.9 (D) × 18.8 (H) inch
Space Requirements 966 *2 (W) × 606 (D) mm 38.0 *2 (W) × 23.9 (D) inch
Weight Main body Approx. 50.5 kg / 111.3 lb (without IU and TC)
IU and TC 8.9 kg
Temperature 10 to 35 °C / 50 to 95 °F (with a fluctuation of 10 °C / 18 °F or less per hour)
Humidity 15 to 85% (Relative humidity with a fluctuation of 20%/h)
Levelness Difference between front and back, right and left should be 1 degree or under.
1
2. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
6
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ou
tlin
e
G. Print Functions
NOTE• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Type Built-in PS/PCL controller
RAM Standard 256 MB, max 1,024 MB
HDD 40 GB (Option)
Compact Flash Card 256 MB or 512 MB (commercially available)
Interface Ethernet: 10 Base-T, 100 Base-TX, 1000 Base-TUSB 2.0 (High-speed)IEEE 1284 (Parallel)PictBridge (digital camera direct connection)
Supported Protocols TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, EtherTalk, UDP
Printer Language PCL5e/c EmulationPCL6 (XL Ver. 3.0) EmulationPostScript 3 Emulation (3016)PDF Emulation (1.6 Command Level) (When HDD or Compact Flash Card is mounted)Direct Print (JPEG/TIFF) (When HDD or Compact Flash Card is mounted)
Printer Fonts PCL :Latin 80 FontsPostscript :Emulation Latin 136 Fonts
Supported Operating Systems
7450 only Windows 98 SE/MeWindows NT 4.0 (SP6a)
7450/7450II Windows 2000 SP4 or laterWindows XP SP2 or laterWindows 2003 ServerWindows VistaMac OS 9.1 or laterMac OS X 10.2, 10.3 10.4 or 10.5Redhat Linux v9.0Susse Linux v8.2Netware 4, 5, 6 or later
1
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. Periodical check
7
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
Maintenance3. Periodical check
3.1 Maintenance items
3.1.1 Parts to be replaced by users (CRU)
*1: Also replace the dust filter/cooling fan packed in the waste toner bottle at the same time when the waste toner bottle is replaced.
*2: Also replace the deodorant filter packed in the toner cartridge K at the same time when 7,500/15,000 is reached.
*3: A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions.
3.1.2 Periodical parts replacement 1 (per 120,000-print)
*1: Replace those four parts at the same time.
No. Class Parts to be replaced Cycle Clean Replace Descriptions
1
Processing sections
Imaging unit Y,M,C 30,000 ●
2 Imaging unit K 50,000 ●
3 Dust filter/cooling fan 18,000 ● *1
4Toner cartridge Y,M,C(After consumable)
6,000/12,000 ●
5Toner cartridge Y,M,C(Prepackaged)
3,000 ●
6Toner cartridge K(After consumable)
7,500/15,000 ● *2
7Toner cartridge K(Prepackaged)
3,000 ●
8 Fusing section Deodorant filter 7,500/15,000 ● *2
9Image transfer section
Waste toner bottle (18,000) ● *1, 3
No. Class Parts to be replaced Quantity Check Clean ReplaceLubrica-
tionDescript
ions
1Overall
Media feed and image conditions
●
2 Appearance ● ●
3Fusing section
Fusing unit 1 ●
4Conveyance sec-tion
Transfer roller 1 ●
*1
5Dust filter/vertical conveyance
1 ●
6Image Transfer section
Transfer belt unit 1 ●
7Processing sec-tion
Ozone filter 1 ●
3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
8
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
3.1.3 Periodical parts replacement 2 (per 200,000-print)
3.1.4 Periodical parts replacement 3 (per 300,000-print)
No. Class Parts to be replaced Quantity Check Clean ReplaceLubrica-
tionDescrip-
tions
1Overall
Media feed and image conditions
●
2 Appearance ● ●
3Tray 1, 2
Feed roller 1 ●
4 Separation roller 1 ●
No. Class Parts to be replaced Quantity Check Clean ReplaceLubrica-
tionDescrip-
tions
1Overall
Media feed and image conditions
●
2 Appearance ● ●
3Lower feeder unit
Pick-up roller 1 ●
4 Feed roller 1 ●
5 Separation roller 1 ●
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. Periodical check
9
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
3.2 Maintenance parts
• To ensure that the machine produces good prints and to extend its service life, it is rec-ommended that the maintenance jobs described in this schedule be carried out as instructed.
• The replacing time is to be determined by the total counter value.• Maintenance conditions are based on the case of A4 or 8.5 x 11, standard mode and
energy saver OFF.
3.2.1 Replacement parts
A. Main unit
*1: Also replace the transfer roller, dust filter/vertical conveyance and ozone filter packed in the transfer belt at the same time when 120,000 is reached.(Part No. of the transfer belt unit: 4039 R716 00)
*2: Also replace the deodorant filter packed in the toner cartridge K at the same time when 7,500 or 15,000 is reached.
*3: Also replace the dust filter/cooling fan packed in the waste toner bottle at the same time when the waste toner bottle is replaced.
No. Classification Parts name Qt.Actual
durable cycleParts No. Descriptions
1Tray 2
Tray 2 feed roller (standard)
1 200,000 4034 3012 ##
2 Tray 2 separation roller 1 200,000 4034 0151 ##
3Tray 1
Tray 1 feed roller (bypass)
1 200,000 4131 3001 ##
4 Tray 1 separation roller 1 200,000 4034 0151 ##
5 Conveyance section
Transfer roller 1 120,000 ⎯ *1
6Dust filter/vertical conveyance
1 120,000 ⎯ *1
7Fusing section
Fusing unit 1 120,000
4039 0751 ## *4
4039 0752 ## *5
4039 0753 ## *6
8 Deodorant filter 1 7,500/15,000 ⎯ *2
9
Processing section
Imaging unit Y/M/C 1 30,000 ⎯
10 Imaging unit K 1 50,000 ⎯
11 Ozone filter 1 120,000 ⎯ *1
12Toner cartridge Y/M/C(prepackaged)
1 3,000 ⎯
13Toner cartridge Y/M/C(after consumable)
1 6,000/12,000 ⎯
14Toner cartridge K(prepackaged)
1 3,000 ⎯
15Toner cartridge K(after consumable)
1 7,500/15,000 ⎯ *2
16 Dust filter/cooling fan 1 18,000 ⎯ *3
17Image transfer section
Transfer belt unit 1 120,000 4039 R716 00 *1
18 Waste toner bottle 1 (18,000)4065 621 *3, 7, 8
4065 622 *3, 7, 9
3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
10
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
*4: 100 V areas only.*5: 110 V-127 V areas only.*6: 220-240 V areas only.*7: A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions.*8: Only for the areas except for USA and Canada.*9: Only for the USA and Canada.
B. Option
*1: See the lower feeder unit service manual.
No. Classification Parts name Qt.Actual
durable cycleParts No. Descriptions
1Lower feeder unit
Feed roller 1 300,000 4030 3005 ##
*12 Separation roller 1 300,000 4030 3005 ##
3 Pick-up roller 1 300,000 4030 0151 ##
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. Periodical check
11
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
3.3 Concept of parts life
*1: A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions.*2: Once the toner-full is detected, it has to be replaced with the new waste toner bottle in
order to reset.*3: The count condition is different according to the media length of the sub scanning direc-
tion.
Description Near life value Life value /
Max. number of printed pages
Waste toner bottle
A waste toner full condition is detected when about 2,500 printed pages have been produced after a waste toner near full condition has been detected.When the maximum number of printed pages is reached, the print is inhibited.
⎯ 18,000 *1, 2
DescriptionLife value
(Specification value)
Max. number of printed pages
Fusing unit
The number of prints made is counted. *3The number of prints made is compared with the value of the number of hours through which the fus-ing drive motor has turned translated to a corre-sponding value of the number of prints made and the value, whichever reaches the life specification value, is detected.When the maximum number of printed pages is reached, the print is inhibited.
120,000 150,000
Transfer beltIt is detected by counting the number of hours the transfer belt turns. The printing is prohibited when it reaches to the maximum printed pages.
120,000 150,000
Imaging unit C/M/Y
The hours which the PC drum has turned is com-pared with the value of the number of hours through which the imaging roller has turned translated to a corresponding value of hours and the value, which-ever reaches the life specification value, is detected.* The hours which the PC drum has turned is the
value of the number of distance through which the PC drum has run translated to a corresponding value of the number of hours and the value.
30,000 32,000
Imaging unit K
50,000 52,000
Length of the sub scanning direction
Number of counts
216 mm or less 1 count
216 mm to 432 mm 2 counts
432 mm to 648 mm 3 counts
648 mm to 864 mm 4 counts
over 864 mm 5 counts
3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
12
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
A. Conditions for life specifications values• The life specification values represent the number of prints made or figures equivalent to
it when given conditions (see the table given below) are met. They can be more or less depending on the machine operating conditions of each individual user.
Item Description
Job typeMonochrome: Making 3 prints per jobColor: Making 3 prints per job
Media size A4/Letter
Color ratio Black to Color = 1:1
PV/M Black: 2,000 / Color: 2,000
Original density B/W = 5 % for each color, 5 % for monochrome
No. of operating days per month
20 days (Main power switch turned ON and OFF 20 times per month)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. Periodical check
13 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
3.4 Maintenance procedure (periodical check parts)
NOTE• The following procedure mainly uses photos and illustrations of magicolor 7450.
The same procedure is applicable to magicolor 7450II unless otherwise noted.• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the
isopropyl alcohol.
3.4.1 Replacing the tray 2 feed roller (standard)
A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Tray 2 feed roller: 200,000 prints
B. Procedure1. Pull out the tray 2.
2. Lock the media lifting plate [1] into position.
3. Snap off the C-clip [2] from the tray 2 feed roller (standard) assy [3].
4. Remove the shaft for the tray 2 feed roller (standard) assy [3] from the front bushing.
5. Snap off the C-clip [1], one collar [2] and remove the tray 2 feed roller (standard) [3].
6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.
NOTE• Replace the tray 2 feed roller (standard) and tray 2 separation roller at the same
time.
1
[1]
[3]
[2]
4038F2C001DB
4037F2C003DC
[1]
[3]
[2]
3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
14
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
3.4.2 Replacing the tray 2 separation roller
A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Tray 2 separation roller: 200,000 prints
B. Procedure1. Pull out the tray 2.
2. Remove two screws [1] and the tray 2 separation roller mounting bracket assy [2].
3. Take off the rubber stopper [1], shaft [2], spring [3], and guide plate [4] to remove the tray 2 separation roller fixing bracket assy [5].
4. Snap off the E-ring [1] and the tray 2 separation roller [2].
5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.
NOTE• Replace the tray 2 feed roller (standard) and tray 2 separation roller at the same
time.
[1]
[2]
4038F2C002DC
[1]
[5]
[4][2]
[3]
4038F2C003DC
4037F2C509DB
[1]
[2]
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. Periodical check
15
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
3.4.3 Replacing the tray 1 feed roller (bypass)
A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Tray 1 feed roller: 200,000 prints
B. Procedure1. Remove the multi bypass unit.
See P.69
2. Snap off the E-ring [1], and remove tray 1 paper feed clutch [2].
3. Remove the gear [1].
4. Snap off the E-ring [1] and remove the bearing [2].
[1]
[2]
4038F2C004DB
[1]
4038F2C005DB
[1]
[2]
4038F2C006DC
3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
16
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
5. Snap off two C-ring [1], and remove the bearing [2].
6. Remove the tray 1 feed roller (bypass) [1].
7. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.
NOTE• Replace the tray 1 feed roller (bypass) and the tray 1 separation roller at the same
time.
[1]
[2]
4038F2C007DC
[1]
4038F2C008DC
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
16-1
mag
icol
or 7
450/
7450
IIM
aint
enan
ce
NOTE• Replace the tray 1 feed roller (bypass) and the tray 1 separation roller at the same
time.• When mounting the Tray1 Right Cover [1] after the multi bypass unit is installed,
use care not to allow the harness [3] of the bypass paper feed clutch to be wedged in the hook [2] of the cover. If the harness [3] is wedged, it may be shorted, result-ing in a machine failure.
4038F2C700AA
[2]
[1]
[3]
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. Periodical check
17
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
3.4.4 Replacing the tray 1 separation roller
A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Tray 1 separation roller: 200,000 prints
B. Procedure1. Remove the multi bypass unit.
See P.69
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the ground terminal [2].
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the tray 1 separation roller assy [2].
4. Snap off the C-clip [1], and remove the spring [2] and the guide plate [3]. Remove the tray 1 separation roller [4].
5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.NOTE• Replace the tray 1 feed roller (bypass) and the tray 1 separation roller at the same
time.
[1][2]
4038F2C009DB
[1]
[2]
4038F2C010DB
4038F2C502DB
[1][3]
[2]
[4]
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
17-1
mag
icol
or 7
450/
7450
IIM
aint
enan
ce
NOTE• Replace the tray 1 feed roller (bypass) and the tray 1 separation roller at the same
time.• When mounting the Tray1 Right Cover [1] after the multi bypass unit is installed,
use care not to allow the harness [3] of the bypass paper feed clutch to be wedged in the hook [2] of the cover. If the harness [3] is wedged, it may be shorted, result-ing in a machine failure.
4038F2C700AA
[2]
[1]
[3]
3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
18
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
3.4.5 Replacing the waste toner bottle
A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Waste toner bottle: 18,000 prints
B. Procedure1. Open the front door.
2. Press the waste toner bottle release lever [1].
3. Remove the waste toner bottle [1].NOTE• Raise the waste toner bottle gently
before removing it.• If scattered toner has accumulated
in the vicinity of the toner collecting port, do not tilt the waste toner bot-tle when removing it.
• Do not leave the waste toner bottle in a tilted condition after removing it.
4. Clean the surface around the waste toner collecting port.See P.90
5. Remove the waste toner bottle from its box, and remove the packing material.
4038F2C541DB
[1]
4038F2C542DB
[1]
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. Periodical check
19
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6. Set the waste toner bottle [1] in place.
7. Close the front door.NOTE• Replace the dust filter/cooling fan supplied with the waste toner bottle at the same
time.
3.4.6 Replacing the ozone filter
A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Ozone filter: 120,000 prints (when the transfer belt unit is replaced)
B. Procedure
1. Holding onto the hook, remove the ozone filter [1].
NOTE• The ozone filter is supplied with the transfer belt unit. Replace it when replacing
the transfer belt unit.
4038F2C543DB
[1]
[1]
4039F2C002DB
3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
20
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
3.4.7 Replacing the deodorant filter
A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Deodorant filter: 7,500/15,000 prints (when the toner cartridge K is replaced)
B. Procedure
1. Holding onto the hook, take out the deodorant filter [1].
NOTE• The deodorant filter is supplied with the toner cartridge K. Replace it when replac-
ing the toner cartridge K.
3.4.8 Replacing the dust filter/vertical conveyance
A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Dust filter/vertical conveyance: 120,000 prints (when the transfer belt unit is replaced)
B. Procedure1. If the duplex option is mounted, remove it.
See P.4 of the duplex option service manual.
2. Remove the dust filter/vertical con-veyance [1].
NOTE• The dust filter/vertical conveyance is supplied with the transfer belt unit.
Replace it when replacing the transfer belt unit.
[1]
4039F2C003DB
[1]
4038F2C020DC
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. Periodical check
21
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
3.4.9 Replacing the dust filter/cooling fan
A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Dust filter/cooling fan: 18,000 prints (when the waste toner bottle is replaced)
B. Procedure1. If the dust filter/cooling fan is contaminated by dust or foreign matter, clean it up.
2. Remove the dust filter/cooling fan [1].
NOTE• The dust filter/cooling fan is supplied with the waste toner bottle.
Replace it when replacing the waste toner bottle.
3.4.10 Replacing the transfer roller
A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Transfer roller: 120,000 prints (when the transfer belt unit is replaced)
B. Removal procedure1. Turn OFF the main power switch.2. Open the right door.
3. Unlock the lock levers [1] (at two places).
4. Holding onto the lock levers [1] (at two places), remove the transfer roller [2].
[1]4039F2C004DB
[1]
[2]
4038F2C021DB
3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
22
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
C. Reinstallation procedure
1. Holding onto the lock levers [1] (at two places), mount the transfer roller [2].
2. Lock the lock levers [1](at two places).
3. Close the right door.
NOTE• Make sure that the door is locked in position both at front and rear.
4. Turn ON the main power switch.
NOTE• The transfer roller is supplied with the transfer belt unit. Replace it when replacing
the transfer belt unit.
3.4.11 Replacing the transfer belt unit
A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Transfer belt unit: 120,000 prints
B. Removal procedure1. Open the right door.
2. Remove two screws [1] and release the lock of the transfer belt unit [2].
[1]
[2]
4038F2C022DB
[1]
[2]
4039F2C005DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. Periodical check
23
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
3. Hold the both sides and lift it to take out the transfer belt unit [1] a little.
4. Hold the position [1] as shown in the left and remove the transfer belt unit [2].
NOTE• Do not touch the surface of the
transfer belt unit.• Cover the transfer belt with some-
thing such shade cloth to protect its surface from dust or foreign matter.
C. Reinstallation procedure
1. Insert the transfer belt unit [1].NOTE• Insert the transfer belt unit with
care not to allow its docking gear to be damaged by hitting it against the rail or associated part.
• Do not touch the surface of the transfer belt unit.
• Cover the transfer belt unit with something such shade cloth to pro-tect its surface from dust or foreign matter.
[1]4039F2C006DB
[1]
[2]
[1]
4039F2C007DB
[1]4039F2C008DB
3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
24
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
2. Install the transfer belt unit with two screws [1].
NOTE• Replace the transfer roller, the ozone filter and the dust filter/vertical conveyance,
which are supplied with the transfer belt, at the same time.
3. Close the right door.4. Reinstall the imaging unit and the waste toner bottle.5. Close the front door.6. Turn ON the main power switch.7. Select [QUALITY MENU] → [CALIBRATION] → [TONE CALIBRATION] and carry out
TONE CALIBRATION.
3.4.12 Replacing the toner cartridge Y,M,C,K
A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Toner cartridge Y,M,C: 6,000 prints/12,000 prints• Toner cartridge K: 7,500 prints/15,000 prints
B. Removal procedure1. Open the front door.
2. Pressing the toner cartridge lock tab [1], pull it toward.
[1]4039F2C009DB
4038F2C560DB
[1]
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. Periodical check
25
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
3. Pull the toner cartridge [1] toward to remove it.
C. Reinstallation procedure
1. Take out the new toner cartridge [1] from the unitary packing box and shake it well up and down 5 to 10 times.
2. Insert the toner cartridge [1] by fitting it to the groove on the main unit.
NOTE• Make sure the colors are matched
between the toner cartridge and label on the machine.
• Make sure the toner cartridge is inserted all the way.
• When replacing the toner cartridge (black), replace the deodorant filter supplied with it at the same time.
4038F2C538DB
[2]
4038F2C539DB
[1]
4038F2C540DB
[1]
3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
26
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
3.4.13 Replacing the imaging unit Y,M,C,K
A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Imaging unit Y,M,C: 30,000 prints• Imaging unit K: 50,000 prints
B. Removal procedure1. Turn OFF the main power switch and open the front door.2. Unplug the power cord.
3. Press the unlocking knob [1] of imag-ing unit.
4. Pull out the imaging unit [1], and remove it from main body.
4038F2C531DB
[1]
4038F2C532DB
[1]
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. Periodical check
27
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
C. Reinstallation procedure
1. Hold the imaging unit [1] with both hands and tilt it to the left as shown on the illustration. Shake it twice lightly. Tilt it to the right and shake it twice again lightly.
2. Take the imaging unit [1] out from the black plastic bag [2].
3. Peel off the tapes [1] so that the mounting bracket [2] can be removed. Then, remove the mounting bracket [2].
NOTE• Since the imaging unit is highly
susceptible to light, keep it shielded from light up to the time it is installed.
• Carefully unseal the plastic bag (black).
• If the imaging unit is packed in the plastic bag (black) again, seal the package using tape or another means.
4039F2C501DB
[1]
4039F2C502DB
[2]
[1]
4039F2C503DB
[2]
[1]
3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
28
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
4. Remove the caps [1] on the end of the imaging unit and the bottom packing material.
5. Keeping the imaging unit [1] in a level position, insert the imaging unit [1] into the mounting position all the way until it is stopped.
NOTE• Install them by fitting the blue label
position of imaging unit and one of the machine.
• Do not allow the imaging unit to become tilted while installing them into the main body, as damage to the PC drum can result.
6. Pull out the PC drum protective sheet [1] while pressing the imaging unit.
7. Insert the imaging unit all the way.NOTE• Make sure that the imaging unit is
inserted all the way.
8. Plug in the power cord.9. Close the front door.10. Turn ON the main power switch.
4039F2C504DB
[1]
4039F2C505DB
[1]
4039F2C506DB
[1]
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. Periodical check
29
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
NOTE• When removing / installing the
imaging unit, use care not to touch the surface of the PC drum [1].
3.4.14 Replacing the fusing unit
A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Fusing unit: 120,000 prints
B. Removal procedure1. Turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power cord from the power outlet, then
wait for about 20 minutes.2. Open the front door.
3. Unhook two tabs [1], and remove the exit tray connector protective cover [2].
4039F2C507DC
[1]
CAUTION
• The temperature gets high in the vicinity of the fusing unit. You may get burned when you come into contact with the area. Before replacement operations, make sure that more than 20 minutes have elapsed since the main and sub power switches were turned off.
[1]
[2]
4039F2C010DB
3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
30
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
4. Disconnect the connector [1].
5. Remove the screw [1], and remove the connector protective cover [2].
6. Disconnect two connectors [1].
7. Open the right cover.8. Open the fusing unit cover.
[1]
4039F2C011DB
[1]
[2]4039F2C012DB
[1]4039F2C013DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. Periodical check
31
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
9. Remove two screws [1], and remove the fusing unit [2].
NOTE• Do not leave the right door open.
[1]
[2]
4039F2C014DB
4. Service tool Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
32
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
4. Service tool
4.1 CE tool list
Tool name Shape Personnel Parts No. Remarks
PH window cleaning jig 1 4038 2083 ##
PH window cleaning jig pad
1 4038 2084 ##
4038F2C557DB
4038F2C558DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 4. Service tool
33
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
4.2 Print materials
4.2.1 Imaging unit single parts (IU)
See P.12
4.2.2 Toner cartridge single parts (T/C)
Also replace the deodorant filter packed in the T/C black at the same time.
*1: Life value that can be achieved with a probability of 90% even with product-to-product variations and fluctuating operating environmental conditions taken into consideration, when the T/C is used under the conditions of B/W ratio 5% for each color
4.2.3 Waste toner bottle
• Replace the dust filter/cooling fan supplied with the waste toner bottle at the same time.
*1: A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions.See P.12
4.2.4 Maintenance kit
There is no setting for the maintenance Kit.
Parts name Replacing period
Imaging unit K 50,000 prints
Imaging unit Y 30,000 prints
Imaging unit M 30,000 prints
Imaging unit C 30,000 prints
Parts name Replacing period *1
Toner cartridge K 7,500/15,000 prints
Toner cartridge Y 6,000/12,000 prints
Toner cartridge M 6,000/12,000 prints
Toner cartridge C 6,000/12,000 prints
Parts name Replacing period
Waste toner bottle 18,000 prints *1
1
5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
34
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
5. Firmware upgrade
5.1 Checking the current firmware version
1. Call the SERVICE MENU to the display.See P.161
2. Select [FIRMWARE VERSION].
3. Select the firmware to be updated and check the current version.See P.163
5.2 Firmware upgrading procedure by updater
5.2.1 Updating method
• To update the firmware, perform “Firmware Updater.”
A. System requirements
1
4039F2E701DA
FIRMWARE VERSIONCONTROLLER F/WENGINE F/WBOOT F/W
1
Computer
Windows• PC with a Pentium 2,400 MHz or faster processor
(A Pentium 3,500 MHz or faster processor is recommended.)
Macintosh• Apple Macintosh computer with a PowerPC G3 or later proces-
sor (A PowerPC G4 or later is recommended.)• Apple Macintosh computer with an Intel processor
OS
Windows• Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition/Professional, Windows
2000, Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Business/Enterprise/Ultimate
Macintosh• MacOS X 10.2 or later
(We recommend installing the newest patch.)
Available hard disk space
Windows • Approximately 20 to 26 MB
Macintosh • Approximately 30 to 42 MB
Memory • 128 MB or more
InterfaceWindows
• 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T Ethernet• USB 2.0 (High Speed) compliant• Parallel (IEEE 1284)
Macintosh • 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T Ethernet
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade
35 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
B. Connection for Windows(1) Starting the firmware updater
NOTE• Before starting the firmware updater, turn on the printer, and make sure that it is
correctly connected.
1. Download the firmware updater.2. Double-click “xxxxxxxxxxxx.exe.”3. The printer name and firmware version are displayed. Click the [Next].
4. The license agreement is displayed. Select “I agree”, and then click the [Next].
4039F2E702DA
4039F2E703DA
1
5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
36
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
5. The list of printer drivers is displayed. Select the appropriate connection for the environ-ment where the printer is being used.
• For a network connection: Select “Network port.”See P.37
• For a local connection: Select “Local port.”See P.39
• When specifying the IP address of the printer: Select “Printer IP address.”See P.41
NOTE• If you select “Network port” or “Local port”, make sure that the printer driver has
been installed.• If you select “Printer IP address”, the firmware can be updated even if a printer
driver is not already installed.
4039F2E704DA
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade
37 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
(2) For a network connection1. When “Network port” is selected, a list of printer drivers for the network port appears.2. Select the printer driver, and then click the [Next].
3. A message appears, requesting confirmation to update the firmware. Click the [Start] to begin transferring the firmware.
NOTE• Do not turn off the printer while its firmware is being updated.
4039F2E705DA
4039F2E706DA
1
5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
38
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
4. The result of the firmware transfer is displayed. Click the [Exit].
5. If the firmware was successfully updated, the printer will automatically restart.
<If spooling of the data fails>
NOTE• If spooling fails, data may remain in the printer spooler. Delete this data, and then
try again.
1. If spooling of the data fails, the following message appears.2. Click [OK].
4039F2E707DA
4039F2E708DA
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade
39 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
3. Check that the printer is ready and that it is correctly connected, and then click the [Update again].
(3) For a local connection1. When “Local port” is selected, a list of printer drivers for the local port appears.2. Select the printer driver, and then click the [Next].
4039F2E709DA
4039F2E710DA
1
5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
40
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
3. A message appears, requesting confirmation to update the firmware. Click the [Start] to begin transferring the firmware.
NOTE• Do not turn off the printer while its firmware is being updated.
4. The result of the firmware transfer is displayed. Click the [Exit].
5. If the firmware was successfully updated, the printer will automatically restart.
<If spooling of the data fails>• For details, see “For a network connection.”
See P.38
4039F2E711DA
4039F2E712DA
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade
41 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
(4) When specifying the IP address of the printer1. When “Printer IP address” is selected, the “Printer IP address” box becomes available.2. Type in the IP address, and then click the [Next].
3. A message appears, requesting confirmation to update the firmware. Click the [Start] to begin transferring the firmware.
NOTE• Do not turn off the printer while its firmware is being updated.
4039F2E713DA
4039F2E714DA
1
5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
42
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
4. The result of the firmware transfer is displayed. Click the [Exit].
5. If the firmware was successfully updated, the printer will automatically restart.
<If transferring of the data fails>1. If transferring of the data fails, the following message appears.2. Click [OK].
4039F2E715DA
4039F2E716DA
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade
43 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
3. Check that the printer is ready and that it is correctly connected, and then click the [Update again].
C. Connection for Macintosh(1) Starting the firmware updater and the updating procedure
NOTE• Before starting the firmware updater, turn on the printer, and make sure that it is
correctly connected.
1. Download the firmware updater.2. Double-click “xxxxxxxxxxxx.”3. The printer name and firmware version are displayed. Click the [Next].
4039F2E717DA
4039F2E718DA
1
5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
44
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
4. The license agreement is displayed. Select “I agree”, and then click the [Next].
5. The screen for specifying the IP address of the printer appears.
6. Type in the IP address, and then click the [Next].
4039F2E719DA
4039F2E720DA
4039F2E721DA
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade
45 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
7. A message appears, requesting confirmation to update the firmware. Click the [Start] to begin transferring the firmware.
NOTE• Do not turn off the printer while its firmware is being updated.
8. The result of the firmware transfer is displayed. Click the [Exit].
9. If the firmware was successfully updated, the printer will automatically restart.
<If transferring of the data fails>1. If transferring of the data fails, the following message appears.2. Click [OK].
4039F2E722DA
4039F2E723DA
4039F2E724DA
1
5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
46
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
3. Check that the printer is ready and that it is correctly connected, and then click the [Update again].
5.2.2 Checking the version after the firmware update
1. Call the SERVICE MENU to the display.2. Select [FIRMWARE VERSION].
3. Select the firmware that has been updated and check the current version.See P.163
4039F2E725DA
4039F2E701DA
FIRMWARE VERSIONCONTROLLER F/WENGINE F/WBOOT F/W
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Other
47
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6. Other
6.1 Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items
A. Paint-locked screws
NOTE• To prevent loose screws, a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to
the screws.• The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations
and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during transportation.
• If the screw lock coated screws are loosened or removed, be sure to apply a screw lock after the screws are tightened.
B. Red-painted screws
NOTE• The screws which are difficult to be adjusted in the field are painted in red in order
to prevent them from being removed by mistake.• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also
be noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one repre-sentative screw may be marked with the red paint.
C. Variable resistors on board
NOTE• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions
are given in Adjustment/Setting.
D. Removal of PWBs
CAUTION• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “Handling of
PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.• Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components
on the board, be sure to ground your body.
6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
48
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6.2 Disassembly/assembly/cleaning list (other parts)
6.2.1 Disassembly/assembly parts list
No. Section Part name Ref.Page
1
Exterior parts
Rear left cover P.50
2 Front left cover P.50
3 Upper front cover P.50
4 Rear right cover P.51
5 Rear cover P.51
6 Tray 1 left cover P.51
7 Tray 1 right cover P.51
8 Tray 1 upper cover P.51
9 Front door P.52
10 Exit tray P.52
11 Control panel P.54
12 Tray 2 P.55
13 Front cover P.56
14
Board and etc.
Controller board (PWB-P) P.58
15 Memory (DIMM0) P.59
16 Hard disk kit (option) P.60
17 Mechanical control board (PWB-M) P.60
18 RTC board (PWB-R) P.63
19 DC power supply (PU1) P.64
20 High voltage unit (HV1) P.65
21 Tray 2 paper size board (PWB-I) P.66
22 PH interface board (PWB-D) P.67
23
Unit
Multi bypass unit P.69
24 PH unit P.70
25 Transport drive assy P.74
26 Hopper drive assy P.76
27 Right door assy P.78
28
Others
Cooling fan motor/2 (M22) assy P.80
29 Color developing motor (M3) P.80
30 Color PC drum motor (M2) P.81
31 Toner supply motor C/K (M7) P.81
32 Toner supply motor Y/M (M6) P.82
33 Main motor (M1) P.82
34 Fusing drive motor (M4) P.83
35IDC/registration sensor/1(SE1), IDC/registration sensor/2 (SE2)
P.83
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Other
49
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6.2.2 Cleaning parts list
No. Section Part name Ref.Page
1 PH PH window P.86
2 Processing section Transfer belt unit P.87
3Tray 2
Tray 2 feed roller (standard) P.87
4 Tray 2 separation roller P.87
5Tray 1
Tray 1 feed roller (bypass) P.88
6 Tray 1 separation roller P.88
7 Conveyance section Registration roller P.89
8 Image transfer section Area around the waste toner collecting port P.90
1
6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
50
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6.3 Disassembly/assembly procedure
NOTE• The following procedure mainly uses photos and illustrations of magicolor 7450.
The same procedure is applicable to magicolor 7450II unless otherwise noted.
6.3.1 Rear left cover/front left cover/upper front cover
1. Open the front door [1].2. Open the right door [2].3. Remove two screws [3], and remove the upper front cover [4].4. Remove two screws [5], and remove the rear left cover [6].5. Remove two screws [7], and remove the front left cover [8].
1
[1]
[2]
[3][4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]4039F2C015DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Other
51
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6.3.2 Rear right cover/rear cover
1. Open the right door [1].2. Remove three screws [2], and remove the rear right cover [3].3. Remove nine screws [4], and remove the rear cover [5].
6.3.3 Tray 1 left cover /tray 1 right cover /tray 1 upper cover
1. Unhook the tab [1], and remove the tray 1 left cover [2].2. Remove the screws [3], and remove the tray 1 right cover [4].3. Remove the tray extension [5].4. Remove two screws [6], and remove the tray 1 upper cover [7].
[1]
[2][3] [4]
[4]
[4]
[5]
4039F2C016DB
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6] [7] 4039F2C017DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
51-1
mag
icol
or 7
450/
7450
IIM
aint
enan
ce
NOTE• When mounting the Tray1 Right Cover [1], use care not to allow the harness [3] of
the bypass paper feed clutch to be wedged in the hook [2] of the cover. If the har-ness [3] is wedged, it may be shorted, resulting in a machine failure.
4038F2C700AA
[2]
[1]
[3]
6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
52
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6.3.4 Front Door
1. Open the front door.
2. Remove the screw [1] each to remove the right and left stoppers [2].
3. Pull out the right and left pins [1] to remove the front door [2].
6.3.5 Exit tray
1. Remove the rear left cover, front left cover and rear cover.See P.50
2. Remove the dust filter/cooling fan [1].
[1]
[2]
4038F2C038DC
[1]
[2]
[2]
4038F2C039DB
[1]4039F2C018DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Other
53
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
3. Open the upper fusing cover [1].4. Unhook two tabs [2], and remove the
upper fusing cover [1].
5. Disconnect the connector [1].6. Remove two screws [2], and remove
the exit sensor assy [3].
7. Remove three screws [1], and remove the exit tray [2].
[1]
[2] [2]
4039F2C019DB
[1]
[2]
[3]4039F2C020DB
[1]
[2]
4039F2C021DB
6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
54
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6.3.6 Control panel
1. Remove the upper front cover.See P.50
2. Remove two screws [1].
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the ground terminal [2].
4. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the control panel [2].
[1]
[1]
4039F2C022DB
[2]
[3]4039F2C023DB
[1]
[2]
4039F2C024DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Other
55
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6.3.7 Tray 2
1. Pull out the tray 2 [1].
2. Loosen the screw [1], hold two tabs [3] and remove the spacer [2].
[1]4039F2C025DB
[2][1]
4038F2C609DB
[3]
6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
56
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
3. Pull out the tray 2 [2] while pressing the slide locks [1] at both ends.
6.3.8 Front Cover
1. Remove the front door.See P.52
2. Remove the front left cover, upper front cover and control panel.See P.50, See P.54
3. Remove the toner cartridges Y,M,C,K.See P.24
4. Remove the waste toner bottle.See P.18
5. Remove the imaging units Y,M,C,K.See P.26
NOTE• After the imaging unit has been removed from the main unit wrap it in the light
shielding cloth and store it in a dark place. DO NOT leave the imaging unit exposed to light for a extended period of time as it will become damaged.
6. Remove the screw [1], and remove the connector protective cover [2].
[1] [2]
[1]
[2]
4037F2C044DC
[1]
[2]4039F2C524DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Other
57
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
7. Disconnect two connectors [1].
8. Disconnect two connectors [1].
9. Remove four screws [1].
[1]4039F2C525DB
[1]
4038F2C053DB
[1]
[1]
4039F2C026DB
6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
58
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
10. Unhook six tabs [1], and remove the front cover [2].
6.3.9 Controller board (PWB-P)
1. Remove the rear left cover.See P.50
2. Remove the memory [1].
3. Disconnect all the connectors and flat cables on the controller board.
[1]
[1]
[2]
4039F2C027DB
[1]
4039F2C040DC
4039F2C041DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Other
59
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
4. Remove three screws [1].
5. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the controller board [2].
NOTE• When the controller board is
replaced, make sure to update the firmware.
6.3.10 Memory (DIMM0)
1. Remove the rear left cover.See P.50
2. Remove the memory [1].
[1]
4039F2C042DB
[1]
[1]
[2]
4039F2C043DB
[1]
4039F2C040DC
6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
60
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6.3.11 Hard disk kit (Option)
1. Remove the rear left cover.See P.50
2. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the hard disk [2].
6.3.12 Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
1. Remove the exit tray.See P.52
2. Remove the controller board.See P.58
3. Remove six screws [1], and remove the interface cover [2].
4039F2C509DB
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
4039F2C028DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Other
61
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the flat cable cover [2].
5. Remove eleven screws [1], and remove the controller board mount-ing bracket [2].
6. Disconnect all the connectors and flat cables on the mechanical control board.
[1]
[2]
4039F2C029DB
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
4039F2C030DB
4039F2C031DB
6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
62
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
7. Remove six screws [1], and remove the mechanical control board [2].
NOTE• When mechanical control board (PWB-M) is replaced, relocate the parameter chip
(IC6). Mount the parameter chip (IC6) of old mechanical control board onto the new mechanical control board.
NOTE• When the parameter chip (IC6) is
mounted, precisely fit the direc-tions of each “A.”
NOTE• When the control board is to be
replaced, rewriting the firmware to the latest one.
[1] [1]
[2]
4039F2C032DB
4037F2C061DC
4037F2C534DB
A
A
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Other
63
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
NOTE• When mounting the mechanical
control board, mount it so that the ferrite core [1] will be between two wire saddles. Be careful that the ferrite core [1] will not go over the control board.
6.3.13 RTC board (PWB-R)
1. Remove the controller board mounting bracket.See P.58
2. Disconnect the connector [1].
3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the RTC board [2].
[1]
4039F2C033DB
[1]4039F2C034DB
[1]
[2]
4039F2C035DB
6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
64
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6.3.14 DC power supply (PU1)
1. Remove the exit tray.See P.52
2. Remove the control panel.See P.54
3. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness [3] from the edge cover [2].
4. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the protective sheet of DC power supply [2].
5. Disconnect all the connectors on the DC power supply.
[1]
[2]
[3]
4039F2C036DB
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]4039F2C037DB
4039F2C038DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Other
65
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6. Remove eight screws [1], and remove the DC power supply [2].
6.3.15 High voltage unit (HV1)
1. Remove the rear cover.See P.51
2. Disconnect four connectors [1].
3. Remove five screws [1] and the tab [2], and remove the high voltage unit [3].
NOTE• When installing the high voltage
unit, make sure that the terminal end surely contacts.
[1]
[1][2]
4039F2C039DB
[1]
4038F2C085DB
[1] [1]
[2]
[3]
4038F2C086DB
6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
66
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
NOTE• When installing the high voltage
unit, make sure that the claw [1] shown in the left illustration is surely set up.
6.3.16 Tray 2 paper size board (PWB-I)
1. Pull out the tray 2.2. Remove the rear cover.
See P.51
3. Disconnect the connector [2].4. Remove two screws [1], and remove
the tray 2 paper size board assy [3].
5. Remove the lever [1].6. Remove the tray 2 paper size board
[2].
[1]4038F2C087DB
[1]
[2] [3]
4038F2C088DB
[1][2]
4038F2C516DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Other
67
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6.3.17 PH interface board (PWB-D)
1. Remove the front cover.See P.56
2. Remove the transfer belt.See P.22
3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the front right cover [2].
4. Remove seven screws [1], and remove the right door switch assy [2].
5. Remove the screw [1] each, and remove the imaging unit contact assy [2] of each color.
[1][2]
4038F2C097DB
[1][1]
[2]
4038F2C098DB
[1]
[2]
4038F2C099DB
6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
68
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6. Remove two screws [1] each, and remove the imaging unit roll assy [2] of each color.
7. Remove all the connectors and the flat cables on the PH interface board.
8. Remove two screws [1] and six tabs [2], and remove the PH interface board [3].
[1]
[2]
4038F2C100DB
4038F2C101DB
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]4038F2C102DC
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
69
mag
icol
or 7
450/
7450
IIM
aint
enan
ce
6.3.18 Multi bypass unit
1. Remove the tray 1 right cover and the tray 1 left cover.See P.51
2. Disconnect five connectors [1].
3. Remove four screws [1], and remove the multi bypass unit [2].
NOTE1• When installing the multi bypass
unit, fit the position of dowel shown in the left illustration.
[1][1]
4038F2C103DB
[1]
[1]
[2]
4038F2C104DB
4038F2C105DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
69-1
mag
icol
or 7
450/
7450
IIM
aint
enan
ce
NOTE2• When mounting the Tray1 Right Cover [1] after the multi bypass unit is installed,
use care not to allow the harness [3] of the bypass paper feed clutch to be wedged in the hook [2] of the cover. If the harness [3] is wedged, it may be shorted, result-ing in a machine failure.
4038F2C700AA
[2]
[1]
[3]
6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
70
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6.3.19 PH unit
A. Removal procedure1. Remove the front cover.
See P.562. Remove the transfer belt.
See P.22
3. Remove the screw [1] and discon-nect the connector [2] respectively, and remove three imaging unit guide rails [3].
4. Disconnect the flat cable [1] and the connector [2] of the PH unit (Black).
5. Unhook the tab [1], and remove the gear [2] of the PH unit (Black).
[1]
[2] [3]4038F2C106DB
[1]
[2]4038F2C107DB
[2]
[1]
4038F2C108DC
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Other
71
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6. Remove the stopper [1] of the PH unit (Black).
NOTE• When removing the stopper, use
care so that both ends of the stop-per will not open but stay parallel as shown on the left. Keep using the stopper after once stretched out may cause uneven pitch or other image troubles.
7. Remove the PH unit (Black).Move the front side of the PH unit to left a little, and remove the boss [1] from the locating hole [2].Lift up the front side of the PH unit a little.
Remove the boss [1] at the rear side of the PH unit from the locating hole [2].
NOTESince the back of the PH unit is pushed to the right with the two plate springs [3], remove it by tilting the backside of the PH unit to the left as shown in the left illustration.
[1]4039F2E601DB
4038F2C110DB
[1][2]
4037F2C111DC
[1]
[2]
[3]
6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
72
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
Remove the PH unit [1].
8. Follow the same procedures to remove all PH units.
B. Reinstall procedure
1. Fit the back of the PH unit [1] into the plate spring [2] of installation plate.
2. Push the PH unit [1] along the right side line of PH unit installation plate all the way and fit it into the plate spring [2].
3. Make sure that the two bosses [3] at front and rear side of the PH unit fit in the locating hole [4].
4037F2C112DC
[1]
4037F2C113DC
[1]
[2]
4037F2C114DB
[3][4]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Other
73
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
4. Reinstall the stopper [1].NOTE• When reinstalling the stopper, use
care so that both ends of the stop-per will not open but stay parallel as shown on the left. Keep using the stopper after once stretched out may cause uneven pitch or other image troubles.
5. Reinstall the gear [1].NOTE• Make sure that the gear claw is fit
in.6. Connect the connector and the flat
cable.NOTE• Make sure the harness is installed
along with the harness guide.7. Follow the same procedures to
install all the PH units.
[1]4039F2E600DB
[1]4038F2C116DB
6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
74
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
8. Install the imaging unit guide rails [1].NOTE• Make sure that the two claws [2] at
rear end of the rail are fit in the locating hole on the main unit.
9. Reinstall the transfer belt.10. Reinstall the front cover.11. Make skew adjustment of the PH unit.
See P.189
NOTE• When replacing the PH unit, make sure to conduct PH unit skew adjustment.
6.3.20 Transport drive assy
1. Remove the rear cover.See P.51
2. Remove the high voltage unit.See P.65
3. Remove the color developing motor.See P.80
4. Remove the color PC drum motor.See P.81
5. Remove the main motor.See P.82
6. Remove three screws [1], and remove the reinforcement plate [2] of the right door and spring [3].
[1]
[2]
[1]
4038F2C117DB
[1]
[2]
[3]
4038F2C118DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Other
75
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
7. Remove the shoulder screw [1].
8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the metal blanking plate [2].
9. Disconnect the connector [2].10. Remove five screws [1], and remove
the rear handle assy [3].
[1]4038F2C119DB
[1]
[2]
4038F2C120DB
[1]
[1] [2]
[3]
[1]
4038F2C121DB
6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
76
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
11. Disconnect the connector [1].12. Remove the harnesses [3] from five
wire saddles [2].
13. Remove eight screws [1], and remove the transport drive assy [2].
NOTE• The screws are fixed at the position
with the triangle markers.
6.3.21 Hopper drive assy
1. Remove the transfer drive assy.See P.74
2. Disconnect seven connectors [1].
[1]
[2]
[2][3]
[3]
4038F2C122DB
[1]
[1][2]
4038F2C123DB
[1]
[1]
[1]
4038F2C124DC
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Other
77
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
3. Remove the harness from four wire saddles [1].
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the duct [2].
5. Remove four screws [1].6. Unhook two tabs [2], and remove the
hopper drive assy [3].
[1]4038F2C125DB
[1] [2]
4038F2C126DB
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
4038F2C127DB
6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
78
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6.3.22 Right door assy
1. Remove the rear cover.See P.51
2. Remove the high voltage unit.See P.65
3. Open the right door.
4. Remove three screws [1], and remove the reinforcement plate [2] of the right door and spring [3].
5. Remove the shoulder screw [1].
6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the metal blanking plate [2].
[1]
[2]
[3]
4039F2C510DB
[1]4039F2C511DB
[1]
[2]
4039F2C512DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Other
79
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
7. Disconnect the connector [2].8. Remove five screws [1], and remove
the rear handle assy [3].
9. Disconnect four connectors [1].
10. Remove the front door.See P.52
11. Pull out the tray 1.
12. Remove two screws [1], and remove the front right cover [2].
[1]
[1] [2]
[3]
[1]
4039F2C513DB
[1] [1][1]
[1]4039F2C514DB
[2] [1]
[1]4039F2C515DB
6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
80
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
13. Remove the screw [1], and remove the shaft [2].
14. Remove the right door assy [3].
6.3.23 Cooling fan motor/2 (M22) assy
1. Remove the rear cover.See P.51
2. Remove the exit tray.See P.52
3. Disonnect the connector [1].4. Remove two screws [1], and remove
the cooling fan motor/2 assy [3].
6.3.24 Color developing motor (M3)
1. Remove the cooling fan motor/2 assy.See P.80
2. Disconnect the connector [1].3. Remove four screws [2], and remove
the color developing motor [3].
[1] [3]
[2]4039F2C516DB
[1][2]
[3]4039F2C526DB
[1]
[2]
[3]
4038F2C149DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Other
81
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6.3.25 Color PC drum motor (M2)
1. Remove the cooling fan motor/2 assy.See P.80
2. Disconnect the connector [1].3. Remove four screws [2], and remove
the color PC drum motor [3].
6.3.26 Toner supply motor C/K (M7)
1. Remove the cooling fan motor/2 assy.See P.80
2. Disconnect the connector [1].3. Remove two screws [2], and remove
the toner supply motor C/K [3].
[1]
[2][3]
4038F2C150DB
[1]
[3][2]
4038F2C151DB
6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
82
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6.3.27 Toner supply motor Y/M (M6)
1. Remove the cooling fan motor/2 assy.See P.80
2. Disconnect the connector [1].3. Remove two screws [2], and remove
the toner supply motor Y/M [3].
6.3.28 Main motor (M1)
1. Remove the rear cover.See P.51
2. Disconnect the connector [1].3. Remove four screws [2], and remove
the main motor [3].
[2][1]
[3]
4038F2C152DB
[1]
[2]
[3]
4039F2C517DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Other
83
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6.3.29 Fusing drive motor (M4)
1. Remove the rear cover.See P.51
2. Disconnect the connector [1].3. Remove two screws [2], and remove
the fusing drive motor [3].
6.3.30 IDC/registration sensor/1, IDC/registration sensor/2 (SE1/SE2)
1. Remove the transfer belt.See P.22
2. Remove the multi bypass unit.See P.69
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the plate spring [2].
[1]
[2][3]
4039F2C518DB
[1][2]
4038F2C169DB
6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
84
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
4. Remove the shoulder screw [1] and the screw [2].
5. Remove the vertical transport unit [3] in manner of the left illustration.
NOTE• Since multiple connectors are con-
nected to the backside of the verti-cal transport assy, do not pull it by force.
6. Unhook the tabs [1] of both sides, and remove the sensor cover [2].
NOTE• Use care not to miss the spring [3].
7. Disconnect the connector [2].8. Remove two screws [1], and remove
the IDC/registration sensor/1 [3].
[3]
[1] [2]
4038F2C170DC
[1]
[2]
[3]
4038F2C171DB
[1][2]
[3]
4038F2C172DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Other
85
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
9. Repeat the step 6 and 8, and remove the IDC/registration sensor/2 (rear side) [1].
[1]
4038F2C173DB
1
6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
86
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6.4 Cleaning procedure
NOTE• The following procedure mainly uses photos and illustrations of magicolor 7450.
The same procedure is applicable to magicolor 7450II unless otherwise noted.• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol.
6.4.1 PH window
1. Open the front door.
2. Remove the PH window cleaning jig [1].
3. Insert the PH window cleaning jig [1] to the cleaning port [2] and clean it by putting the jig back and forth a couple times.
NOTE• Clean every PH window of CMYK.
1
4038F2C547DB
[1]
4038F2C548DB
[2][1]
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Other
87
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6.4.2 Transfer belt
1. Remove the transfer belt.See P.22
2. Using a dried soft cloth, wipe the transfer belt [1].
NOTE• If it is difficult to clean with dried
soft cloth, dampen a soft cloth with a solvent.
• Do not wipe out with water.• When solvent is used to dampen a
cloth, do not use the ones other than shown below: isopropyl alcohol, ethyl alcohol, PPC Cleaner, Sol mix AP-7.
6.4.3 Tray 2 feed roller (standard)
1. Pull out the tray 2.
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 2 feed roller (standard) [1] clean of dirt.
6.4.4 Tray 2 separation roller
1. Pull out the tray 2.
2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 2 separation roller mounting bracket assy [2].
[1]
4038F2C174DB
[1]
4038F2C175DB
[1]
[2]
4038F2C002DC
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
88
mag
icol
or 7
450/
7450
IIM
aint
enan
ce
4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 2 separation roller [1] clean of dirt.
6.4.5 Tray 1 feed roller (bypass)
1. Remove the multi bypass unit.See P.69
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 1 feed roller (bypass) [1].
NOTE• When mounting the Tray1 Right Cover [1] after the multi bypass unit is installed,
use care not to allow the harness [3] of the bypass paper feed clutch to be wedged in the hook [2] of the cover. If the harness [3] is wedged, it may be shorted, result-ing in a machine failure.
[1]
4038F2C176DB
[1]
4038F2C177DB
4038F2C700AA
[2]
[1]
[3]
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
88-1
mag
icol
or 7
450/
7450
IIM
aint
enan
ce
6.4.6 Tray 1 separation roller
1. Remove the multi bypass unit.See P.69
2. Remove the screws [1], and remove the ground terminal [2].
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the tray 1 separation roller assy [2].
4. Using the soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 1 separation roller [1].
[1][2]
4038F2C009DB
[1]
[2]
4038F2C010DB
[1]
4038F2C178DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
89
mag
icol
or 7
450/
7450
IIM
aint
enan
ce
NOTE• When mounting the Tray1 Right Cover [1] after the multi bypass unit is installed,
use care not to allow the harness [3] of the bypass paper feed clutch to be wedged in the hook [2] of the cover. If the harness [3] is wedged, it may be shorted, result-ing in a machine failure.
6.4.7 Registration roller
1. Open the right door.
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the registration rollers [1] clean of dirt.
4038F2C700AA
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
4038F2C017DB
6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
90
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ma
inte
na
nce
6.4.8 Area around the waste toner collecting port
1. Remove the waste toner bottle.See P.18
2. Wipe the areas around the waste toner collecting port [1] clean of spilled toner and dirt using a soft cloth dampened with water or alco-hol.
[1]
4039F2C001DA
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 7. How to Use the adjustment section
91
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
Adjustment/Setting7. How to Use the adjustment section• This section contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for
this machine.• Throughout this section the default settings are indicated by “ ”.
Advance checksBefore attempting to solve the customer’s problem, the following advance checks must be made:
• Does the power supply voltage meet the specifications?• Is the power supply is properly grounded?• Does the machine share a power supply with any other machine that draws a large cur-
rent intermittently (for example, an elevator or air conditioner that generates electrical noise)?
• Is the installation site level and environmentally appropriate (for example, away from high temperatures, high humidity, direct sunlight, direct ventilation, etc.?
• Does the original have a problem that may cause a defective image?• Is the density properly selected?• Is the correct media being used for printing?• Are the units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC drum, etc.) properly
replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life?• Is there an adequate supply of toner in the toner cartridges?
CAUTION• Unplug the machine’s power cord before starting a service job procedure.• Use special care when handling the fusing unit, which can be extremely hot.• The developing unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring
instruments away from it.• Take care not to damage the PC drum with a tool or similar device.• Do not touch IC pins with your bare hands.
8. Description of the control panel Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
92
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
8. Description of the control panel
8.1 Control panel display
8.1.1 Parts of the control panel display
• The following shows the names of each part of the control panel. These names are used throughout this manual.From the top, the panel is divided into LCD 1, LCD 2, LCD 3, and LCD 4.
• LCD 4 may display a message instructing you to press a key on the control panel. When you press that key, the displayed message changes.
NOTE• The display screen is not designed for touch panel operation; therefore, do not
touch the icons on the screen. If it is pushed too hard, the LCD (Liquid Crystal Dis-play) may be damaged.
4039F3E501DB
READY
for help YMCK
TONER LOW M
LCD 1
LCD 2
LCD 3
Up key
Menu key
Right keyDown key
Left key
Cancel key
LCD 4
READY display
ERROR display
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 8. Description of the control panel
93
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
8.1.2 Message structure
• There are five types of messages.
Message Description
Normal messages These messages are displayed after warmup has been completed:• Toner remaining gauge• Data-receiving message• Printing message• Firmware update messages• Warnings
Menu messages These messages are displayed after the MENU key is pressed.
Operator call messages These messages are displayed when minor error(s) that can be handled by users occur.
Service call messages These messages are displayed when error(s) that cannot be handled by users occur.
Help messages These messages are displayed when the down key is pressed when a nor-mal message/warning or operator call message is displayed.
Normal message Menu message Operator call message
Service call message Help message
4138F3E002DB
READY
to enter YMCK
4138F3E003DB
MENUPROOF/PRINT MENUPRINT MENUPAPER MENU
4138F3E004DB
TONER EMPTY
for help YMCK
REPLACE M
4039F3E517DB
SERVICE CALL C002RAM ERROR
4138F3E006DB
? PREPARE NEW WASTE TONER BOTTLE
8. Description of the control panel Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
94
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
8.1.3 Normal messages
• The basic screen is displayed after warm-up has been completed.• The “READY LED ” lights up while the message is displayed.
A. Toner-remaining level gauge• The amount of each color of toner remaining is graphed in 10% increments (11 scales.)
However, it’s not displayed during the following states:- Operator call- Service call- Menu- Help menu- BOOT message- When the toner remaining amount is not determined immediately after start-up.
Display Description
LCD 1 Printer mode is displayed. (Normally, [READY] is displayed.)
LCD 2 The message is displayed. (Normally, no message is displayed.)
LCD 3
LCD 4 Key guidance is displayed.• Normally [MENU to enter] is displayed.
When the MENU key is pressed, the panel displays the MENU screen.• When a WARNING message is displayed, [ for help] is also displayed.
When the down key is pressed, the panel displays the HELP screen.
4138F3E007DB
YMCK
READY
to enter YMCK
State
Message
Key guidance
Toner-remaining level gauge
Toner-remaining amount 100% (Full)
Toner-remaining amount 0% (Empty)
Toner color display
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 8. Description of the control panel
95
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
B. Data receiving message/print• The control panel displays the following description at data receiving message/print.
Display Description
LCD 1 Printer mode is displayed (for example, PRINTING).• PROCESSING is displayed during data receiving or printer startup.• PRINTING is displayed during printing.• When printing in sets, [COPYING] is displayed after the second set starts printing.
• The normal printing data-receiving icon “ ” is displayed on the right during data receiving.
• The Camera-Direct connecting icon “ ” is displayed on the right when the digital camera is connected to the machine.
• The Camera-Direct printing data-receiving icon “ ” is displayed on the right during data receiving.
LCD 2 Job information is displayed (for example, 1 AKIRA KUROSAWA).• The job owner name, etc. set with PJL commands is displayed.• When multiple jobs are set, the number is displayed to the left of the owner name.
LCD 3 Job progress is displayed (for example, 1/7 page).• In normal print mode, number of processed print/total number of print is displayed.• When printing in sets, number of processed print/total number of a set print is displayed
while the first set is copying. After the second set starts printing, the LCD 1 state is changed to COPYING and number of processed print /total number of print is displayed.
LCD 4 Scroll bar is displayed.• When multiple jobs are sent, a scroll bar is displayed.• By pressing the left key /right key , the jobs waiting to be printed are displayed.
The following example shows the scroll bar in the case of two jobs. By pressing the right key, the panel displays the job waiting to be printed. To return to the display of the job cur-rently processing, press the left key.
State
Job information
Scroll bar
Data-receiving icon
Left keyRight key
Print-waiting job
Progress
4138F3E010DB
PRINTING 1 AKIRA KUROSAWA
1/ 7 pageYMCK
4138F3E011DB
PRINTING 2 TAKESHI KITANO
0/ 1 pageYMCK
8. Description of the control panel Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
96
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
C. Firmware update• The control panel displays the following description at firmware update.
D. Warning• This message is displayed when the print is available but some user manipulation(s) are
required. The control panel displays the following description for warning.
Display Description
LCD 1 FIRMWARE UPDATE is displayed.
LCD 2 LCD 2 displays the type of firmware (for example, SYSTEM).• SYSTEM: Controller firmware• BOOT: Boot firmware• RESOURCE: Resource file• CONFIGURATION: Equipment configuration file• ENGINE: Engine firmware
LCD 3 Progress of the update is displayed (for example, 90%).
LCD 4 No display
Firmware update
Type of firmware
Progress
4138F3E012DB
FIRMWARE UPDATE
YMCK
SYSTEM 90%
Display Description
LCD 1 Print mode is displayed and warning icon is displayed on the right (for example, READY).
LCD 2 Warning message is displayed (for example, TONER LOW M).
LCD 3
LCD 4 Key guidance is displayed (for example, for help: By pressing the down key , the screen displays the help screen).
State
Warning message
Key guidance
Warning icon
4138F3E013DB
READY
for help YMCK
TONER LOW M
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 8. Description of the control panel
97
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
E. Job cancellation• By pressing the CANCEL key after the job is sent, the control panel displays the job can-
cel menu.• When no job is has been sent, pressing the CANCEL key has no effect.• The control panel displays the following description at the job cancel menu.
• By pressing the up key /down key , the item can be selected.• The selected item is displayed with highlighted text. The default setting is CONTINUE.• By pressing the MENU key, the selected item is entered.• By pressing the CANCEL key, the job cancel menu is closed.
• By selecting CURRENT JOB or ALL JOB and pressing the MENU key, job cancellation is implemented.
Display Description
LCD 1 CANCEL JOB is displayed.
LCD 2 CONTINUE is displayed.• Function: Continue the print of currently processing job.
LCD 3 CURRENT JOB is displayed.• Function: Stop the print of currently processing job.
LCD 4 ALL JOBS is displayed• Stop the printing of all jobs, including the job currently being processed and all jobs waiting
to be printed.
Job cancellation
Cancelled Job items
4138F3E014DB
CANCEL JOBCONTINUECURRENT JOBALL JOBS
Canceling job
Key guidance
4138F3E015DB
CANCELING JOB
to enter YMCK
8. Description of the control panel Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
98
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
8.1.4 Menu
• The Menu is displayed when the MENU key is pressed.• The control panel displays the following description at the Menu screen.
• For the details of each item, see “Menu.”See P.110
Display Description
LCD 1 Menu items that are above this will be displayed.
LCD 2 Menu items are displayed (3 items/ 7 items).• By pressing the up key /down key , the item is selected.• The Menu consists of the following 7 items:
- PROOF/ PRINT MENU- PRINT MENU- PAPER MENU- QUALITY MENU- CAMERA DIRECT- INTERFACE MENU- SYS DEFAULT MENU- MAINTENANCE MENU- SERVICE MENU
LCD 3
LCD 4
Menu
Menu items
Scroll bar
Down key
Up key
4138F3E003DB
MENUPROOF/PRINT MENUPRINT MENUPAPER MENU
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 8. Description of the control panel
99
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
8.1.5 Operator call messages
• These messages are displayed when minor error(s) that can be handled by user occur.• The “Error LED ” lights while the message is displayed on the control panel.• The “Ready LED ” on control panel turns OFF during operator call.• The control panel displays the following when an operator call message is displayed.
• In the case of an operator call message related to a toner cartridge, the toner-remaining level gauge is displayed, and the gauge of the appropriate color flashes (for example, the M gauge).
• In the case of an operator call message for another reason, the printer icon is displayed with a flashing “warning icon .”
• For the details of each item, see “Operator call messages.”See P.104
Display Description
LCD 1 A warning icon “ ” is displayed and the state is displayed on the right (for example, TONER EMPTY).
LCD 2 Message is displayed (for example, REPLACE M).
LCD 3
LCD 4 “ for help” is displayed.• By pressing the down key, the panel displays the help screen.
State
Warning message
Key guidance
Warning icon
Toner-remaining level gauge
Printer icon
Warning icon
4138F3E004DB
TONER EMPTY
for help YMCK
REPLACE M
4039F3E518DB
WASTE TONER FULL
for help
REPLACE BOTTLE
8. Description of the control panel Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
100
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
8.1.6 Service call messages
• These messages are displayed when error(s) that cannot be handled by the user occur.• The “Error LED ” turns ON while the message is displayed on the control panel.• The “Ready LED ” on control panel turns OFF while an service call message is dis-
played on the control panel.• The control panel displays the following description at service call.
• A printer icon is displayed with a flashing “warning icon .”• A service call detected during start-up of the printer is displayed as shown in the bottom
of the following picture.
• For the details of each item, see “Service call messages.”See P.107
Display Description
LCD 1 A “warning icon ” is displayed and the service call message and a 4-digit-service call ID are displayed on the right (for example, SERVICE CALL C002).
LCD 2 The error description is displayed (for example, RAM ERROR).
LCD 3
LCD 4 No display
State
Error message
Warning icon
Printer icon
Warning icon
State
Error message
4039F3E517DB
SERVICE CALL C002RAM ERROR
4138F3E019DB
SERVICE CALL C002RAM ERROR
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 8. Description of the control panel
101
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
8.1.7 Help screen
• This screen is displayed when the down key is pressed when a normal message/warn-ing or operator call message is displayed.
• The control panel displays the following description at the help screen.
• A graphic is displayed if necessary.
Display Description
LCD 1 A “question icon ” is displayed and the necessary information is displayed on the right (for example, PREPARE NEW WASTE TONER BOTTLE).LCD 2
LCD 3
LCD 4 A scroll bar or “ to exit” message is displayed.• If there are several messages, a scroll bar is displayed.• By pressing the left key /right key , a previous/next screen message is displayed.• If all messages are displayed, “ to exit” displays on the screen.
?
4138F3E006DB
? PREPARE NEW WASTE TONER BOTTLE
Key guidance
Question icon
Scroll bar
Left keyRight key
4138F3E020DB
? WASTE TONER BOTTLE P/N XXXXXXX-XXX
to exit
Necessary information
8. Description of the control panel Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
102
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
8.2 List of control panel messages
NOTE• When two or more messages are to be displayed, the message with the higher pri-
ority will be displayed.• When a message concerning consumables/periodic replacement parts (units) is
displayed, print a statistics page from the [PRINT MENU] → [STATISTICS] menu and check the status of the other consumables, too.
See P.115
8.2.1 Normal messages
A. Normal messages
Message (LCD1) Description
INITIALIZING • The printer is being initialized
READY • Print enabled (Data not being printed)
ENERGY SAVER • Machine in energy saver mode
PROCESSING • Print data processing (Data receiving - printer is started)
PRINTING • Data being printed (Printer is started)
COPYING • Data being printed in sets
WARMING UP • During warmup
CALIBRATING • Color shift correction in progress
CANCELING JOB • Job canceled
REBOOTING • The printer is restarting
FIRMWARE UPDATE • The printer’s firmware is being upgraded
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 8. Description of the control panel
103
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
B. Warning messages
PriorityMessage
(LCD2/LCD3)Description
High 1 UNABLE TOCOLLATE JOB
Print in sets disabled (Full hard disk)(This warning message is also displayed during printing.)
2 HDDNEAR FULL
The hard disk space will run out soon.
3 MEMORY CARDNEAR FULL
The compact flash space will run out soon.
4 I-UNIT ENDX
Service life of the imaging unit (X) has been reached. (END status)• Executing the color printing with one of YMCK being at the END will
make the operator call.
5 TONER EMPTYX
Toner (X) is empty.• Executing the color printing with one of YMCK being empty will
make the operator call.
6 I-UNIT LIFEX
Service life of the imaging unit has been reached.• Printing is available until the END status when the [IMAGING UNIT
LIFE] is set to [CONTINUE] on MENU.When it is set to [STOP], executing the color printing with one of YMCK having been reached its service life will make the operator call.
• Monochrome printing is available unless the imaging unit K reached its service life. (but not under warranty)
7 TRANS. BELTEND OF LIFE
Transfer belt unit service life has been reached.
8 FUSER UNITEND OF LIFE
Fusing unit service life has been reached.
9 WASTE TONERNEAR FULL
The waste toner bottle needs replacement soon.
10 TONER LOWX
The specified color toner cartridge will run out soon.
11 I-UNIT LOWX
The specified color imaging unit will run out soon.
12 UNKNOWN PAPERTRAY X
Media which size cannot be automatically detected has been inserted.
13 PAPER EMPTYTRAY X
No media in the specified tray.The specified tray is not installed, but it is set in the printer driver.
14 INCORRECTTONER X
The specified color toner cartridge is not the correct type.A print cycle can be initiated, but is run at 1/3 the normal print speed.
15 INCORRECTI-UNIT X
The specified color imaging unit is not the correct type.
16 ILLEGALINSTALLATION
The compact flash card has been inserted into the card slot after ini-tialization is completed. The compact flash card will be invalid.
17 NON SUPPORTCARD
A compact flash card which is inserted is not supported.The compact flash card will be invalid.
18 INCORRECTHDD
A hard disk which was formatted by other unit is installed.
19 INCORRECTMEMORY CARD
A compact flash card which was formatted by other unit is installed.
1
8. Description of the control panel Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
104
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
*: magicolor 7450 II only
8.2.2 Operator call messages
20 HUBSNOT SUPPORTED *
A USB hub is connected to the USB host I/F.
Low 21 DEVICENOT SUPPORTED *
An unsupported device is connected to the USB host I/F.
PriorityMessage
(LCD2/LCD3)Description
1
1
PriorityMessage
DescriptionLCD1 LCD2/LCD3
High 1 COVER OPEN FRONT COVER
The front door of the machine is open.
SIDE COVER The right door of the machine is open.
DUPLEX COVER
The duplex option door is open.
TRAY3 COVER The right cover of tray 3 is open.
TRAY4 COVER The right cover of tray 4 is open.
TRAY5 COVER The right cover of tray 5 is open.
2 PAPER JAM FUSER/EXIT A media jam has occurred at the fusing section.
SECOND TRANS
A media jam has occurred at the decond transfer sec-tion.
VERTICAL TRANS
A media jam has occurred at the vertical conveyance.
DUPLEX1 A media jam has occurred at the duplex media feed sec-tion of the duplex option.
DUPLEX2 A media jam has occurred at the duplex transport sec-tion of the duplex option.
TRAY1 A media jam has occurred at tray 1 (manual feed tray).
TRAY2 A media jam has occurred at tray 2.
TRAY3 A media jam has occurred at tray 3.
TRAY4 A media jam has occurred at tray 4.
TRAY5 A media jam has occurred at tray 5.
3 I-UNIT MISSING CHECK X The specified color imaging unit is not installed.
4 TONER MISSING CHECK X The specified color toner cartridge is not installed.
5 NO WASTE BOTTLE
⎯ The waste toner bottle is not installed.
6 TRANS. BELT LIFE
REPLACE TRANS. BELT
Transfer belt unit service life has been reached.
7 FUSER UNIT LIFE
REPLACE FUSER UNIT
Fusing unit service life has been reached.
8 WASTE TONER FULL
REPLACE BOTTLE
The waste toner bottle is full.
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 8. Description of the control panel
105
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
9 I-UNIT END REPLACE Y
The specified color imaging unit has reached its life.• This message will be displayed when performing the
color printing while the [IMAGING UNIT LIFE] is set to [CONTINUE] on MENU, and warning message [I-UNIT END] is being displayed.
REPLACE M
REPLACE C
REPLACE K
10 TONER EMPTY REPLACE Y
The specified color toner cartridge has run out.
REPLACE M
REPLACE C
REPLACE K
11 I-UNIT LIFE REPLACE Y
Service life of the imaging unit has been reached.• This message will be displayed when performing the
color printing while the [IMAGING UNIT LIFE] is set to [STOP] on MENU, and warning message [I-UNIT LIFE] is being displayed.
• Monochrome printing is available unless the Imaging Unit K is at the END. (but not under warranty)
REPLACE M
REPLACE C
REPLACE K
12 TRAYX SIZE ERR ADDSSSS *
The media size set in the printer driver does not match that of the media loaded in the specified tray.• Load “SSSS” size media in the specified tray.
13 TRAYX TYPE ERROR
ADDTTTT *
The media size set in the printer driver does not match that of the media loaded in the specified tray.• Load “TTTT” type media in the specified tray.
14 MANUAL FEED SSSS *TTTT *
• During print start-up, media has been loaded in multi bypass tray and is waiting for a print start command.After the user confirms the media and gives the print start command, printing starts.
How to start printing:1. Press the up key.2. Press the down key, select tray with help menu and
press the MENU key.3. Set the media loaded in the tray 1 again.
15 PAPER EMPTY SSSS *TTTT *
• No specified media in trays 1 to 5.• Tray 3/4 is loaded with the specified media but is not
set appropriately.• Displays when [TRAY CHAINING] is set to [ON].
TRAYX EMPTY SSSS *TTTT *
• No specified media in the specified tray or tray 3/4 is not set appropriately.
• Displays when [TRAY CHAINING] is set to [OFF].
PriorityMessage
DescriptionLCD1 LCD2/LCD3
8. Description of the control panel Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
106
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
* SSSS represents the media size while TTTT shows the media type.
16 PAPER ERROR SSSS *TTTT *
• The size and type of media specified in the driver is not loaded in any tray.
• A different size of media from the one specified in the driver is loaded in the tray at media feeding.
• Displays when [TRAY CHAINING] is set to [ON].
TRAYX PAPER ERR
SSSS *TTTT *
• The size and type of media specified in the driver is not loaded in the specified tray.
• A different size of media from the one specified in the driver is loaded in the specified tray at media feeding.
• Displays when [TRAY CHAINING] is set to [OFF].
17 OUTPUT FULL REMOVE PAPER
The printed media volume has reached maximum capacity in the exit tray.
18 MEMORY FULL PRESS CANCEL
The volume of data to be printed exceeds the permissi-ble amount of data to be processed by the machine’s memory.
19 HOLD JOB ERROR
UNABLE TOSTORE JOB
The specified data of the held job is being received, but an optional HDD is not installed.
PriorityMessage
DescriptionLCD1 LCD2/LCD3
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 8. Description of the control panel
107
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
8.2.3 Service call messages
• For troubleshooting procedures, see “Troubleshooting.”See P.202
Message
DescriptionLCD1(Service Call ID)
LCD2/LCD3(Error description)
0001 M MOTOR 2 Main motor’s turning at abnormal timing
0018 P MOTOR COLOR 1 Color PC drum motor’s failure to turn
0019 P MOTOR COLOR 2 Color PC drum motor’s turning at abnormal timing
001A D MOTOR COLOR 1 Color developing motor’s failure to turn
001B D MOTOR COLOR Color developing motor’s turning at abnormal timing
0040 SUCTION FAN Suction fan motor’s failure to turn
0043 INSIDE FAN 1 Cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn
0046 FUSER FAN Fusing cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn
0048 FUSER COVER FAN Fusing cooling fan motor/2’s failure to turn
004C OZONE FAN Ozone ventilation fan motor’s failure to turn
004E POWER FAN Power supply cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn
004F INSIDE FAN 2 Cooling fan motor/2’s failure to turn
0094 XFER DETACH2 2nd image transfer roller separation
0096 XFER DETACH1 Transfer belt separation
0301 POLYGON MOTOR C Polygon motor/C failure to turn
0302 POLYGON MOTOR M Polygon motor/M failure to turn
0303 POLYGON MOTOR Y Polygon motor/Y failure to turn
0304 POLYGON MOTOR K Polygon motor/K failure to turn
0311 LASER ERROR C Laser malfunction (cyan)
0312 LASER ERROR M Laser malfunction (magenta)
0313 LASER ERROR Y Laser malfunction (yellow)
0314 LASER ERROR K Laser malfunction (black)
0500 FUSER ERROR Heating roller warm-up failure
0501 FUSER ERROR Fusing pressure roller warm-up failure
0510 FUSER ERROR Abnormally low heating roller temperature
0511 FUSER ERROR Abnormally low fusing pressure roller temperature
0520 FUSER ERROR Abnormally high heating roller temperature
0521 FUSER ERROR Abnormally high fusing pressure roller temperature
0900 TRAY4 LIFT Tray 4 elevator failure
0910 TRAY3 LIFT Tray 3 elevator failure
0950 TRAY5 LIFT Tray 5 elevator failure
0960 TRAY1 SENSOR Manual tray rise descent error
0F30 DENSITY LOW C Abnormally low toner density detected cyan TCR sensor
0F31 DENSITY HIGH C Abnormally high toner density detected cyan TCR sensor
0F32 DENSITY LOW M Abnormally low toner density detected magenta TCR sensor
0F33 DENSITY HIGH M Abnormally high toner density detected magenta TCR sensor
8. Description of the control panel Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
108
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
0F34 DENSITY LOW Y Abnormally low toner density detected yellow TCR sensor
0F35 DENSITY HIGH Y Abnormally high toner density detected yellow TCR sensor
0F36 DENSITY LOW K Abnormally low toner density detected black TCR sensor
0F37 DENSITY HIGH K Abnormally high toner density detected black TCR sensor
0F3A TCR SENSOR C Cyan TCR sensor adjustment failure
0F3B TCR SENSOR M Magenta TCR sensor adjustment failure
0F3C TCR SENSOR Y Yellow TCR sensor adjustment failure
0F3D TCR SENSOR K Black TCR sensor adjustment failure
13B0 RTC ERROR RTC failure
13C8 TRANS. CLEAR Transfer unit new article release
13CA FUSER CLEAR Fusing unit new article release
13D0 EEPROM1 Trouble related to security
13D1 EEPROM PU C Cyan print unit EEPROM access error
13D2 EEPROM PU M Magenta print unit EEPROM access error
13D3 EEPROM PU Y Yellow print unit EEPROM access error
13D4 EEPROM PU K Black print unit EEPROM access error
13D9 EEPROM TC C Cyan toner cartridge EEPROM access error
13DA EEPROM TC M Magenta toner cartridge EEPROM access error
13DB EEPROM TC Y Yellow toner cartridge EEPROM access error
13DC EEPROM TC K Black toner cartridge EEPROM access error
13E2 FLASH WRITE Flash ROM write error
3000 M MOTOR 1 Main motor’s failure to turn
C002 RAM ERROR RAM (standard) error at start-up
C003 RAM ERROR RAM (option) error at start-up
C013 H/W ADDRESS MAC address error at startup (MAC address is invalid)
C015 BOOT ROM Boot ROM error at startup
C022 NVRAM ERROR NVRAM access error
C025, C026, C027
CONTROLLER ROM Controller ROM error
C050 HDD ERROR HDD access error
C051 *1 HDD DISK FULL HDD full error
C052 CARD ERROR Compact flash access error
C053 *1 CARD FULL Compact flash full error
C054 CARD ERROR Compact flash uninstallation
C060 UPDATE ERROR Firmware update error
C061 HOLD JOB ERRORDUPLEX
Hold job error/no duplex unit
C062 HOLD JOB ERRORTRAY3
Hold job error/no tray 3
C063 HOLD JOB ERRORTRAY4
Hold job error/no tray 4
Message
DescriptionLCD1(Service Call ID)
LCD2/LCD3(Error description)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 8. Description of the control panel
109
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
*1: After a trouble occurred, an automatic format will be carried out when restarting the printer.
8.3 Cancelling a print job
• A print job being processed or printed can be cancelled by pressing the CANCEL key.• When no job has been sent, pressing the CANCEL key has no effect.
1. If the CANCEL key is pressed while a print job is being printed, a message appears on the control panel.
2. Select the job to be cancelled using the up key / down key and press the MENU/SELECT key.By pressing the CANCEL key, the job cancel menu is closed.
C064 HOLD JOB ERRORMEMORY
Hold job error/no memory
C065 HOLD JOB ERRORTRAY5
Hold job error/no tray 5
FFFF I/F COMM ERROR Interface communication error
Message
DescriptionLCD1(Service Call ID)
LCD2/LCD3(Error description)
Panel Display(LCD2-LCD4)
Description
CONTINUE Continue printing the currently processing job.
CURRENT JOB Stop printing the currently processing job.
ALL JOB Stop printing all jobs, including the currently processing job and all jobs waiting to be printed.
Job cancellation
Cancelled Job items
4138F3E014DB
CANCEL JOBCONTINUECURRENT JOBALL JOBS
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
110
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
9. Menu
9.1 List of Menu functions
Menu Ref. Page
PROOF/PRINT MENU *1 P.114
PRINT MENU CONFIGURATION PG P.114
DEMO PAGE P.115
STATISTICS PAGE P.115
FONT LIST POSTSCRIPT P.118
PCL P.118
MENU MAP P.119
DIRECTORY LIST *1 P.119
PAPER MENU PAPER SOURCE
DEFAULT TRAY P.119
TRAY1 P.119
TRAY2 P.121
TRAY3 P.122
TRAY4
TRAY5
TRAY CHAINING P.123
TRAY MAPPING P.123
DUPLEX *2 P.123
COPIES P.124
COLLATE *1 P.124
QUALITY MENU COLOR MODE P.124
BRIGHTNESS P.124
PCL SETTING CONTRAST P.125
IMAGE PRINTING
RGB SOURCE P.125
RGB INTENT P.125
RGB GRAY P.125
HALFTONE P.126
TEXT PRINTING
RGB SOURCE P.126
RGB INTENT P.126
RGB GRAY P.126
HALFTONE P.127
GRAPHICS PRINTING P.127
PS SETTING IMAGE PRINTING
RGB SOURCE P.127
RGB INTENT P.127
RGB GRAY P.128
DESTINATION PROF P.128
HALFTONE P.128
TEXT PRINTING
RGB SOURCE P.128
RGB INTENT P.129
RGB GRAY P.129
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
111 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
QUALITY MENU PS SETTING TEXT PRINTING
DESTINATION PROF P.129
HALFTONE P.129
GRAPHICS PRINTING
RGB SOURCE P.130
RGB INTENT P.130
RGB GRAY P.130
DESTINATION PROF P.130
HALFTONE P.131
SIMULATION SIMULATION PROF P.131
SIMULATION INTENT P.131
CMYK GRAY P.131
IMAGE CMYK GRAY *6 P.131
CALIBRATION TONE CALIBRATION P.132
AIDC PROCESS P.132
CMYK DENSITY CYAN P.132
MAGENTA P.132
YELLOW P.132
BLACK P.133
COLOR SEPARATION P.133
THIN LINE MODE *6 P.133
CAMERA DIRECT *3
PAPER SOURCE P.133
LAYOUT P.134
PAPER MARGIN P.134
IMAGE QUALITY
BRIGHTNESS P.134
CONTRAST P.134
RGB SOURCE P.134
RGB INTENT P.135
RGB GRAY P.135
HALFTONE P.135
INTERFACE MENU
JOB TIMEOUT P.135
ETHERNET TCP/IP ENABLE P.136
IP ADDRESS P.136
SUBNET MASK P.136
DEFAULT GATEWAY P.137
DHCP/BOOTP P.137
TELNET P.137
NETWARE ENABLE P.137
APPLETALK ENABLE P.138
SPEED/DUPLEX P.138
CAMERA DIRECT P.138
Menu Ref. Page
1
1
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
112
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
SYS DEFAULT MENU
LANGUAGE P.138
EMULATION DEF. EMULATION P.139
POSTSCRIPT WAIT TIMEOUT P.139
PS ERROR PAGE P.139
PS PROTOCOL P.139
PCL CR/LF MAPPING P.139
LINES PER PAGE P.140
FONT SOURCE FONT NUMBER P.140
PITCH SIZEP.140
(POINT SIZE)
SYMBOL SET P.141
PAPER DEFAULT PAPER
PAPER SIZE P.141
CUSTOM SIZE P.142
PAPER TYPE P.142
DETECT PAPER SIZE P.142
UNIT OF MEASURE P.143
STARTUP OPTIONS
DO STARTUP PAGEP.143
AUTO CONTINUE P.143
HOLD JOB TIMEOUT *1 P.143
ENERGY SAVER P.144
ENERGY SAVER TIME *4 P.144
MENU TIMEOUT P.144
LCD BRIGHTNESS P.144
SECURITY CHANGE PASSWORD P.145
LOCK PANEL P.145
CLOCK DATE P.146
TIME P.146
HDD FORMAT *1
USER AREA ONLYP.146
ALL
CARD FORMAT *5 P.147
RESTORE DEFAULTS
RESTORE NETWORK
P.147RESTORE PRINTER
RESTORE ALL
ENABLE WARNING
PAPER EMPTY P.153
TONER LOW P.154
I-UNIT LOW P.154
IMAGING UNIT LIFE P.154
Menu Ref. Page
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
113 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
*1: It is displayed only when the optional hard disk kit is mounted.*2: It is displayed only when the optional duplex unit is installed.*3: It is displayed only when INTERFACE MENU/CAMERA DIRECT is set to “ENABLE.”*4: It is displayed only when the [ENERGY SAVER] setting is set besides “OFF.”*5: It is displayed only when the optional Compact Flash is mounted.*6: magicolor 7450 II only
MAINTENANCE MENU
PRINT MENU EVENT LOG P.155
HALFTONE 64 P.155
HALFTONE 128 P.155
HALFTONE 256 P.156
GRADATION P.156
ALIGNMENT TOP ADJUSTMENT P.156
LEFT ADJUSTMENT P.156
LEFT ADJ DUPLEX P.157
TRANSFER POWER
SIMPLEX PASS P.157
DUPLEX PASS P.158
IMG ADJ THICK P.158
IMG ADJ BLACK P.158
FUSER LOOP ADJ P.159
Menu Ref. Page
1
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
114
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
9.2 PROOF/PRINT MENU
9.3 PRINT MENU
9.3.1 CONFIGURATION PG
Function • Selects and prints the job held temporarily in the printer.• Selects and deletes the job held temporarily in the printer.
NOTE• This menu is available only when an optional hard disk kit is installed.
Use • To proof one copy of a print job before printing the rest of the copies.
Setting/procedure
How to print the held job
1. Select [PROOF/PRINT MENU] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select user name and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired print job and press the MENU/SELECT key.4. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.5. If the hold job is set as PRIVATE JOB, enter the pin number (Personal Identification
Number) with the up key /down key .6. Set “Print number” with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT key.
NOTE• The held job cannot be printed until the correct pin number is entered at the
printer control panel.• The held job is deleted automatically after the period of time specified in the
“SYSTEM DEFAULT MENU/HOLD JOB TIMEOUT” menu.
How to delete the held job
1. Select [PROOF/PRINT MENU] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select user name and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired print job and press the MENU/SELECT key.4. Select [DELETE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.5. If the held job is set as PRIVATE JOB, enter the pin number (Personal Identification
Number) with the up key /down key .6. Select [YES] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
NOTE• The held job cannot be deleted until the correct pin number is entered.
Function • Prints a configuration page.
Use • To check the configuration of the machine. The following items can be checked:Printer informationOptionsINTERFACE MENUPAPER MENUSYS DEFAULT MENUQUALITY MENUCAMERA DIRECT
Setting/procedure
• Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
115 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
9.3.2 DEMO PAGE
9.3.3 STATISTICS PAGE
Function • Prints a demo page.
Use • To prints a demo page.
Setting/procedure
• Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
Function • Prints a dtatistics page.
Use • To check consumable status and the usage of the machine. The following items can be checked:
Supplies/parts statusPage informationCoverage information
Setting/procedure
• Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
1
1
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
116
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
A. Sample of STATISTICS PAGE1
SUPPLIES/PARTS STATUS
PAGE INFORMATION
COVERAGE INFORMATION
Total Count
Total Count(Duplex)
Total Count(Normalized)
SERIAL NUMBER: *************
Cyan Toner Cartridge
DATE : 07.04.2008
TIME : 03:07
0 25 50 75 100 Percent Remaining
Monochrome
<Latest Job>
Normalized Coverage Information
Average % Y :
Average % M :
Average % C :
Average % K :
0.9
0.3
2.7
3.5
0.6
0.6
1.3
5.8
<Total>
Average % Y :
Average % M :
Average % C :
Average % K :
A3WIDE
A3
11x17
B4(JIS)
LEGAL
LETTER
A4
B5(JIS)
A5
CUSTOM
OTHERS
0
1
0
3
0
0
14
0
6
0
0
Sheets Printed by PaperSize
PLAIN PAPER
RECYCLED
THICK 1
THICK 2
THICK 3
LABEL
TRANSPARENCY
TRANSPARENCY2
ENVELOPE
POSTCARD
LETTERHEAD
GLOSSY
20
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Sheets Printed by PaperType
8
Monochrome 2
Monochrome 8
Full Color 12
Full Color 0
Full Color 11
Total 20
Total 2
Total 19
82% Starter
Cartridge Type
Product Name : magicolor7450
Printer Name : MC7450-XXXXX
Magenta Toner Cartridge87% Starter
Yellow Toner Cartridge93% Starter
Black Toner Cartridge88% Starter
Cyan Imaging Unit97%
Magenta Imaging Unit97%
Yellow Imaging Unit97%
Black Imaging Unit97%
99%
98%
Transfer Belt
Fuser Unit
Waste Toner Bottle Ready
4039F3C601DA
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
117 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
B. SUPPLIES/PARTS STATUS• Display the estimated percent of life remaining in the toner cartridge, imaging unit, trans-
fer belt and fuser unit.The type of the toner cartridges that are installed in the printer is also displayed. (See the table below)
• Display the status of the waste toner bottle.
NOTE• The percent of life remaining can be used as a guide, but may not exactly reflect
the amount that has been used in the supplies.
C. Counter Information• The total number of pages that have been printed is counted and displayed based on the
description shown in the following table.
<Counter information list>
Types of toner cartridges
Starter• Toner cartridge included with a product shipped
from the factory: 3,000-print
Standard• Standard-capacity toner cartridge:
6,000 (Y,M,C)/7,500 (K)-print
High• High-capacity toner cartridge:
12,000 (Y,M,C)/15,000 (K)-print
Types of count Contents Count timing
Total Count Monochrome • The total number of monochrome pages ejected from the printer.Increment by one per simplex and by two per duplex
When a sheet of media is ejected
properly
Full color • The total number of color pages ejected from the printer. Increment by one per simplex and by two per duplex
Total Count (duplex)
Monochrome • The total number of monochrome duplex sheets ejected from the printer. Increment by one per duplex (and by zero per sim-plex)
Full color • The total number of color duplex sheets ejected from the printer. Increment by one per duplex (and by zero per sim-plex)
Total Count (Normalized)
Monochrome • The total number of monochrome pages on a A4 basis that have been ejected from the printer. Increment by 100 per A4 simplex and by 200 per A4 duplex *1
Full color • The total number of color pages on a A4 basis that have been ejected from the printer. Increment by 100 per A4 simplex and by 200 per A4 duplex *1
1
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
118
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
*1: A count of 100 in the counter is converted to 1 sheet of media and display the number of decimals are discarded.
NOTE• The total counters and the print counters count at a different timing, when a sheet
of media is properly ejected and when a sheet of media is fed, respectively.Therefore, the sum of each total counter value may not be same with the sum of each print counter value if a sheet of media cannot be ejected due to media jam inside the machine or other possible problems.
D. Coverage Information• Each coverage information is calculated and displayed based on the description shown
in the following table.
<Coverage information list>
NOTE• Coverage information can be used as a guide and may not completely reflect the
actual amount of toner used.
9.3.4 FONT LIST
A. POSTSCRIPT
B. PCL
Sheets Printed by Paper Size • The number of sheets used for each media size. Increment by one for both simplex and duplex When a sheet of
media is fedSheets Printed by Paper Type • The number of pages used per each media type. Increment by one for both simplex and duplex
Types of count Contents Count timing
Coverage information Contents
Normalized Coverage Information <Latest Job>
• Individual average dot coverage of four colors (Y,M,C,K) in the last job is calculated on an A4 basis.(The average of the ratios of dot space on each page when the print-able area is defined as 100% and shown in 0.1 percent increments)
Normalized Coverage Information <Total>
• Individual average dot coverage of four colors (Y,M,C,K) is calculated on an A4 basis for all prints performed after the printer was installed. (The average of the ratios of dot space on each page when the print-able area is defined as 100% and shown in 0.1 percent increments)
Function • Prints a PostScript font list.
Use • To determine which PostScript fonts are available on the printer.
Setting/procedure
• Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
Function • Prints a PCL font list.
Use • To determine which PCL fonts are available on the printer.
Setting/procedure
• Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
119
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
9.3.5 MENU MAP
9.3.6 DIRECTORY LIST
9.4 PAPER MENU
9.4.1 PAPER SOURCE
A. DEFAULT TRAY
B. TRAY 1(1) PAPER SIZE
Function • Prints a menu map.
Use • To see the printer’s menu structure.
Setting/procedure
• Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
Function • Prints a directory list of the hard disk kit’s contents.
Use • To check the data saved in the optional hard disk kit.
Setting/procedure
• Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
NOTE• This menu is available only when an optional hard disk kit is installed.
Function • Sets the priority feed tray.
Use • To set the priority media feed tray.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [DEFAULT TRAY] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired tray and press the MENU/SELECT key.
• The default setting is TRAY 2.
TRAY 1 “TRAY 2” TRAY 3 TRAY 4 TRAY 5
NOTE• TRAY 3/TRAY 4/TRAY 5 can be selected only when one or more optional Lower
Feeder Units are installed.
Function • Sets the size of the media in tray 1.
Use • To specify the size of the media loaded in tray 1.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [PAPER SIZE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired media size and press the MENU/SELECT key.
For North America• The default setting is LETTER.
For other destinations• The default setting is A4.
ANY/“LETTER”/LETTER-R/11x17/LEGAL/EXECUTIVE/A3WIDE/A3/“A4”/A4-R/A5/A6/B4(JIS)/B5(JIS)/B5(JIS)-R/B6(JIS)/GOVT LETTER/STATEMENT/FOLIO/SP FOLIO/UK QUARTO/FOOLSCAP/GOVT LEAGAL/16K/12x18/11x14/4x6/D8K/KAI8/KAI 16/KAI 32 /ENV C5/ENV C6/ENV DL/ENV MONARCH/ENV CHOU#3/ENV CHOU#4/B5(ISO)/ENV #10/ENV YOU#4/JPOST/JPOST-D/CUSTOM
NOTE• ANY specifies any media size.• CUSTOM is used to set a “CUSTOM media size.”
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
120
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
(2) CUSTOM SIZE
(3) PAPER TYPE
Function • Sets the CUSTOM SIZE of media in tray 1.
Use • To specify the custom size media loaded in tray 1.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [CUSTOM SIZE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [WIDTH] or [LENGTH] and press MENU/SELECT key.3. Set desired number with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT
key.
For North America• The default setting of WIDTH is 8.50 inches.
WIDTH: 3.55 inches to 12.25 inches.
• The default setting of LENGTH is 11.00 inches.
LENGTH: 5.52 inches to 47.24 inches.
For other destinations• The default setting of WIDTH is 210 mm.
WIDTH: 90 mm to 311 mm.
• The default setting of LENGTH is 297 mm.
LENGTH: 140 mm to 1200 mm.
NOTE• By changing the [UNIT OF MEASURE] setting (INCHES/MILLIMETERS), the
custom size units are changed.
Function • Sets the media type for tray 1.
Use • To specify the type of media loaded in tray 1.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [PAPER TYPE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired media type and press MENU/SELECT key.
• The default setting is PLAIN PAPER.
ANY/ “PLAIN PAPER”/RECYCLED/THICK 1/THICK 2/THICK 3/LABEL/TRANSPAR-ENCY/TRANSPARENCY 2/ENVELOPE/POSTCARD/LETTERHEAD/GLOSSY
NOTE• ANY identifies any media type.
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
121
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
C. TRAY 2(1) PAPER SIZE
(2) CUSTOM SIZE
Function • Sets the size of the media in tray 2.
Use • To specify the size of the media loaded in tray 2.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [PAPER SIZE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired media size and press the MENU/SELECT key.
For North America• The default setting is LETTER.
For other destinations• The default setting is A4.
ANY/“LETTER”/LETTER-R/11x17/LEGAL/EXECUTIVE/A3WIDE/A3/“A4”/A4-R/A5/A6/B4(JIS)/B5(JIS)/B5(JIS)-R/B6(JIS)/GOVT LETTER/STATEMENT/FOLIO/SP FOLIO/UK QUARTO/FOOLSCAP/GOVT LEAGAL/16K/12 x 18/11 x 14/4 x 6/D8K/KAI8/KAI 16/KAI 32 /ENV C5/ENV C6/ENV DL/ENV MONARCH/ENV CHOU#3/ENV CHOU#4/B5(ISO)/ENV #10/ENV YOU#4/JPOST/JPOST-D/CUSTOM
NOTE• ANY specifies any media size.• CUSTOM is used to set a “CUSTOM media size.”• When The [SIZE SETTING] for Tray 2 is set to “AUTO”, the detected media size
will be displayed.
Function • Sets the CUSTOM SIZE of media in tray 2.
Use • To specify the custom size media loaded in tray 2.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [CUSTOM SIZE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [WIDTH] or [LENGTH] and press MENU/SELECT key.3. Set desired number with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT
key.
For North America• The default setting of WIDTH is 8.50 inches.
WIDTH: 3.55 inches to 12.25 inches.
• The default setting of LENGTH is 11.00 inches.
LENGTH: 5.52 inches to 18.00 inches.
For other destinations• The default setting of WIDTH is 210 mm.
WIDTH: 90 mm to 311 mm.
• The default setting of LENGTH is 297 mm.
LENGTH: 140 mm to 457 mm.
NOTE• By changing the “UNIT OF MEASURE” setting (INCHES/MILLIMETERS), the
custom size units are changed.
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
122
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
(3) PAPER TYPE
(4) SIZE SETTING
D. TRAY 3/TRAY 4/TRAY 5(1) PAPER SIZE
(2) PAPER TYPE
Function • Sets the media type for tray 2.
Use • To specify the type of media loaded in tray 2.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [PAPER TYPE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired media type and press MENU/SELECT key.
• The default setting is PLAIN PAPER.
ANY/ “PLAIN PAPER”/RECYCLED/THICK 1/THICK 2/THICK 3/LABE/TRANSPAR-ENCY/TRANSPARENCY 2/ENVELOPE/POSTCARD/LETTERHEAD/GLOSSY
NOTE• ANY identifies any media type.
Function • Sets the method to select the media size for tray 2.
Use • To set the media size for tray 2 at user’s option.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is AUTO.
“AUTO” USER SELECT
NOTE• When selecting “USER SELECT”, the media size will be set with [PAPER SIZE]
setting.
Function • Automatically detects the set media size and displays it.
Use • To check the media size.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [PAPER SOURCE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired feed tray (TRAY 3-5) and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select [PAPER SIZE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
NOTE• TRAY3/TRAY4/TRAY5 can be selected only when one or more optional lower
feeder units are installed.
Function • Sets the media type for trays 3 to 5.
Use • To specify the type of media loaded in tray 3 to 5.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is “PLAIN PAPER.”
ANY “PLAIN PAPER” RECYCLED
NOTE• TRAY3/TRAY4/TRAY5 can be selected only when one ore more optional lower
feeder units are installed.• ANY identifies any media type.
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
123 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
E. TRAY CHAINING
F. TRAY MAPPING(1) TRAY MAPPING MODE
(2) LOGICAL TRAY0-9
9.4.2 DUPLEX
Function • Sets auto tray switching.
Use • To specify that the printer should pull media from another tray when the specified tray runs is empty.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is “OFF.”
ON “OFF”
1
Function • Selects whether or not the tray mapping function is used.
Use • To specify whether trays are mapped.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is OFF.
ON “OFF”
Function • Specifies whether jobs received from another manufacturer’s printer driver are printed using tray 1 to tray 5.
Use • To specify the media source for print jobs using another manufacturer’s printer driver.
Setting/procedure
• Only the default for LOGICAL TRAY 1 is PHYSICAL TRAY 1. PHYSICAL TRAY 2 is the default for all trays other than LOGICAL TRAY 1.
PHYSICAL TRAY 1 “PHYSICAL TRAY 2”PHYSICAL TRAY 3 PHYSICAL TRAY 4 PHYSICAL TRAY 5
NOTE• Only the mounted tray can be selected.
Function • Sets duplex printing mode.
Use • To specify duplex printing.OFF : Duplex print is OFFLONG EDGE : Duplex print is ON, long edgeSHORT EDGE : Duplex print is ON, short edge
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is “OFF.”
“OFF” LONG EDGE SHORT EDGE
NOTE• This menu is available only when a duplex option is installed.• The setting in the printer driver overrides the setting in this menu.
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
124
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
9.4.3 COPIES
9.4.4 COLLATE
9.5 QUALITY MENU
9.5.1 COLOR MODE
9.5.2 BRIGHTNESS
Function • Sets the number of prints.
Use • To specify the number of copies of the job to be printed.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [COPIES] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired print number with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.
• The default setting is “1” copy.
“1” copy to 9999 copies.
NOTE• The setting in the printer driver overrides the setting in this menu.
Function • Sets printing in sets.
Use • To print several sets of multiple pages.ON : Print in sets.OFF : Print in page.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is OFF.
ON “OFF”
NOTE• This menu is available only when an optional hard disk kit is installed.• The setting in the printer driver overrides the setting in this menu.
Function • Sets the color mode for printing.
Use • To specify whether jobs should be printed in color or grayscale.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is COLOR.
“COLOR” GRAYSCALE
Function • Sets the brightness of the printed image.
Use • To adjust the brightness of the printed image.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is 0 %.
-15 % -10 % -5 % “0 %” +5 % +10 % +15 %
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
125
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
9.5.3 PCL SETTING
A. CONTRAST
B. IMAGE PRINTING(1) RGB SOURCE
(2) RGB INTENT
(3) RGB GRAY
Function • Sets the contrast of a PCL printed image.
Use • To adjust the contrast of a PCL printed image.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is 0%.
-15 % -10 % -5 % “0 %” +5 % +10 % +15 %
Function • Sets the RGB color space of the image to be printed.
Use • To set the input RGB color space that is used for printing the image (picture).sRGB : Profile that has been preset to the printer.DVICE COLOR : It uses the device color in the color space.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is sRGB.
DEVICE COLOR “sRGB”
Function • Sets the RGB characteristics of the image to be printed.
Use • To set the color conversion characteristic from input RGB to device CMYK that is used for printing the image (picture).
VIVID : Color conversion characteristic suited to the image emphasiz-ing on color vividness.
PHOTOGRAPHIC: Color conversion characteristic suited to the image emphasiz-ing on color image.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is PHOTOGRAPHIC.
VIVID “PHOTOGRAPHIC”
Function • Sets the RGB gray reproduction of the image to be printed.
Use • To set the gray print method that is used for the printed image (picture).COMPOSITE BLACK : Print gray with the toner of 4 colors CMYK.BLACK AND GRAY : Print black (R=G=B=0) only with K toner and print gray with
toner of 4 colors CMYK.BLACK ONLY : Print gray only with K toner.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is COMPOSITE BLACK.
“COMPOSITE BLACK” BLACK AND GRAY BLACK ONLY
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
126
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
(4) HALFTONE
C. TEXT PRINTING(1) RGB SOURCE
(2) RGB INTENT
(3) RGB GRAY
Function • Sets the halftone characteristic of image to be printed.
Use • To set the halftone characteristic that is used for the printed image (picture.)LINE ART : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the resolution of the print
image.DETAIL : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the balance between the
resolution and the tone reproducibility of the print image.SMOOTH : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the tone reproducibility of
the print image.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is DETAIL.
LINE ART “DETAIL” SMOOTH
Function • Sets the RGB color space of the text to be printed.
Use • To set the input RGB color space that is used for printing text (letter).sRGB : Profile that has been preset to the printer.DVICE COLOR : It uses the device color in the color space.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is sRGB.
DEVICE COLOR “sRGB”
Function • Sets the RGB characteristic of the text to be printed.
Use • To set the color conversion characteristic from input RGB to device CMYK that is used for printing text (letter).
VIVID : Color conversion characteristic suited to the image emphasiz-ing on color vividness.
PHOTOGRAPHIC: Color conversion characteristic suited to the image emphasiz-ing on color image.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is VIVID.
“VIVID” PHOTOGRAPHIC
Function • Sets the RGB gray reproduction of the text to be printed.
Use • To set the gray print method that is used for printing text (letter).COMPOSITE BLACK : Print gray with the toner of 4 colors CMYK.BLACK AND GRAY : Print black (R=G=B=0) only with K toner and print gray with
toner of 4 colors CMYK.BLACK ONLY : Print gray only with K toner.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is BLACK AND GRAY.
COMPOSITE BLACK “BLACK AND GRAY” BLACK ONLY
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
127
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
(4) HALFTONE
D. GRAPHICS PRINTING
9.5.4 PS SETTING
A. IMAGE PRINTING(1) RGB SOURCE
(2) RGB INTENT
Function • Sets the halftone characteristic of the text to be printed.
Use • To set the halftone characteristic that is used for printing text (letter).LINE ART : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the resolution of the print
image.DETAIL : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the balance between the
resolution and the tone reproducibility of the print image.SMOOTH : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the tone reproducibility of
the print image.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is LINE ART.
“LINE ART” DETAIL SMOOTH
Function • Sets the RGB characteristics for graphics printing.
Use • To set each characteristic for printing graphics (figures).
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is AS TEXT.
AS IMAGE “AS TEXT”
Function • Sets the RGB color space of the image to be printed.
Use • To set the input RGB color space that is used for printing the image (picture).sRGB...BlueAdjustRGB : Profile that has been preset to the printer.DVICE COLOR : It uses the device color in the color space.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is sRGB.
DEVICE COLOR / “sRGB” /AppleRGB /AdobeRGB1998 /ColorMatchRGB /BlueAdjustRGB
Function • Sets the RGB characteristics of the image to be printed.
Use • To set the color conversion characteristic from input RGB to device CMYK that is used for printing the image (picture).
VIVID : Color conversion characteristic suited to the image empha-sizing on color vividness.
PHOTOGRAPHIC : Color conversion characteristic suited to the image empha-sizing on color image.
RELATIVE COLOR : Reproduce the color that minimize the color difference between original and print by adjusting the basic color (white.)
ABSOLUTE COLOR : Reproduce the color that maintains the absolute color within the device reproduced color.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is PHOTOGRAPHIC.
VIVID “PHOTOGRAPHIC” RELATIVE COLOR ABSOLUTE COLOR
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
128
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
(3) RGB GRAY
(4) DESTINATION PROF
(5) HALFTONE
B. TEXT PRINTING(1) RGB SOURCE
Function • Sets the RGB gray reproduction of the image to be printed.
Use • To set the gray print method that is processed by the printer for the printed image (picture).
COMPOSITE BLACK : Print gray with the toner of 4 colors CMYK.BLACK AND GRAY : Print black (R=G=B=0) only with K toner and print gray with
toner of 4 colors CMYK.BLACK ONLY : Print gray only with K toner.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is COMPOSITE BLACK.
“COMPOSITE BLACK” BLACK AND GRAY BLACK ONLY
Function • Sets the output profile.
Use • To set the custom profile used for output.AUTO : Select automatically appropriate output profile that has been pre-
set at the printer with other print conditions.Custom Profile : Custom profile that has been downloaded to the printer by user.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is AUTO.
“AUTO” Custom Profile...
Function Sets the halftone characteristic of image to be printed.
Use • To set the halftone characteristic that is used for the printed image (picture.)LINE ART : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the resolution of the print
image.DETAIL : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the balance between the
resolution and the tone reproducibility of the print image.SMOOTH : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the tone reproducibility of
the print image.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is DETAIL.
LINE ART “DETAIL” SMOOTH
Function • Sets the RGB color space of the text to be printed.
Use • To set the input RGB color space that is used for printing text (letter).sRGB...BlueAdjustRGB : Profile that has been preset to the printer.DVICE COLOR : It uses the device color in the color space.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is sRGB.
DEVICE COLOR / “sRGB” /AppleRGB /AdobeRGB1998 /ColorMatchRGB /BlueAdjustRGB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
129
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
(2) RGB INTENT
(3) RGB GRAY
(4) DESTINATION PROF
(5) HALFTONE
Function • Sets the RGB characteristic of the text to be printed.
Use • To set the color conversion characteristic from input RGB to device CMYK that is used for printing text (letter).
VIVID : Color conversion characteristic suited to the image empha-sizing on color vividness.
PHOTOGRAPHIC : Color conversion characteristic suited to the image empha-sizing on color image.
RELATIVE COLOR : Reproduce the color that minimize the color difference between original and print by adjusting the basic color (white.)
ABSOLUTE COLOR : Reproduce the color that maintains the absolute color within the device reproduced color.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is VIVID.
“VIVID” PHOTOGRAPHIC RELATIVE COLOR ABSOLUTE COLOR
Function • Sets the RGB gray reproduction of the text to be printed.
Use • To set the gray print method that is used for printing text (letter).COMPOSITE BLACK : Print gray with the toner of 4 colors CMYK.BLACK AND GRAY : Print black (R=G=B=0) only with K toner and print gray with
toner of 4 colors CMYK.BLACK ONLY : Print gray only with K toner.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is BLACK AND GRAY.
COMPOSITE BLACK “BLACK AND GRAY” BLACK ONLY
Function • Sets the output profile.
Use • To set the custom profile used for output.AUTO : Select automatically appropriate output profile that has been pre-
set at the printer with other print conditions.Custom Profile : Custom profile that has been downloaded to the printer by user.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is AUTO.
“AUTO” Custom Profile...
Function • Sets the halftone characteristic of the text to be printed.
Use • To set the halftone characteristic that is used for printing text (letter).LINE ART : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the resolution of the print
image.DETAIL : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the balance between the
resolution and the tone reproducibility of the print image.SMOOTH : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the tone reproducibility of
the print image.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is LINE ART.
“LINE ART” DETAIL SMOOTH
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
130
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
C. GRAPHICS PRINTING(1) RGB SOURCE
(2) RGB INTENT
(3) RGB GRAY
(4) DESTINATION PROF
Function • Sets the RGB color space of the graphics to be printed.
Use • To set the input RGB color space that is used for printing graphics (figures).sRGB...BlueAdjustRGB : Profile that has been preset to the printer.DVICE COLOR : It uses the device color in the color space.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is sRGB.
DEVICE COLOR / “sRGB” /AppleRGB /AdobeRGB1998 /ColorMatchRGB /BlueAdjustRGB
Function • Sets the RGB characteristic of the graphics to be printed.
Use • To set the color conversion characteristic from input RGB to device CMYK that is used for printing graphics (figures).
VIVID : Color conversion characteristic suited to the image empha-sizing on color vividness.
PHOTOGRAPHIC : Color conversion characteristic suited to the image empha-sizing on color image.
RELATIVE COLOR : Reproduce the color that minimize the color difference between original and print by adjusting the basic color (white.)
ABSOLUTE COLOR : Reproduce the color that maintains the absolute color within the device reproduced color.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is VIVID.
“VIVID” PHOTOGRAPHIC RELATIVE COLOR ABSOLUTE COLOR
Function • Sets the RGB gray reproduction of the graphics to be printed.
Use • To set the gray print method that is used for printing graphics (figures).COMPOSITE BLACK : Print gray with the toner of 4 colors CMYK.BLACK AND GRAY : Print black (R=G=B=0) only with K toner and print gray with
toner of 4 colors CMYK.BLACK ONLY : Print gray only with K toner.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is BLACK AND GRAY.
COMPOSITE BLACK “BLACK AND GRAY” BLACK ONLY
Function • Sets the output profile.
Use • To set the custom profile used for output.AUTO : Select automatically appropriate output profile that has been pre-
set at the printer with other print conditions.Custom Profile : Custom profile that has been downloaded to the printer by user.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is AUTO.
“AUTO” Custom Profile...
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
131 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
(5) HALFTONE
D. SIMULATION(1) SIMULATION PROF
(2) SIMULATION INTENT
(3) CMYK GRAY
(4) IMAGE CMYK GRAY• magicolor 7450 II only
Function • Sets the RGB characteristics for graphics printing.
Use • To set each characteristic for printing graphics (figures).
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is AS TEXT.
AS IMAGE “AS TEXT”
Function • Sets the simulation profile.
Use • To set a CMYK simulation profile at implementation of the simulation.SWOP...DIC : Profile that has been preset at the printer.Custom profile : Custom profile that has been downloaded to the printer by users.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is NONE.
“NONE”/SWOP/Euroscale/CommercialPress/TOYO/DIC/Custom Profile...
Function • Sets the color characteristics.
Use • To set the color characteristics at the implementation of the simulation.RELATIVE COLOR : Reproduce the color that minimizes the color difference
between original and print by adjusting the basic color (white.)
ABSOLUTE COLOR : Reproduce the color that maintains the absolute color within the device reproduced color.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is RELATIVE COLOR.
“RELATIVE COLOR” ABSOLUTE COLOR
Function • Sets CMYK gray reproduction.
Use • To set the CMYK data K maintain method at the implementation of the simulation.COMPOSITE BLACK : Print according to the result of color conversion with profile.BLACK AND GRAY : Print by maintaining the value only for black (C=M=Y=0,
K=255)BLACK ONLY : Print by maintaining the value only for gray (C=M=Y=0,
K=any)
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is COMPOSITE BLACK.
“COMPOSITE BLACK” BLACK AND GRAY BLACK ONLY
1
Function • Select whether or not grays in image data are reproduced using the four CMYK col-ors.
ON : Grays in image data are reproduced using the four CMYK colors.OFF : Grays in image data are reproduced using only the K color.
Use
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is “OFF.”
ON “OFF”
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
132
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
9.5.5 CALIBRATION
A. TONE CALIBRATION
B. AIDC PROCESS
C. CMYK DENSITY(1) CYAN
(2) MAGENTA
(3) YELLOW
Function • Sets the gradation adjustment (Image stabilization with the controller).
Use • To use for a particular calibration made by users.ON : Gradation adjustment is ON.OFF : Gradation adjustment is OFF.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is “ON.”
“ON” OFF
Function• Controls the image stability.• Controls the image stability.
Use • To be used to adjust image quality.• To be used when the transfer belt unit and/or the transfer roller are replaced.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is “CANCEL.”
EXCUTE “CANCEL”
Function • Sets the cyan level for the HIGHLIGHT, MIDDLE, and SHADOW area respectively.
Use • To set the cyan level for the HIGHLIGHT, MIDDLE, and SHADOW are respectively.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is “0.”
-3 to +3
Function• Sets the magenta level for the HIGHLIGHT, MIDDLE, and SHADOW area respec-
tively.
Use • To set the magenta level for the HIGHLIGHT, MIDDLE, and SHADOW are respec-tively.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is “0.”
-3 to +3
Function • Sets the yellow level for the HIGHLIGHT, MIDDLE, and SHADOW area respectively.
Use • To set the yellow level for the HIGHLIGHT, MIDDLE, and SHADOW are respectively.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is “0.”
-3 to +3
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
133 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
(4) BLACK
9.5.6 COLOR SEPARATION
9.5.7 THIN LINE MODE
• magicolor 7450 II only
9.6 CAMERA DIRECT
9.6.1 PAPER SOURCE
Function • Sets the black level for the HIGHLIGHT, MIDDLE, and SHADOW area respectively.
Use • To set the black level for the HIGHLIGHT, MIDDLE, and SHADOW are respectively.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is “0.”
-3 to +3
Function • Sets the color separation function.
Use • To create color separations.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is OFF.
ON “OFF”
1
Function • Sets the thin line mode function.
Use• If ON is selected, printing is performed in THIN LINE MODE.
In THIN LINE MODE, text and line data are reproduced thinner.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is OFF.
ON “OFF”
Function • Sets the tray using for camera direct photo printing.
Use • To change the tray using for camera direct photo printing.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is TRAY 2.
TRAY1” “TRAY2” TRAY3 TRAY4 TRAY5
NOTE• Only the mounted tray can be selected.
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
134
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
9.6.2 LAYOUT
9.6.3 PAPER MARGIN
9.6.4 IMAGE QUALITY
A. BRIGHTNESS
B. CONTRAST
C. RGB SOURCE
Function • Sets the number of images printed on one page for camera direct photo printing.
Use • To specify the number of camera direct photo printing images to be printed on each sheet.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is 1-UP.
“1-UP” 2-UP 3-UP
4-UP 6-UP 8-UP
1
1
2
1
2
3
1
3
2
4
1
3
2
4
5 6
1
3
2
4
5 6
7 8
Function • Sets the media margin for direct photo printing.
Use • To perform direct photo printing with the minimum media margin.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is STANDARD.
“STANDARD” MINIMUM
Function • Sets the brightness of the printed image for camera direct photo printing.
Use • To adjust the brightness of the printed image for camera direct photo printing.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is 0 %.
-15 % -10 % -5 % “0 %” +5 % +10 % +15 %
Function • Sets the contrast of the printed image for camera direct photo printing.
Use • To adjust the contrast of the printed image for camera direct photo printing.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is 0%.
-15 % -10 % -5 % “0 %” +5 % +10 % +15 %
Function • Sets the RGB color space of the printed image for camera direct photo printing.
Use • To set the input RGB color space that is used for camera direct photo printing.sRGB : Profile that has been preset to the printer.DVICE COLOR : It uses the device color in the color space.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is sRGB.
DEVICE COLOR “sRGB”
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
135
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
D. RGB INTENT
E. RGB GRAY
F. HALFTONE
9.7 INTERFACE MENU
9.7.1 JOB TIMEOUT
Function • Sets the RGB characteristics of the printed image for camera direct photo printing.
Use • To set the color conversion characteristic from input RGB to device CMYK that is used for camera direct photo printing.
VIVID : Color conversion characteristic suited to the image emphasiz-ing on color vividness.
PHOTOGRAPHIC: Color conversion characteristic suited to the image emphasiz-ing on color image.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is PHOTOGRAPHIC.
VIVID “PHOTOGRAPHIC”
Function • Sets the RGB gray reproduction of the printed image for camera direct photo printing.
Use • To set the gray print method that is processed by the printer for camera direct photo printing.
COMPOSITE BLACK : Print gray with the toner of 4 colors CMYK.BLACK AND GRAY : Print black (R=G=B=0) only with K toner and print gray with
toner of 4 colors CMYK.BLACK ONLY : Print gray only with K toner.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is COMPOSITE BLACK.
“COMPOSITE BLACK” BLACK AND GRAY BLACK ONLY
Function Sets the halftone characteristic of the printed image for camera direct photo printing.
Use • To set the halftone characteristic that is used for camera direct photo printing.LINE ART : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the resolution of the print
image.DETAIL : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the balance between the
resolution and the tone reproducibility of the print image.SMOOTH : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the tone reproducibility of
the print image.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is DETAIL.
LINE ART “DETAIL” SMOOTH
Function • Sets the time to activate JOB TIMEOUT.
Use • To specify the amount of time before a print job times out.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is 15 seconds.
5 seconds to 300 seconds
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
136
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
9.7.2 ETHERNET
NOTE• When the ETHERNET setting is changed, the printer restarts automatically.
A. TCP/IP(1) ENABLE
(2) IP ADDRESS
(3) SUBNET MASK
Function • Enables TCP/IP.
Use • To specify that the printer is connected to a TCP/IP network. YES : Enable TCP/IP. Print can be made at TCP/IP environment.NO : Disable TCP/IP. Print cannot be made at TCP/IP environment.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is YES.
“YES” NO
NOTE• The screen displays [IP ADDRESS], [SUBNET MASK], [DEFAULT GATEWAY],
and [DHCP/BOOTP] only when [ENABLE/YES] is selected.
Function • Sets the IP address of the printer used for the network.
Use • To set the printer’s IP address.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [IP ADDRESS] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Set desired IP address (first bite) with the up key /down key and press the right
key .3. Repeat the above procedures and set the IP address up to fourth bite.4. Press the MENU/SELECT key.
NOTE• When setting the IP address manually, [DHCP/BOOTP] (IP auto acquisition
function) setting is set to [OFF] automatically.• When IP address is not allocated from the server, the IP address is set auto-
matically within the range “169.254.0.0. to 169.254.255.255.”
Function • Sets the subnet mask of the printer used in the network.
Use • To set the printer’s subnet mask.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [SUBNET MASK] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Set desired subnet mask (first bite) with the up key /down key and press the right
key .3. Repeat the above procedures and set the subnet mask up to fourth bite.4. Press the MENU/SELECT key.
• The default setting is “255.255.000.000.”
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
137
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
(4) DEFAULT GATEWAY
(5) DHCP/BOOTP
(6) TELNET
B. NETWARE(1) ENABLE
Function • Sets the gateway address of the printer used in the network.
Use • To set the printer’s gateway address.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [DEFAULT GATEWAY] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Set desired default gateway address (first bite) with the up key /down key and
press the right key .3. Repeat the above procedures and set the default gatewat address up to fourth bite.4. Press the MENU/SELECT key.
• The default setting is “000.000.000.000.”
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
Function • DHCP: Automatically acquires an IP address from the DHCP server, if there is one in the network, and specifies whether to load other network information.
• BOOTP: Automatically acquires an IP address from BOOTP and specifies whether to load other network information.
Use • To automatically acquire an IP address and load other network information.YES : Enable IP auto acquisition setting.No : Disable IP auto acquisition setting.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is ON.
“ON” OFF
NOTE• When [TCP/IP/IP ADDRESS] is enabled, the [DHCP/BOOTP] setting is changed
to [OFF.”• When IP address is not allocated from the server, [TCP/IP/IP ADDRESS] is set
automatically set within the range “169.254.0.0. to 169.254.255.255.”
Function • Select whether to enable or disable TELNET transmissions.
Use • To specify that the printer is connected by TELNET transmissions.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is ENABLE.
“ENABLE” DISABLE
Function • Enables NetWare.
Use • To specify that the printer is connected to a NetWare network.YES : Enable NetWare. Printing can be done via NetWare.No : Disable NetWare. Printing cannot be done via NetWare.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is YES.
“YES” “NO”
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
138
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
C. APPLETALK(1) ENABLE
D. SPEED/DUPLEX
9.7.3 CAMERA DIRECT
9.8 SYS DEFAULT MENU
9.8.1 LANGUAGE
Function • Enables AppleTalk.
Use • To specify that the printer is connected to an AppleTalk network.YES : Enable AppleTalk. Printing can be done via AppleTalk.No : Disable Apple Talk. Printing cannot be done via AppleTalk.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is YES.
“YES” NO
Function • Sets the communication speed and method of network.
Use • To set the network communication speed and method.
Setting/procedure
• Setting itemsNetwork speed (SPEED): AUTO, 10Mbps, 100Mbps, 1,000MbpsDuplex mode (DUP): AUTO, Full-duplex mode, Half-duplex mode
• The default setting is AUTO.
“AUTO” 10BASE FULL 10BASE HALF100BASE FULL 100BASE HALF 1000BASE FULL
Function • Select whether to enable or disable camera direct printing.ENABLE : CAMERA DIRECT menu is appeared, and camera direct printing is
enabled.DISABLE : CAMERA DIRECT menu is disappeared, and camera direct printing is
disabled.
Use
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is ENABLE.
“ENABLE” DISABLE
Function • Sets the language of the control panel display.
Use • To change the language of the control panel display at user’s option.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is “ENGLISH.”
“ENGLISH”/FRENCH/GERMAN/SPANISH/ITALIAN/PORTUGUESE/CZECH/JAPA-NEASE/ KOREAN/CHINESE (SIMPLIFIED)/CHINESE (TRADITIONAL)/DUTCH
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
139
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
9.8.2 EMULATION
A. DEF. EMULATION
B. POSTSCRIPT(1) WAIT TIMEOUT
(2) PS ERROR PAGE
(3) PS PROTOCOL
C. PCL(1) CR/LF MAPPING
Function • To set the PDL (Page Description Language).
Use • To fix the PDL as necessary. It usually switches automatically.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is AUTO.
“AUTO” POSTSCRIPT PCL
Function • Sets the amount of time to wait for a PostScript file.
Use • To set the amount of time to wait for a PostScript file before the print job times out.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [WAIT TIMEOUT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired time with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT
key.
• The default setting is 0 second.
“0” second to 300 seconds.
Function • Specifies whether error pages are printed at the time of a PostScript error.
Use • To specify whether error pages are printed after a PostScript error occurs.ON : Error pages are printed at the time of PostScript error.OFF : Error pages are not printed at the time of PostScript error.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is OFF.
ON “OFF”
Function • Sets the protocol to be used for PostScript printing.
Use • To use the protocol when printing by PostScript printing.AUTO : Automatic recognitionNORMAL : ASCII letter code dataBINARY : Binary data
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is AUTO.
“AUTO” NORMAL BINARY
Function • Sets the linefeed code for PCL printing.
Use • To specify the type of linefeed to be used for PCL printing.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is “CR=CR LF=LF.”
“CR=CR LF=LF” CR=CRLF LF=LF CR=CR LF=LFCR CR=CRLF LF=LFCR
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
140
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
(2) LINES PER PAGE
(3) FONT SOURCE <FONT NUMBER>
<PITCH SIZE>
Function • Sets the lines per page for PCL printing.
Use • To set the number of lines to be printed per page for PCL jobs.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [LINES PER PAGE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired line number with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.
• The default setting is 60 lines.
5 lines to 128 lines
Function • Sets the PCL font to be used for PCL printing.
Use • To set the font to be used for printing PCL jobs.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [FONT NUMBER] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired font with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT key.
• The default setting is 0.
“0” to 102
NOTE• According to the selected [FONT NUMBER], [PITCH SIZE] or [POINT SIZE] set-
ting is available.• Details on the font which corresponds to the font No. can be checked by the
PCL font list.See P.118
Function • Sets the pitch size of the PCL font for PCL printing.
Use • To set the pitch size of the font to be used for printing PCL jobs.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [PITCH SIZE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired pitch size with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.
• The default setting is 10.00 pt.
0.44 pt to 99.99 pt
NOTE• When one of the following “FONT NUMBERs” is selected, “PITCH SIZE” set-
ting is available.FONT NUMBER: 0 to 5, 21 to 23, 54 to 57, 81, 82.
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
141
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
<SYMBOL SET>
9.8.3 PAPER
A. DEFAULT PAPER(1) PAPER SIZE
Function • Sets the symbol set for PCL printing.
Use • To set the symbol set to be used for printing PCL jobs.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is PC8.
“PC8”/DESKTOP/ISO4/ISO6/ISO11/ISO15/ISO17/ISO21/ISO60/ISO69/ISOL1/ISOL2/ISOL5/ISOL6/ISOL9/LEGAL/MATH8/MCTEXT/MSPUBL/PC775/PC850/PC852/PC858 /PC8DN/PC8TK/PC1004/PIFONT/PSMATH/PSTEXT/ROMAN8/WIN30/WINBALT/WINL1/WINL2/WINL5/ARABIC8/HPWARA/PC864ARA/HEBREW7/HEBREW8/ISOHEB/PC862HEB/ISOCYR/PC866CYR/WINCYR/PC866UKR/GREEK8/WINGRK/PC851GRK/PC8GRK/ ISOGRK
Function • Sets the default media size.
Use • To set the default media size.
Setting/procedure
For North America• The default setting is LETTER.
For other destinations• The default setting is A4.
“LETTER”/11x17/LEGAL/EXECUTIVE/A3WIDE/A3/“A4”/A5/A6/B4(JIS)/B5(JIS)/B6(JIS)/GOVT LETTER/STATEMENT/FOLIO/SP FOLIO/UK QUARTO/FOOLSCAP/GOVT LEAGAL/16K/12x18/11x14/4x6/D8K/KAI8/KAI 16/KAI 32/ENV C5/ENV C6/ENV DL/ENV MONARCH/ENV CHOU#3/ENV CHOU#4/B5(ISO)/ENV #10/ENV YOU#4/JPOST/JPOST-D/CUSTOM
1
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
142
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
(2) CUSTOM
(3) PAPER TYPE
B. DETECT PAPER SIZE
1
Function • Sets the custom media width and length.
Use • To set the width and length of the custom media size.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [CUSTOM] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [WIDTH] or [LENGTH] and press MENU/SELECT key.3. Set desired number with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT
key.
For North America• The default setting of WIDTH is 8.50 inches.
WIDTH: 3.55 inches to 12.25 inches.
• The default setting of LENGTH is 11.00 inches.
LENGTH: 5.52 inches to 18.00 inches.
For other destinations• The default setting of WIDTH is 210 mm.
WIDTH: 90 mm to 311 mm.
• The default setting of LENGTH is 297 mm.
LENGTH: 140 mm to 457 mm.
NOTE• By changing the [UNIT OF MEASURE] setting (INCHES/MILLIMETERS), the
custom size units are changed.
Function • Sets the default media type.
Use • To set the default media type.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is PLAIN PAPER.
“PLAIN PAPER” /RECYCLED/THICK 1/THICK 2/THICK 3/LABEL/TRANSPARENCY/TRANSPARENCY 2/ENVELOPE/POSTCARD/LETTERHEAD/GLOSSY
Function • Sets the standard for the automatic media size detection.
Use • To switch the criteria for the automatic media size detection from Inch to milli meter.
Setting/procedure
For North America• The default setting of WIDTH is INCHE SIZE.
For other destinations• The default setting of WIDTH is MILLIMETER SIZE.
INCHE SIZE MILLIMETER SIZE
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
143 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
C. UNIT OF MEASURE
9.8.4 STARTUP OPTIONS
A. DO STARTUP PAGE
9.8.5 AUTO CONTINUE
9.8.6 HOLD JOB TIMEOUT
Function • Sets the measurement units for CUSTOM SIZE mode.• Sets the measurement units for SYS DEFAULT MENU/DEFAULT PAPER/CUSTOM
SIZE mode.
Use • To change media measurement units.
Setting/procedure
For North America• The default setting is INCHES.
For other destinations• The default setting is MILLIMETERS.
INCHES MILLIMETERS
Function • Sets whether a startup page is printed at startup of the printer.
Use • To specify whether a startup page is printed.ON : Start up page is printed at startup the printer.OFF : Start up page is not printed at startup of the printer.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is OFF.
ON “OFF”
1
Function • At the time of the following operator call, continues auto printing by ignoring the media type or size.
• “PAPER EMPTY” (except “MANUAL FEED”), “xxxx SIZE ERROR”, “xxxx TYPE ERROR”.
Use • To specify whether printing should continue when the specified media size and type are not available.
ON : Auto continuous printing is ON.OFF : Auto continuous printing is OFF.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is OFF.
ON “OFF”
Function • Sets the amount of time before a job saved temporarily in the printer is automatically deleted.
Use • To change the amount of time a job is held before being deleted.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is DISABLE (No auto delete.).
“DISABLE” 1 hour 4 hours 1 day 1 week
NOTE• This menu is available only when an optional hard disk kit is installed.
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
144
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
9.8.7 ENERGY SAVER
9.8.8 ENERGY SAVER TIME
9.8.9 MENU TIMEOUT
9.8.10 LCD BRIGHTNESS
Function • Sets whether the printer should go into energy saver mode when not printing or pro-cessing a print job and when the control panel is not being used. To set the amount of time before energy saver mode is activated, use the “ENERGY SAVER TIME” menu.
• Energy saver mode is automatically canceled when any of the following operations is performed:
The machine is restarted.A print job is received.Any of the keys on the control panel is pressed.
Use • To specify whether energy saver mode is to be used.
DEEP SLEEP : Heater lamp is turned OFF. The warmup time to recover is 99 sec. or less.
LIGHT SLEEP : Temperature control is provided with a decreased fusing tempera-ture so that power consumption in the energy saver mode can be minimized. The warmup time to recover is 30 sec. or less.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is DEEP SLEEP.
“DEEP SLEEP” LIGHT SLEEP OFF
Function • Sets the amount of time before the machine enters energy saver mode after the last print is received or the last key operated.
Use • To change the amount of time before the machine enters energy saver mode.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is 30 minutes.
15 minutes “30 minutes” 1 hour 3 hours
NOTE• This menu is available only when [ENERGY SAVER] is not set to [OFF].
Function • Sets the amount of time before the control panel returns to the status screen from menu mode and the help display.
Use • To set the amount of the time before the control panel returns to the status screen from the menu and the help display.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is 2 minutes.
OFF 1 minute “2 minutes”
Function • Sets the brightness of the control panel LCD display.
Use • To set the brightness of the control panel LCD display.
Setting/procedure
The default setting is 0.
-3 -2 -1 “0” +1 +2 +3
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
145
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
9.8.11 SECURITY
A. CHANGE PASSWORD
B. LOCK PANEL
Function • Sets the password used for the LOCK PANEL function.
Use • To change the password used for the LOCK PANEL function.0000 : Panel lock function is OFF.0001 to FFFF : Valid password for panel lock function.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [CHANGE PASSWORD] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Set desired password (first digit) with the up key /down key and press the right
key .3. Repeat the above procedures to set up to fourth digit password.
• The default setting is 0000.
“0000” to FFFF
NOTE• Make sure to set the password to something other than “0000” when the
[LOCK PANEL] function is set to [ON].• If you forget the password, it can be initiated (0000) with [SERVICE MENU/
RESTORE PASSWORD].See P.186
Function • Protects the Menu (except the service menu) with a password.
Use • To make the Menu (except the service menu) impossible to change unless the cor-rect password is entered.
OFF : Panel lock function is OFF.MINIMUM : Panel lock function is ON. Protect the operation of [INTERFACE
MENU], [SYS DEFAULT MENU].ON : Panel lock function is ON.
Protect the operation of [PROF/PRINT MENU], [PRINT MENU], [PAPER MENU], [QUALITY MENU], [INTERFACE MENU], [SYS DEFAULT MENU].
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is “OFF.”
“OFF” MINIMUM ON
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
146
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
9.8.12 CLOCK
A. DATE
B. TIME
9.8.13 HDD FORMAT
Function • Sets the date of the printer’s built-in clock.
Use • To change the date of the printer’s built-in clock.
Setting/procedure
DATE (DD.MM.YY): For EuropeDATE (MM.DD.YY): For North AmericaDATE(YY.MM.DD): For Japan, Asia, China
The following shows how to set DATE (DD.MM.YY).1. Select [CLOCK] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [DATE (DD.MM.YY)] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Set date with the up key /down key and press the right key .4. Repeat the above procedures to set month and year.5. Press the MENU/SELECT key.
DD : 01 to 31MM : 01 to 12YY : 2005 to 2032
Function • Sets the time of the printer’s built-in clock.
Use • To change the time of the printer’s built-in clock.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [CLOCK] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [TIME] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Set hour with the up key /down key and press the right key .4. Repeat the above procedures to set minute.5. Press the MENU/SELECT key.
Function • Initializes the format of the optional hard disk kit.
Use • To initialize the format of the optional hard disk kit.USER AREA ONLY : Initialize only user areaALL : Initialize all area
Setting/procedure
1. Select [HDD FORMAT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired initialization method and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. [ARE YOU SURE?] is displayed.4. By pressing the MENU/SELECT key, initialization starts. By pressing the CANCEL
key without pressing the MENU/SELECT key, the start of initialization can be can-celled.
5. The printer restarts and the hard disk is initialized. Once the initialization starts, it cannot be cancelled.
• The default setting is USER AREA ONLY.
USER AREA ONLY ALL
NOTE• This menu is available only when an optional hard disk kit is installed.
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
147
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
9.8.14 CARD FORMAT
9.8.15 RESTORE DEFAULTS
Function • Initializes the format of the optional compact flash card.
Use • To initialize the format of the optional compact flash card.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [CARD FORMAT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. [ARE YOU SURE?] is displayed.3. By pressing the MENU/SELECT key, initialization starts. By pressing the CANCEL
key without pressing the MENU/SELECT key, the start of initialization can be can-celled.
4. The printer restarts and the hard disk is initialized. Once the initialization starts, it cannot be cancelled.
NOTE• This menu is available only when an optional compact flash card is installed.
Function • Restores the factory default of each setting.
Use • To restore the defaults of all settings.RESTORE NETWORK : Restore the default for [INTERFACE MENU/ETHERNET]
setting.RESTORE PRINTER : Restore the default for [PAPER MENU], [QUALITY
MENU], [SYS DEFAULT MENU] and [CAMERA DIRECT] setting.
RESTORE ALL : Restore defaults for all settings.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [RESTORE DEFFAULTS] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired mode and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. [ARE YOU SURE?] is displayed.4. By pressing the MENU/SELECT key, initialization starts.
By pressing the CANCEL key without pressing the MENU/SELECT key, the start of initialization can be cancelled.
5. The printer restarts and the hard disk is initialized. Once the initialization starts, it cannot be cancelled.
• The default setting is RESTORE NETWORK.
RESTORE NETWORK RESTORE PRINTER RESTORE ALL
1
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
148
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
List of reset items 1
*: Destination items. For details, see the page referenced.
List of reset items 2
ItemReset item
Initial valueRef. pageRESTORE
NETWORKRESTORE PRINTER
RESTORE ALL
PAPER MENU
PAPER SOURCE
DEFAULT TRAY ⎯ Reset Reset TRAY2 P.119
TRAY1 PAPER SIZE ⎯ Reset Reset Letter P.119
CUSTOM SIZE ⎯ Reset Reset WIDTH: 8.5inches
LENGTH: 11inchesP.120
⎯ Reset Reset WIDTH:210mmLENGTH:297mm
PAPER TYPE ⎯ Reset Reset PLAIN PAPER P.120
TRAY2 PAPER SIZE ⎯ Reset Reset Letter P.121
CUSTOM SIZE ⎯ Reset Reset WIDTH: 8.5inches
LENGTH: 11inchesP.121
⎯ Reset Reset WIDTH:210mmLENGTH:297mm
PAPER TYPE ⎯ Reset Reset PLAIN PAPER P.122
SIZE SETTING ⎯ Reset Reset AUTO P.122
TRAY3 to 5
PAPER TYPE⎯ Reset Reset PLAIN PAPER P.122
TRAY CHAINING ⎯ Reset Reset OFF P.123
DUPLEX ⎯ Reset Reset OFF P.123
COPIES ⎯ Reset Reset 1 P.124
COLLATE ⎯ Reset Reset OFF P.124
1
ItemReset item
Initial valueRef. pageRESTORE
NETWORKRESTORE PRINTER
RESTORE ALL
QUALITY MENU
COLOR MODE ⎯ Reset Reset COLOR P.124
BRIGHTNESS ⎯ Reset Reset 0 % P.124
PCL SETTING
CONTRAST ⎯ Reset Reset 0 % P.125
IMAGE PRINTING
RGB SOURCE ⎯ Reset Reset sRGB P.125
RGB INTENT ⎯ Reset Reset PHOTO-
GRAPHIC P.125
RGB GRAY ⎯ Reset Reset COMPOSITE BLACK P.125
HALFTONE ⎯ Reset Reset DETAIL P.126
TEXT PRINTING
RGB SOURCE ⎯ Reset Reset sRGB P.126
RGB INTENT ⎯ Reset Reset VIVID P.126
RGB GRAY ⎯ Reset ResetBLACK AND
GRAYP.126
HALFTONE ⎯ Reset Reset LINE ART P.127
GRAPHICS PRINTING
⎯ Reset Reset AS IMAGE P.127
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
149 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
*: Destination items. For details, see the page referenced.
QUALITY MENU
PS SETTING
IMAGE PRINTING
RGB SOURCE ⎯ Reset Reset sRGB P.127
RGB INTENT ⎯ Reset Reset PHOTO-
GRAPHIC P.127
RGB GRAY ⎯ Reset Reset COMPOSITE BLACK P.128
DESTINA-TION PROF
⎯ Reset Reset AUTO P.128
HALFTONE ⎯ Reset Reset DETAIL P.128
TEXT PRINTING
RGB SOURCE ⎯ Reset Reset sRGB P.128
RGB INTENT ⎯ Reset Reset VIVID P.129
RGB GRAY ⎯ Reset Reset BLACK AND GRAY P.129
DESTINA-TION PROF
⎯ Reset Reset AUTO P.129
HALFTONE ⎯ Reset Reset LINE ART P.129
GRAPHICS PRINTING
RGB SOURCE ⎯ Reset Reset sRGB P.130
RGB INTENT ⎯ Reset Reset VIVID P.130
RGB GRAY ⎯ Reset Reset BLACK AND GRAY P.130
DESTINA-TION PROF
⎯ Reset Reset AUTO P.130
HALFTONE ⎯ Reset Reset AS IMAGE P.131
PS SETTING
SIMULA-TION
SIMULA-TION PROF
⎯ Reset Reset NONE P.131
SIMULA-TION
INTENT⎯ Reset Reset RELATIVE
COLOR P.131
CMYK GRAY ⎯ Reset Reset COMPOSITE
BLACK P.131
IMAGE CMYK GRAY
⎯ Reset Reset OFF P.131
CALIBRA-TION
TONE CALIBRATION
⎯ Reset Reset ON P.132
CMYK DENSITY
CYAN ⎯ Reset Reset 0 P.132
MAGENTA ⎯ Reset Reset 0 P.132
YELLOW ⎯ Reset Reset 0 P.132
BLACK ⎯ Reset Reset 0 P.133
COLOR SEPARATION ⎯ Reset Reset OFF P.133
THIN LINE MODE ⎯ Reset Reset OFF P.133
ItemReset item
Initial valueRef. pageRESTORE
NETWORKRESTORE PRINTER
RESTORE ALL
1
1
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
150
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
List of reset items 3
List of reset items 4
*: Destination items. For details, see the page referenced.
ItemReset item
Initial valueRef. pageRESTORE
NETWORKRESTORE PRINTER
RESTORE ALL
CAMERA DIRECT
PAPER SOURCE ⎯ Reset Reset TRAY2 P.133
LAYOUT ⎯ Reset Reset 1-UP P.134
PAPER MARGIN ⎯ Reset Reset STANDARD P.134
IMAGE QUALITY
BRIGHTNESS ⎯ Reset Reset 0 % P.134
CONTRAST ⎯ Reset Reset 0 % P.134
RGB SOURCE ⎯ Reset Reset sRGB P.134
RGB INTENT ⎯ Reset ResetPHOTO-
GRAPHICP.135
RGB GRAY ⎯ Reset Reset COMPOS-ITE BLACK P.135
HALFTONE ⎯ Reset Reset DETAIL P.135
ItemReset item
Initial valueRef. pageRESTORE
NETWORKRESTORE PRINTER
RESTORE ALL
INTER-FACE MENU
JOB TIMEOUT Reset ⎯ Reset 15 seconds P.135
ETHERNET TCP/IP ENABLE Reset ⎯ Reset YES P.136
IP ADDRESS Reset ⎯ Reset
000.000.000.000
P.136
SUBNET MASK
Reset ⎯ Reset255.255.000.000
P.136
DEFAULT GATEWAY Reset ⎯ Reset
000.000.000.000
P.137
DHCP/BOOTP
Reset ⎯ Reset ON P.137
TELNET Reset ⎯ Reset ENABLE P.137
NETWARE Reset ⎯ Reset YES P.137
APPLE TALK Reset ⎯ Reset YES P.138
SPEED/DUPLEX Reset ⎯ Reset AUTO P.138
CAMERA DIRECT Reset ⎯ Reset ENABLE P.138
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
151 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
List of reset items 5
ItemReset item
Initial valueRef. pageRESTORE
NETWORKRESTORE PRINTER
RESTORE ALL
SYS DEFAULT
MENU
LANGUAGE ⎯ Reset Reset ENGLISH P.138
EMULA-TION
DEF. EMULATION ⎯ Reset Reset AUTO P.139
POST-SCRIPT
WAIT TIM-EOUT ⎯ Reset Reset 0 P.139
PS ERROR PAGE ⎯ Reset Reset OFF P.139
PS PRO-TOCOL ⎯ Reset Reset AUTO P.139
PCL CR/LF MAPPING ⎯ Reset Reset
CR=CRLF=LF
P.139
LINES PER PAGE ⎯ Reset Reset 60 P.140
FONT SOURCE/
FONT NUMBER
⎯ Reset Reset 0 P.140
FONT SOURCE/
PITCH SIZE
⎯ Reset Reset 10.00 P.140
FONT SOURCE/SYMBOL
SET
⎯ Reset Reset PC8 P.140
PAPER DEFAULT PAPER
PAPER SIZE ⎯ Reset Reset LETTER P.141
CUSTOM SIZE/
WIDTH⎯ Reset Reset 8.5 inches
P.142CUSTOM
SIZE/LENGTH
⎯ Reset Reset 11.00 inches
PAPER TYPE ⎯ Reset Reset
PLAIN PAPER
P.142
DETECT PAPER SIZE
⎯ Reset Reset INCHE SIZE P.142
UNIT OF MEASURE ⎯ Reset Reset INCHES P.143
STARTUP OPTIONS
DO STARTUP PAGE ⎯ Reset Reset OFF P.143
AUTO CONTINUE ⎯ Reset Reset ON P.143
HOLD JOB TIMEOUT ⎯ Reset Reset DISABLE P.143
ENERGY SAVER ⎯ Reset Reset ON P.144
ENERGY SAVER TIME ⎯ Reset Reset 30 minutes P.144
MENU TIMEOUT ⎯ Reset Reset 2 minutes P.144
LCD BRIGHTNESS ⎯ Reset Reset 0 P.144
SECURITYCHANGE PASSWORD ⎯ Reset Reset 0000 P.145
LOCK PANEL ⎯ Reset Reset OFF P.145
HDD FORMAT ⎯ Reset ResetUSER AREA
ONLYP.146
1
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
152
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
List of reset items 6
*: Destination items. For details, see the page referenced.**: XXXXXX are the final 6 digits of the printer’s MAC address.
SYS DEFAULT
MENU
CARD FORMAT⎯ Reset Reset
USER AREA ONLY
P.147
RESTORE DEFAULTS⎯ Reset Reset
RESTORE NETWORK
P.147
ENABLE WARNING
PAPER EMPTY
TRAY 1 ⎯ Reset Reset OFF P.153
TRAY 2 ⎯ Reset Reset ON
TRAY 3 ⎯ Reset Reset ON
TRAY 4 ⎯ Reset Reset ON
TRAY 5 ⎯ Reset Reset ON
TONER LOW ⎯ Reset Reset ON P.154
I-UNIT LOW ⎯ Reset Reset ON P.154
IMAGING UNIT LIFE ⎯ Reset Reset STOP P.154
ItemReset item
Initial valueRef. pageRESTORE
NETWORKRESTORE PRINTER
RESTORE ALL
Item
Reset item
Initial value Ref. pageRESTORE NETWORK
RESTORE PRINTER
RESTORE ALL
Page-Scope Web
Connec-tion
Admin Password ⎯ Reset Reset administrator ⎯
Refresh Rate ⎯ Reset Reset 30 sec. ⎯
Contact Name ⎯ Reset Reset
KONICA MINOLTA Customer Support
⎯
Contact Information ⎯ Reset Resethttp://printer.
konicaminolta.com/
⎯
Contact Utility Link ⎯ Reset Reset http://pagescope.com/
⎯
Corporate URL ⎯ Reset Resethttp://printer.
konicaminolta.com/
⎯
Supplies and Accessories ⎯ Reset Reset http://www.q-shop.com/
⎯
Product Help URL ⎯ Reset Resethttp://printer.
konicaminolta.com/
⎯
Auto IP Reset ⎯ Reset DHCP ⎯
WINS/NetBIOS Resolution Reset ⎯ Reset Checked ⎯
** NetBIOS Name Reset ⎯ Reset MC7450-XXXXXX
⎯
Domain/Workgroup Reset ⎯ Reset WORK-GROUP
⎯
Use DHCP Reset ⎯ Reset Checked ⎯
IPP Config Printer Name Reset ⎯ Reset Blank ⎯
IPP Config Printer Location Reset ⎯ Reset Blank ⎯
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
153
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
9.8.16 ENABLE WARNING
A. PAPER EMPTY(1) TRAY1
(2) TRAY2
(3) TRAY3
(4) TRAY4
Function • Specifies whether a “Tray 1 paper empty” (manual feed tray)” message is displayed as a normal message when it is empty.
Use • To specify whether to display a “Tray 1 paper empty” message as a normal message.ON : Media empty message is displayed on normal message when tray is empty.OFF : Media empty message is not displayed on normal message when tray is
empty.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is OFF.
“OFF” ON
Function • Specifies whether a “Tray 2 paper empty” message is displayed as a normal mes-sage when it is empty.
Use • To specify whether to display a “Tray 2 paper empty” message as a normal message.ON : Media empty message is displayed on normal message when tray is empty.OFF : Media empty message is not displayed on normal message when tray is
empty.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is ON.
OFF “ON”
Function • Specifies whether a “Tray 3 paper empty” message is displayed as a normal mes-sage when it is empty.
Use • To specify whether to display a “Tray 3 paper empty” message as a normal message.ON : Media empty message is displayed on normal message when tray is empty.OFF : Media empty message is not displayed on normal message when tray is
empty.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is ON.
OFF “ON”
NOTE• This menu is available only when an optional lower feeder unit is installed.
Function • Specifies whether a “Tray 4 paper empty” message is displayed as a normal mes-sage when it is empty.
Use • To specify whether to display a “Tray 4 paper empty” message as a normal message.ON : Media empty message is displayed on normal message when tray is empty.OFF : Media empty message is not displayed on normal message when tray is
empty.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is ON.
OFF “ON”
NOTE• This menu is available only when an optional lower feeder unit is installed.
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
154
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
(5) TRAY5
B. TONER LOW
C. I-UNIT LOW
9.8.17 IMAGING UNIT LIFE
Function • Specifies whether a “Tray 5 paper empty” message is displayed as a normal mes-sage when it is empty.
Use • To specify whether to display a “Tray 5 paper empty” message as a normal message.ON : Media empty message is displayed on normal message when tray is empty.OFF : Media empty message is not displayed on normal message when tray is
empty.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is ON.
OFF “ON”
NOTE• This menu is available only when an optional lower feeder unit is installed.
Function• Specifies whether or not a warning appears when the toner is about to run out.
Use
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is ON.
“ON” OFF
Function • Specifies whether or not a warning appears when the imaging unit is about to reach the end of its service life.Use
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is ON.
“ON” OFF
Function• Specifies whether printing stops or continues when a imaging unit service life has
been reached.
Use • To specify whether printing should stop or continue printing when a imaging unit ser-vice life has been reached.
STOP : Print stops when a imaging unit service life has been reached. Print cannot be started until the imaging unit is exchanged.
CONTINUE: Print continues even if a imaging unit service life has been reached. Print is available, however the printing with proper image is impossi-ble.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is STOP.
“STOP” CONTINUE
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
155
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
9.9 MAINTENANCE MENU
9.9.1 How to enter the MAINTENANCE MENU
A. Procedure1. Display [MAINTENANCE MENU] on the menu screen and press the MENU/SELECT
key.2. [ENTER PASSWORD] message is displayed.3. Set the first digit of user password with the up key /down key and press the right
key .4. Repeat the above procedures to set up to fourth digit of password.
(The initial setting for user password is [0000].) 5. Press the MENU/SELECT key.
B. Exiting• Press the CANCEL key.
9.9.2 PRINT MENU
A. EVENT LOG
B. HALFTONE 64
C. HALFTONE 128
Function • Prints the EVENT LOG.
Use • To check the jams/troubles that occurred, and history of replacing the consumables, etc.The items that can be checked are as follows.
Paper Jam Error : The number of jams occurred and its historyEngine Fatal Error : The history of troubles which caused service callFuser Unit : The history of replacing the fusing unitTransfer Belt : The history of replacing the transfer beltToner Cartridge : The history of replacing the toner cartridgeImaging Unit : The history of replacing the imaging unitTrouble Counter : Troubles counted at each section
Setting/procedure
1. Select [EVENT LOG] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
Function • Prints the halftone pattern with 25 % level for CMYK respectively.
Use • To check the unevenness of the density and the pitch.
Setting/procedure
1. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 media on the tray.2. Select [HALFTONE 64] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired color with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT
key.4. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
Function • Prints the halftone pattern with 50 % level for CMYK respectively.
Use • To check the unevenness of the density and the pitch.
Setting/procedure
1. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 media on the tray.2. Select [HALFTONE 128] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired color with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT
key.4. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
1
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
156
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
D. HALFTONE 256
E. GRADATION
9.9.3 ALIGNMENT
A. TOP ADJUSTMENT
B. LEFT ADJUSTMENT
Function • Prints the halftone pattern with 100 % level for CMYK respectively.
Use • To check the unevenness of the density and the pitch.
Setting/procedure
1. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 media on the tray.2. Select [HALFTONE 256] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired color with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT
key.4. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
Function • Prints the gradation pattern.
Use • To check the gradation reproductively.
Setting/procedure
1. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 media on the tray.2. Select [GRADATION] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
Function • Adjusts the top margin of media for single-sided printing.
Use • To correct a misaligned print image.PLAIN PAPER : Adjust the head margin of plain paper.THICK1 : Adjust the head margin of thick paper 1.THICK2 : Adjust the head margin of thick paper 2.THICK3 : Adjust the head margin of thick paper 3.ENVELOPE : Adjust the head margin of envelope.TRANSPARENCY: Adjust the head margin of transparency.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [TOP ADJUSTMENT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired media type and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired adjustment amount with the up key /down key and press the
MENU/SELECT key.
• The default setting is “0.”
-30 to +30 (1 step: 0.1 mm)1
Function • Adjusts the left margin of media for single-sided printing.
Use • To correct a misaligned print image.LEFT ADJ TRAY 1: Adjust the left margin of media fed from tray 1 (manual tray.)LEFT ADJ TRAY 2: Adjust the left margin of media fed from tray 2.LEFT ADJ TRAY 3: Adjust the left margin of media fed from tray 3.LEFT ADJ TRAY 4: Adjust the left margin of media fed from tray 4.LEFT ADJ TRAY 5: Adjust the left margin of media fed from tray 5.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [LEFT ADJUSTMENT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired tray and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired adjustment amount with the up key /down key and press the
MENU/SELECT key.
• The default setting is “0.”
-30 to +30 (1 step: 0.1 mm)1
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
157 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
C. LEFT ADJ DUPLEX
D. TRANSFER POWER(1) SIMPLEX PASS
Function • Adjusts the left margin of media for double-sided printing.
Use • To correct a misaligned print image.LEFT ADJ TRAY 1: Adjust the left margin of duplex print media fed from tray 1
(manual tray.)LEFT ADJ TRAY 2: Adjust the left margin of duplex print media fed from tray 2.LEFT ADJ TRAY 3: Adjust the left margin of duplex print media fed from tray 3.LEFT ADJ TRAY 4: Adjust the left margin of duplex print media fed from tray 4.LEFT ADJ TRAY 5: Adjust the left margin of duplex print media fed from tray 5.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [LEFT ADJ DUPLEX] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired tray and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired adjustment amount with the up key /down key and press the
MENU/SELECT key.
• The default setting is “0.”
-30 to +30 (1 step: 0.1 mm)1
Functions • Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the single-sided pages for each media type.
Use • To use when the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs.
Adjustment range
• The default setting is 0.“0” (-5 to +5)
Adjustment instructions
To increase the ATVC value (in the direction of a foggier image), decrease the setting value.To decrease the ATVC value (in the direction of a less foggy image), increase the setting value.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [TRANSFER POWER] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [SIMPLEX PASS] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired media type with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.4. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.
9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
158
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
(2) DUPLEX PASS
E. IMG ADJ THICK
F. IMG ADJ BLACK
Functions • Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the duplexed pages for each media type.
Use • To use when the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs.
Adjustment range
• The default setting is 0.“0” (-5 to +5)
Adjustment instructions
To increase the ATVC value (in the direction of a foggier image), decrease the setting value.To decrease the ATVC value (in the direction of a less foggy image), increase the setting value.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [TRANSFER POWER] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [DUPLEX PASS] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired media type with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.4. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.
Functions • To fine-adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP fim.
Use • To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP film.
Adjustment range
• The default setting is 0.“0” (-5 to +5)
Adjustment instructions
Light color: increase the setting valueDark color: decrease the setting value
Setting/procedure
1. Select [IMG ADJ THICK] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired color with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT
key.3. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.
Functions • To fine-adjust the density of the printed image for a black printing.
Use • To vary the density of the printed image of a black printing.
Adjustment range
• The default setting is 0.“0” (-2 to +2)
Adjustment instructions
If the black is light, increase the setting value.If the black is dark, decrease the setting value.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [IMG ADJ BLACK] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu
159
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
G. FUSER LOOP ADJ
Functions • To vary the timing to start fusing loop processing and adjust the fusing loop size at envelope printing.
Use • To be used when media wrinkle or transfer misalignment occur at envelope printing.
Adjustment range
• The default setting is 0.“0” (-2 to +2)
Adjustment instructions
Adjustment in +: Delay the timing to start fusing loop processingAdjustment in -: Put ahead the timing to start fusing loop processing
Setting/procedure
1. Select [FUSER LOOP ADJ] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.
10. Adjustment item list Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
160
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
10. Adjustment item list
* This table shows the adjustment items that are required when a part of the machine has been replaced. Priority order, if applicable, during the adjustment procedures is indicated by the corresponding number.
Replacement part/service job
Adjustment/setting items No Cha
nge
med
ia (
tray
1)
kind
Inst
all l
ower
feed
er u
nit
Inst
all d
uple
x op
tion
Rep
lace
tran
sfer
bel
t uni
t
Rep
lace
PH
uni
t
Rep
lace
mec
hani
cal c
ontr
ol b
oard
Rep
lace
con
trol
ler
boar
d
Rep
lace
IDC
/reg
istr
atio
nse
nsor
/1,2
RE
STO
RE
DE
FAU
LTS
Exe
cute
F/W
upd
ate
ME
NU
QUALITY MENU
CALIBRA-TION
AIDC PROCESS 1
SERVICE MENU
FIRMWARE VERSION
CONTROLLER EW 2 (2)
ENGINE F/W 3 (3)
BOOT F/W 4
ALIGN-MENT
TOP ADJUSTMENT 5 (2)
LEFT ADJUSTMENT 6 (3)
LEFT ADJ DUPLEX 7
Re-entry 8
PH skew adjustment 9 (1)
F/W update 10 (2) (1)
Remounting of parameter chip (PWB-M) 11 (1)
Replace transfer belt unit 12
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 11. SERVICE MENU
161 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
11. SERVICE MENU
11.1 How to enter the SERVICE MENU
NOTE• Make sure not to reveal the password of the service menu to any unauthorized per-
son.
A. Procedure1. Display [SERVICE MENU] on the menu screen and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. [ENTER PASSWORD] message is displayed.3. Set first digit of password with the up key /down key and press the right key .4. Repeat the above procedures to set up to seventh digit of password.
Enter “KMM7450” for service password. Press the MENU/SELECT key.5. Press the MENU/SELECT key.
B. Exiting• Press the CANCEL key.
11.2 Service mode function tree
SERVICE MENU Ref. Page
SERIAL NUMBER P.163
FIRMWARE VERSION
CONTROLLER F/W P.163
ENGINE F/W
BOOT F/W
ALIGNMENT TOP ADJUSTMENT P.163
LEFT ADJUSTMENT P.164
LEFT ADJ DUPLEX P.164
TRANSFER POWER
SIMPLEX PASS P.165
DUPLEX PASS P.165
IMAGE ADJ PARAM P.165
1’ST TRANSFER P.166
ELECTRIFICATION P.166
IMG ADJ THICK P.167
IMG ADJ BLACK P.167
FUSER SPEED HIGH SPEED P.167
LOW SPEED P.168
TEMPERATURE 1 P.168
TEMPERATURE 2 P.169
FUSER LOOP ADJ P.169
MAXIMUM DENSITY P.170
REGISTRATION (CD) P.171
REGISTRATION (FD) P.172
DIAGNOSIS MENU PRINT MENU MAINTENANCE INFO P.173
EVENT LOG P.173
ENG ADJ INFO P.1741
1
11. SERVICE MENU Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
162
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
DIAGNOSIS MENU PRINT MENU ELEMENT PAGE P.174
HALFTONE 64 P.181
HALFTONE 128 P.181
HALFTONE 256 P.181
GRADATION P.181
FUNCTION TRAY1 ADJ-MIN P.181
TRAY1 ADJ-MAX P.182
TONER REPLENISH P.182
PH SKEW ADJ CAUTION STATUS P.182
ADJUSTMENT PRINT P.185
PH REGIST VALUE P.185
RESTORE PASSWORD P.186
SOFT SWITCH SWITCH 1 P.186
SWITCH 2
SWITCH 3
SWITCH 4
SERVICE MENU Ref. Page
1
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 11. SERVICE MENU
163 1
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
11.3 SERVICE MENU setting/adjustment
11.3.1 SERIAL NUMBER
11.3.2 FIRMWARE VERSION
11.3.3 ALIGNMENT
A. TOP ADJUSTMENT
Function • Displays the serial number of the printer.
Use • To confirm the printer’s serial number.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [SERVICE MENU] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [SERIAL NUMBER] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. The serial number of the printer is displayed.
Function • Displays the version number of the printer firmware.
Use • To use when the firmware is updated. • To confirm the version number of the printer firmware.
CONTROLLER F/W: Firmware of controllerENGINE F/W : Firmware of engineBOOT/F/W : Boot firmware
Setting/procedure
1. Select [FIRMWARE VERSION] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired firmware and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Version number of firmware is displayed.
Function • Adjusts the top margin of media for single-sided printing.
Use • To correct a misaligned print image.PLAIN PAPER : Adjust the head margin of plain paper.THICK1 : Adjust the head margin of thick paper 1.THICK2 : Adjust the head margin of thick paper 2.THICK3 : Adjust the head margin of thick paper 3.ENVELOPE : Adjust the head margin of envelope.TRANSPARENCY: Adjust the head margin of transparency.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [TOP ADJUSTMENT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired media type and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired adjustment amount with the up key /down key and press the
MENU/SELECT key.
• The default setting is “0.”
-30 to +30 (1 step: 0.1 mm)1
1
11. SERVICE MENU Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
164
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
B. LEFT ADJUSTMENT
C. LEFT ADJ DUPLEX
Function • Adjusts the left margin of media for single-sided printing.
Use • To correct a misaligned print image.LEFT ADJ TRAY 1: Adjust the left margin of media fed from tray 1 (manual tray.)LEFT ADJ TRAY 2: Adjust the left margin of media fed from tray 2.LEFT ADJ TRAY 3: Adjust the left margin of media fed from tray 3.LEFT ADJ TRAY 4: Adjust the left margin of media fed from tray 4.LEFT ADJ TRAY 5: Adjust the left margin of media fed from tray 5.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [LEFT ADJUSTMENT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired tray and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired adjustment amount with the up key /down key and press the
MENU/SELECT key.
• The default setting is “0.”
-30 to +30 (1 step: 0.1 mm)1
Function • Adjusts the left margin of media for double-sided printing.
Use • To correct a misaligned print image.LEFT ADJ TRAY 1: Adjust the left margin of duplex print media fed from tray 1
(manual tray.)LEFT ADJ TRAY 2: Adjust the left margin of duplex print media fed from tray 2.LEFT ADJ TRAY 3: Adjust the left margin of duplex print media fed from tray 3.LEFT ADJ TRAY 4: Adjust the left margin of duplex print media fed from tray 4.LEFT ADJ TRAY 5: Adjust the left margin of duplex print media fed from tray 5.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [LEFT ADJ DUPLEX] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired tray and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired adjustment amount with the up key /down key and press the
MENU/SELECT key.
• The default setting is “0.”
-30 to +30 (1 step: 0.1 mm)1
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 11. SERVICE MENU
165
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
D. TRANSFER POWER(1) SIMPLEX PASS
(2) DUPLEX PASS
E. IMAGE ADJ PARAM
Functions • Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the single-sided pages for each media type.
Use • To use when the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs.
Adjustment range
• The default setting is “0.”-5 to +5
Adjustment instructions
To increase the ATVC value (in the direction of a foggier image), decrease the setting value.To decrease the ATVC value (in the direction of a less foggy image), increase the setting value.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [TRANSFER POWER] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [SIMPLEX PASS] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired media type with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.4. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.
Functions • Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the duplexed pages for each media type.
Use • To use when the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs.
Adjustment range
• The default setting is “0.”-5 to +5
Adjustment instructions
To increase the ATVC value (in the direction of a foggier image), decrease the setting value.To decrease the ATVC value (in the direction of a less foggy image), increase the setting value.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [TRANSFER POWER] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [DUPLEX PASS] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired media type with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.4. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.
Function • Adjusts the printer in case of an image quality problem (uneven density)
Use • To correct image quality problems (uneven density) due to the printer being operated at a high altitude.
Setting/procedure
• The default setting is “0.”
“0” 1
NOTE• When the setting has been changed, be sure to run a CALIBRATION/AIDC
process.See P.132
11. SERVICE MENU Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
166
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
F. 1’st TRANSFER
G. ELECTRIFICATION
Functions • Adjust the output value for the 1st image transfer voltage.
Use • To use when white spots appeared.
Adjustment range
• The default setting is “0.”-5 to +5
Adjustment instructions
Adjust the output value for the 1st image transfer voltage by;Increasing it: Increase the setting value (white spots will decrease)Decreasing it: Decrease the setting value
Setting/procedure
1. Select [1’st TRANSFER] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key .3. Press the MENU/SELECT key to set the adjustment value.
Gradually increase the adjustment value to the acceptable white spots level while checking the test pattern.
NOTE• PC drum memory (94mm pitch) may occur by taking measure to white spots
occurred by increasing the 1st image transfer voltage to adjust it.Check the image on the test print or the color chart when adjusting.
Functions • To adjust the highlight portion (fog level) to the target reproduction level by making an auxiliary manual fine-adjustment of γ of each color after gradation adjust.
Use • Use when a foggy background occurs due to a printer problem
Adjustment range
• The default setting is “0.”-5 to +5
Adjustment instructions
To make the background level foggier, increase the setting value.To make the background level less foggy, decrease the setting value.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [ELECTRIFICATION] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired color with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT
key.3. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.
NOTE• When the setting has been changed, be sure to run a CALIBRATION/AIDC
process.See P.132
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 11. SERVICE MENU
167
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
H. IMG ADJ THICK
I. IMG ADJ BLACK
J. FUSER SPEED(1) HIGH SPEED
Functions • To fine-adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP film.
Use • To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP film.
Adjustment range
• The default setting is “0.”-5 to +5
Adjustment instructions
Light color: increase the setting valueDark color: decrease the setting value
Setting/procedure
1. Select [IMG ADJ THICK] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired color with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT
key.3. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.
Functions • To fine-adjust the density of the printed image for a black printing.
Use • To vary the density of the printed image of a black printing.
Adjustment range
• The default setting is “0.”-2 to +2
Adjustment instructions
If the black is light, increase the setting value.If the black is dark, decrease the setting value.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [IMG ADJ BLACK] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.
Functions • To adjust the speed of the fusing drive motor when the transport speed is 110 mm/s (When feeding plain paper and recycled paper.) so as to match the fusing speed with transport speed.
Use • Brush effect or blurred image is evident as a result of changes in environmental con-ditions or degraded durability.
Variable range
• The default setting is “0.”-20 to +20 (1 step: 0.1 %)
Adjustment instructions
If brush effect is evident, vary the setting value and check for image.If a blurred image occurs, decrease the setting.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [FUSER SPEED] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [HIGH SPEED] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.
11. SERVICE MENU Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
168
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
(2) LOW SPEED
K. TEMPERATURE 1
Functions • To adjust the speed of the fusing drive motor when the transport speed is 110 mm/s (When feeding thick paper, OHP film, envelope, postcard, and labels.) so as to match the fusing speed with transport speed.
Use • Brush effect or blurred image is evident as a result of changes in environmental con-ditions or degraded durability.
Variable range
• The default setting is “0.”-20 to +20 (1 step: 0.1 %)
Adjustment instructions
If brush effect is evident, vary the setting value and check for image.If a blurred image occurs, decrease the setting.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [FUSER SPEED] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [LOW SPEED] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.
Functions • To adjust individually the temperature of the heating roller for each type of media, thereby printing with varying fusing performance under changing environmental con-ditions.
Use • When fusing performance is poor, or wax streak or offset occurs when the type of media is changed or environmental conditions change.
• By setting the temperature higher (+), gloss of print or OHP film can be improved.• By setting the temperature lower (-), exit roller mark or uneven transparencies of
OHP can be reduced.
Adjustment range
• The default setting is 0 °C.
THICK 3 : 0 °C to +10 °C (1 step: 5 °C)Others :-10 °C to +10 °C (1 step: 5 °C)
Adjustment instructions
If fusing performance is poor, increase the setting.If wax streaks occur, decrease the setting.If offset is poor, decrease the setting.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [TEMPERATURE 1] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired media type with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.3. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 11. SERVICE MENU
169
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
L. TEMPERATURE 2
M. FUSER LOOP ADJ
Functions • To adjust individually the temperature of the fusing pressure roller for each type of media, thereby coping with varying fusing performance under changing environmen-tal conditions.
Use • When fusing performance is poor, or wax streak or offset occurs when the type of media is changed or environmental conditions change.
• By setting the temperature higher (+), gloss of print or OHP film can be improved.• By setting the temperature lower (-), exit roller mark or uneven transparencies of
OHP can be reduced.
Adjustment range
• The default setting is 0 °C.
THICK 3 : 0 °C to +10 °C (1 step: 5 °C)Others :-10 °C to +10 °C (1 step: 5 °C)
Adjustment instructions
If fusing performance is poor, increase the setting.If wax streaks occur, decrease the setting.If offset is poor, decrease the setting.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [TEMPERATURE 2] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired media type with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.3. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.
Functions • To vary the timing to start fusing loop processing and adjust the fusing loop size at envelope printing.
Use • To be used when media wrinkle or transfer misalignment occur at envelope printing.
Adjustment range
• The default setting is “0.”-2 to +2
Adjustment instructions
Adjustment in +: Delay the timing to start fusing loop processingAdjustment in -: Put ahead the timing to start fusing loop processing
Setting/procedure
1. Select [FUSER LOOP ADJ] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.
11. SERVICE MENU Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
170
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
N. MAXIMUM DENSITY
Functions • To adjust gradation, color, and image density to target reproduction levels by varying the maximum amount of toner sticking to media through auxiliary manual fine-adjust-ment of gamma of each color after gradation adjust.
Use • An image quality problem is not corrected even after gradation adjust has been run.
Adjustment range
• The default setting is “0.”-10 to +10
Adjustment instructions
To increase the maximum amount of toner sticking, increase the setting value.To decrease the maximum amount of toner sticking, decrease the setting value.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [MAXIMUM DENSITY] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired color with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT
key.3. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/
SELECT key.
NOTE• When the setting has been changed, be sure to run a CALIBRATION/AIDC
process.See P.132
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 11. SERVICE MENU
171
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
O. REGISTRATION (CD)
Functions • To adjust color shift (CD direction) if it occurs with plain or thick paper.
Use • To correct any color shift.
Adjustment range
• The default setting is “0.”-6 to +6 dot
Adjustment instructions
If the cross deviates in the direction of C, increase the setting.If the cross deviates in the direction of D, decrease the setting.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [SERVICE MENU] → [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [FUNCTION MENU] → [PH SKEW ADJ] → [ADJUSTMENT PRINT].
2. Load tray 2 with A3/11 x 17 or A4/8.5 x 11 plain paper.3. Select [EXECUTE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.4. On the test pattern produced, check for deviation between the black line and the line
of each color at position Y.5. Select [REGISTRATION (CD)] and press the MENU/SELECT key.6. Select desired color with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT
key.7. Using the up key /down key , change the setting value as necessary.
(At this time, only the line of the selected color moves.)8. Produce another test pattern and make sure that there is no deviation.
Check procedure
4039F3C510DB
Y
4039F3C511DB4039F3C512DB
If the cross deviates in the direction of C, decrease the setting.If the cross deviates in the direction of D, increase the setting.
Direction of C Direction of D
11. SERVICE MENU Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
172
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
P. REGISTRATION (FD)
Functions • To adjust color shift (FD direction) if it occurs with plain or thick paper.
Use • To correct any color shift.
Adjustment range
• The default setting is “0.”-6 to +6 dot
Adjustment instructions
If the cross deviates in the direction of A, increase the setting.If the cross deviates in the direction of B, decrease the setting.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [SERVICE MENU] → [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [FUNCTION MENU] → [PH SKEW ADJ] → [ADJUSTMENT PRINT].
2. Load tray 2 with A3/11 x 17 or A4/8.5 x 11 plain paper.3. Select [EXECUTE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.4. On the test pattern produced, check for deviation between the black line and the line
of each color at position X.5. Select [REGISTRATION (FD)] and press the MENU/SELECT key.6. Select desired color with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT
key.7. Using the up key /down key , change the setting value as necessary. (At this time,
only the line of the selected color moves.)8. Produce another test pattern and make sure that there is no deviation.
Check Procedure
4039F3C507DA
X
4039F3C508DB 4039F3C509DB
If the cross deviates in the direction of A, decrease the setting.If the cross deviates in the direction of B, increase the setting.
Direction of A Direction of B
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 11. SERVICE MENU
173
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
11.3.4 DIAGNOSIS MENU
A. PRINT MENU(1) MAINTENANCE INFO
(2) EVENT LOG
Functions • To produce an output of a list of setting values, adjustment values, total counter val-ues, and others.
Use • To check the maintenance information. The items which can be checked are as follows.
Device Caution Information : Information concerning the device cautionDot Count (total) : Dot count value for each colorCoverage (total) : Coverage rate for each colorReplace count (total) : Number of times IU, TC, transfer belt unit, and fusing
unit have been replaced.Imaging Unit Information : Information concerning the imaging unitToner Cartridge Information: Information concerning the toner cartridge
Setting/procedure
1. Select [MAINTENANCE INFO] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
Functions • To print the EVENT LOG.
Use • To check the jams/troubles which occurred, and the history of replacing the consum-ables. The items which can be checked are as follows.
Paper Jam Error : The number of times jam have occurred and its historyEngine Fatal Error : The history of the troubles which required service callFuser Unit : The history of replacing the fusing unitTransfer Belt : The history of replacing the transfer unitToner Cartridge : The history of replacing the toner cartridgeImaging Unit : The history of replacing the imaging unitTrouble Counter : Trouble counting for each section
Setting/procedure
1. Select [EVENT LOG] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
1
11. SERVICE MENU Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
174
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
(3) ENG ADJ INFO
(4) ELEMENT PAGE
<Engine element data information>
1
Functions • Prints the information concerning the configuration.
Use • To check the adjustment values set by the maintenance menu and service menu.The items which can be checked are as follows.
TOP ADJUSTMENTLEFT ADJUSTMENTLEFT ADJ DUPLEXTRANSFER POWERIMAGE ADJ PARAM1’ST TRANSFERELECTRIFICATIONIMG ADJ THICKIMG ADJ BLACKFUSER SPEEDTEMPERATURE 1TEMPERATURE 2FUSER LOOP ADJMAXIMUM DENSITYREGISTRATION(CD)REGISTRATION(FD)
Setting/procedure
1. Select [ENG ADJ INFO] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
Functions • Prints the element information.
Use • To check the element data.• See the attached chart listed below for details.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [ELEMENT PAGE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
Element data name Description
INSIDE HUMIDITY • Displays the inside humidity.
ABSOLUTE HUMIDITY • Displays the absolute humidity.
INSIDE TEMPERATURE • Displays the inside temperature.
SENSOR INFORMATION1 • Displays the input port status of the sensors and switches in hexadecimal numbers.
• To be used for troubleshooting when troubles/jams occur.• For allocating bits for SENSOR INFORMATION 1 to 6, see the
attached chart, “Sensor Information List.”See P.177
SENSOR INFORMATION2
SENSOR INFORMATION3
SENSOR INFORMATION4
SENSOR INFORMATION5
SENSOR INFORMATION6
FUSER HEATER1 TEMPERATURE
• Shows the temperature of the heating roller (in 1 ºC increments).• Relevant components: Fusing unit
FUSER HEATER2 TEMPERATURE
• Shows the temperature of the fusing pressure roller (in 1 ºC incre-ments).
• Relevant components: Fusing unit
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 11. SERVICE MENU
175
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
IDC REGIST SENSOR1 • Shows the IDC bare surface output reading taken last (in 0.01 V increments).
• It should normally be around 4.3 V.• The output range is 0 V to 9.99 V.• “Reading taken last” means: Latest toner density• Relevant components: IDC sensor, transfer belt unit
IDC REGIST SENSOR2
TCR SENSOR C • Shows the T/C ratio (in 0.01 % increments).• Standard value: 8 ± 2 %• Relevant components: PH unit, TCR sensor K
TCR SENSOR M
TCR SENSOR Y
TCR SENSOR K • Shows the T/C ratio (in 0.01 % increments).• Standard value: 7 ± 2 %• Relevant components: PH unit, TCR sensor K
VG VOLT C • Shows the grid voltage value of each color of toner when an image is produced.
• Standard values: Around 500 V• A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric
value is greater.• A correction is made to make the image darker when the numeric
value is smaller.• Relevant components: Imaging unit, high voltage unit (developing
bias)
VG VOLT M
VG VOLT Y
VG VOLT K
VB VOLT C • Shows the developing bias value of each color of toner when an image is produced.
• Standard values: Around 400 V• A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric
value is greater.• A correction is made to make the image darker when the numeric
value is smaller.• Relevant components: Imaging unit, high voltage unit (developing
bias)
VB VOLT M
VB VOLT Y
VB VOLT K
IDC BASE REFLECTION1 • Shows the IDC intensity adjustment value.• It should normally be around 40 and can range from 0 to 255.• The value becomes greater as the transfer belt unit has been
used more.• Relevant components: IDC sensor, transfer belt unit
IDC BASE REFLECTION2
THICKSTOCK VG VOLT C • Displays the grid voltage value of each color when printing the image on the thick paper.
• Standard values: Around 500 V• A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric
value is greater.• A correction is made to make the image darker when the numeric
value is smaller.• Relevant components: Imaging unit, high voltage unit (developing
bias)
THICKSTOCK VG VOLT M
THICKSTOCK VG VOLT Y
THICKSTOCK VG VOLT K
Element data name Description
11. SERVICE MENU Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
176
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
THICKSTOCK VB VOLT C • Displays the developing bias value of each color when printing the image on the thick paper.
• Standard values: Around 400 V• A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric
value is greater.• A correction is made to make the image darker when the numeric
value is smaller.• Relevant components: Imaging unit, high voltage unit (developing
bias)
THICKSTOCK VB VOLT M
THICKSTOCK VB VOLT Y
THICKSTOCK VB VOLT K
MONOCHROME VG VOLT C • Displays the grid voltage value of each color when printing in monochrome.
• Standard values: Around 400 V• A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric
value is greater.• A correction is made to make the image darker when the numeric
value is smaller.• Relevant components: Imaging unit, high voltage unit (developing
bias)
MONOCHROME VG VOLT M
MONOCHROME VG VOLT Y
MONOCHROME VG VOLT K
MONOCHROME VB VOLT C • Displays the developing bias value of each color when printing in monochrome.
• Standard values: Around 300 V• A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric
value is greater.• A correction is made to make the image darker when the numeric
value is smaller.• Relevant components: Imaging unit, high voltage unit (developing
bias)
MONOCHROME VB VOLT M
MONOCHROME VB VOLT Y
MONOCHROME VB VOLT K
TRANS CURRENT1 • Displays the latest output value for the 1st image transfer.• Range: -1,000 to 2,000 V
TRANS CURRENT2 • Displays the latest output value for the 2nd image transfer.• Range: -1,000 to 4,800 V• Relevant components: Transfer belt unit, high voltage unit (trans-
fer, neutralization)• “TRANS CURRENT2” is not displayed not to print one sheet or
more after the main power switch is turned ON.
REGIST SKEW C • Displays the PH skew adjustment value.
REGIST SKEW M
REGIST SKEW Y
Element data name Description
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 11. SERVICE MENU
177
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
Sensor information list(SENSOR INFORMATION 1)
(SENSOR INFORMATION 2)
BIT Part nameOperation characteristics
1 0
0 Tray 2 device detection sensor In position Out of position
1 Tray 2 paper empty sensor Paper not present Paper present
2 Tray 2 paper near-empty sensor Blocked Unblocked
3 Set sensor (tray 3) In position Out of position
4 Paper empty sensor (tray 3) Paper not present Paper present
5 Paper near-empty sensor (tray 3) Blocked Unblocked
6 Vertical transport sensor (tray 3) Paper present Paper not present
7 Set Sensor (tray 4) In position Out of position
8 Paper empty sensor (tray 4) Paper not present Paper present
9 Paper near-empty sensor (tray 4) Blocked Unblocked
10 Vertical transport sensor (tray 4) Paper present Paper not present
11 Set sensor (tray 5) In position Out of position
12 Paper empty sensor (tray 5) Paper not present Paper present
13 Paper near-empty sensor (tray 5) Blocked Unblocked
BIT Part nameOperation characteristics
1 0
0 Vertical transport sensor (tray 5) Paper present Paper not present
1 Tray 1 paper empty sensor Paper not present Paper present
2 Registration roller sensor Paper present Paper not present
3 Exit sensor Paper present Paper not present
4 Tray 1 lift-up sensor At raised positionNot at raised
position
5 Duplex unit door set sensor Close Open
6 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
7 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
8 OHP sensor OHP Not OHP
9 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
10 Paper take-up sensor (tray 3) Paper present Paper not present
11 Paper take-up sensor (tray 4) Paper present Paper not present
12 Paper take-up sensor (tray 5) Paper present Paper not present
13 Fusing loop detect sensor Loop present Loop not present
11. SERVICE MENU Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
178
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
(SENSOR INFORMATION 3)
(SENSOR INFORMATION 4)
BIT Part nameOperation characteristics
1 0
0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1 Duplex unit transport sensor1 Paper present Paper not present
2 Duplex unit transport sensor2 Paper present Paper not present
3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
4 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
5 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
6 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
7 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
8 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
9 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
10 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
11 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
12 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
13 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
BIT Part nameOperation characteristics
1 0
0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
4 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
5 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
6 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
7 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
8 Waste toner full sensor Blocked Unblocked
9 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
10 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
11 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
12 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
13 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 11. SERVICE MENU
179
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
(SENSOR INFORMATION 5)
(SENSOR INFORMATION 6)
BIT Part nameOperation characteristics
1 0
0 1st image transfer pressure/retraction position sensor Not retracted Retracted
1 2nd image transfer pressure position sensor Not retracted Retracted
2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
4 Color PC drive main sensor Blocked Unblocked
5 Color PC drive sub sensor Blocked Unblocked
6 Black PC drive main sensor Blocked Unblocked
7 Black PC drive sub sensor Blocked Unblocked
8 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
9 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
10 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
11 Lift-up sensor (tray 3) At raised position Not at raised position
12 Lift-up sensor (tray 4) At raised position Not at raised position
13 Lift-up sensor (tray 5) At raised position Not at raised position
BIT Part nameOperation characteristics
1 0
0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
4 Exit full sensor Unblocked Blocked
5 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
6 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
7 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
8 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
9 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
10 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
11 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
12 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
13 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
11. SERVICE MENU Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
180
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
<How to read sensor information>• Convert the numerical value of the hexadecimal number printed on [ELEMENT DATA]
into the binary number, it compares with the allocation of each BIT, and the status of the sensor is confirmed.
ex. When sensor information1 is displayed as 0x0005. 1. Convert four end digits “0005” of 0x0005 into the binary number (14 digits).2. The BIT number is allocated in converted value “00000000000101.”
(BIT0 to BIT13 is sequentially allocated from the first digit.)
3. In this case, because BIT No. “0” and “2” become “1”, so it can be confirmed that the tray 2 device detection sensor is “In position” state and the tray 2 paper near-empty sensor is “Blocked” states from the sensor information table.
(SENSOR INFORMATION 1)
Conversion method from hexadecimal number to binary number1. The hexadecimal number (four digits) is converted in each digit based on the following
table.
2. Match the converted numerical value of four digits, then two head digits are excluded and it is assumed the binary number of 14 digits.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
BIT13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BIT0
4039F3C522DB
0 0 0 5
BIT Part nameOperation characteristics
1 0
0 Tray 2 device detection sensor In position Out of position
2 Tray 2 paper near-empty sensor Blocked Unblocked
Hexadeci-mal number
Binary number
Hexadeci-mal number
Binary number
Hexadeci-mal number
Binary number
Hexadeci-mal number
Binary number
0 0000 4 0100 8 1000 C 1100
1 0001 5 0101 9 1001 D 1101
2 0010 6 0110 A 1010 E 1101
3 0011 7 0111 B 1011 F 1111
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 11. SERVICE MENU
181
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
(5) HALF TONE 64
(6) HALF TONE 128
(7) HALF TONE 256
(8) GRADATION
B. FUNCTION MENU(1) TRAY1 ADJ-MIN
Functions • Prints the halftone pattern with 25 % level for CMYK respectively.
Use • To check the unevenness of the density and the pitch.
Setting/procedure
1. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 media on the tray.2. Select [HALF TONE 64] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired color with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT
key.4. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
Functions • Prints the halftone pattern with 50 % level for CMYK respectively.
Use • To check the unevenness of the density and the pitch.
Setting/procedure
1. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 media on the tray.2. Select [HALF TONE 128] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired color with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT
key.4. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
Functions • Prints the halftone pattern with 100 % level for CMYK respectively.
Use • To check the unevenness of the density and the pitch.
Setting/procedure
1. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 media on the tray.2. Select [HALF TONE 256] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired color with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT
key.4. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
Functions • Prints the gradation pattern.
Use • To check the gradation reproductively.
Setting/procedure
1. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 media on the tray.2. Select [GRADATION] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
Functions • To set the minimum width for the manual bypass media size unit of the manual bypass guide.
Use • Use when the manual bypass media size unit of the manual bypass guide has been changed.
• Use when a false media size is displayed when the tray 1 is used.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [TRAY1 ADJ-MIN] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Load the tray 1 with media having a width of 90 mm or 3.55 inches.3. Select [EXECUTE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
11. SERVICE MENU Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
182
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
(2) TRAY1 ADJ-MAX
(3) TONER REPLENISH
(4) PH SKEW ADJ• This menu will not displayed during error, warming up, and calibration.
<CAUTION STATUS>
Functions • To set the maximum width for the manual bypass media size unit of the manual bypass guide.
Use • Use when the manual bypass media size unit of the manual bypass guide has been changed.
• Use when a false media size is displayed when the tray 1 is used.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [TRAY1 ADJ-MAX] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Load the tray 1 with media having a width of 311 mm or 12.25 inches.3. Select [EXECUTE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.
Functions • To adjust the set T/C level by replenishing an auxiliary supply of toner when a low ID occurs due to a lowered T/C after large numbers of prints have been made of origi-nals having a high image density.
Use • When there is a drop in T/C.
Setting/procedure
1. Select [TONER REPLENISH] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired color with the up key/down keys and press the MENU/SELECT key.
(Select [ALL COLORS] for supplying toner for all colors at one time.)3. Pressing the MENU/SELECT key will detect the current toner density, and supplies
the toner when the level is lower than the standard. It will then be stirred.4. Operation described on step 3 will be repeated maximum of four times until it
reaches to the standard value. When the value is above the standard, it only stirs.5. [TONER REPLENISH COMPLETED] will be displayed when the toner is normally
supplied.
Functions • Displays the device caution information in hexadecimal number.
Use • To check the device caution information before performing the [ADJUSTMENT PRINT] when adjusting the PH skew.
See P.189
For allocating each bit to the device caution information 1, 2, see the following “Device caution information list.”
Setting/procedure
1. Select [CAUTION STATUS] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. CAUTION STATUS is displayed in hexadecimal number.
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 11. SERVICE MENU
183
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
CAUTION STATUS 1
BIT Item Description
0 ⎯ ⎯
1 ⎯ ⎯
2 ⎯ ⎯
3 ⎯ ⎯
4 ⎯ ⎯
5 IDC sensor (front) failure
1
• All outputs of sensor photoreceiver section from the detec-tion point (unprinted surface on the transfer belt unit) are 0.5 V or less or 4.3 V or more at output checking during IDC/reg-istration sensor adjustment.
• All outputs of sensor photoreceiver section from the detec-tion point (unprinted surface on the transfer belt unit) are 1.9 V or less or 4.4 V or more at density setting during IDC/regis-tration sensor adjustment.
• The output of sensor photoreceiver section from the detec-tion point (toner pattern on the transfer belt unit) is 1.0 V or less after the adjustment.
0• Front door open/close, main power switch OFF/ON, and nor-
mal image stabilization are complete besides the ones listed above.
6 Cyan imaging unit failure
1
• All density readings taken from the density pattern produced on the transfer belt unit are 0.5 g/m2 (IDC sensor photore-ceiver output) or less during max. density adjustment (Vg/Vdc adjustment).
• All density readings taken from the density pattern produced on the transfer belt unit are 4.5 g/m2 (IDC sensor photore-ceiver output) or more during max. density adjustment (Vg/Vdc adjustment.)
7 Magenta imaging unit failure
8 Yellow imaging unit failure0
• Front door open/close, main power switch OFF/ON, and nor-mal image stabilization are complete besides the ones listed above.
9 Black imaging unit failure
10 IDC sensor (back) failure
1
• All outputs of sensor photoreceiver section from the detec-tion point (unprinted surface on the transfer belt unit) are 0.5 V or less or 4.3 V or more at output checking during IDC/reg-istration sensor adjustment.
• All outputs of sensor photoreceiver section from the detec-tion point (unprinted surface on the transfer belt unit) are 1.9 V or less or 4.4 V or more at density setting during IDC/regis-tration sensor adjustment.
• The output of sensor photoreceiver section from the detec-tion point (toner pattern on the transfer belt unit) is 1.0 V or less after the adjustment.
0• Front door open/close, main power switch OFF/ON, and nor-
mal image dtabilization are complete besides the ones listed above.
11. SERVICE MENU Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
184
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
CAUTION STATUS 2
11 Color shift test pattern fail-ure
1
• The number of points detected in the main scan direction is more or less than the specified value during main scan direc-tion registration correction.
• The number of points detected in the sub scan direction is more or less than the specified value during sub scan direc-tion registration correction.
0• Front door open/close, main power switch OFF/ON, and nor-
mal image stabilization are complete besides the ones listed above.
12 Color shift adjust failure
1
• The color shift amount is greater than the specified range during main scan direction registration correction.
• The color shift amount is greater than the specified range during sub scan direction registration correction.
• The skew correction amount is greater than the specified value.
0• Front door open/close, main power switch OFF/ON, and nor-
mal image stabilization are complete besides the ones listed above.
13 ⎯ ⎯
BIT Item Description
BIT Item Description
0 ⎯ ⎯
1 ⎯ ⎯
2 ⎯ ⎯
3 1st image transfer ATVC (K) failure
1• An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment
of the first image transfer ATVC value of black.
0• Front door open/close, main power switch OFF/ON, and
ATVC adjustment are normally completed besides the ones listed above.
4 1st image transfer ATVC (color) failure
1• An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment
of the first image transfer ATVC value of color.
0• Front door open/close, main power switch OFF/ON, and
ATVC adjustment are normally completed besides the ones listed above.
5 ⎯ ⎯
6 ⎯ ⎯
7 ⎯ ⎯
8 2nd image transfer ATVC failure
1• An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment
of the second image transfer ATVC value.
0• Front door open/close, main power switch OFF/ON, and
ATVC adjustment are normally completed besides the ones listed above.
9 ⎯ ⎯
10 ⎯ ⎯
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 11. SERVICE MENU
185
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
NOTE• Refer to “How to read sensor information” for how to read CAUTION STATUS.
See P.180
<ADJUSTMENT PRINT>
<PH REGIST VALUE>
11 Color PC drum sensor malfunction
1
• The output from the color PC drive main and sub sensors remains unchanged for a continuous period of 1,000 ms while the color PC drum motor is turning stably and the lock signal is active (LOW-0).
0• Front door open/close, main power switch OFF/ON, color PC
drive main and sub sensors error detection are normally completed besides the ones listed above.
12 Black PC drum sensor malfunction
1
• The output from the black PC drive main and sub sensors remains unchanged for a continuous period of 1,000 ms while the main motor is turning stably and the lock signal is active (LOW-0).
0• Front door open/close, main power switch OFF/ON, black PC
drive main and sub sensors error detection are normally completed besides the ones listed above.
13 ⎯ ⎯
BIT Item Description
Functions • Image stabilization for PH skew adjustment, and performing the test printing for con-firming the adjustment.
Use • Use for adjustment of PH skew.
Setting/procedure
1. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 media on the tray.2. Select [ADJUSTMENT PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select [EXECUTE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.4. Pressing the MENU/SELECT key will perform image stabilization and the test print-
ing for confirming the adjustment. (Key operation will be invalid while performing.)
Functions • Displays the adjustment value during PH skew adjustment.
Use • Use for adjustment of PH skew.See P.189
Setting/procedure
1. Select [PH REGIST VALUE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Displays adjustment values for Y, M, and C colors.
1
11. SERVICE MENU Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
186
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
11.3.5 RESTORE PASSWARD
11.3.6 SOFT SWITCH
• magicolor 7450 II only
Function • Reinitializes the user password used for the “INTERFACE MENU / SYSTEM DEFAULT MENU / MAINTENANCE MENU” set by user.
Use • To reinitialize the user password when the menu cannot be opened even when enter-ing the correct password.
• To reinitialize the user password when the user forgets the password.YES : Initialize passwordNO : Not initialize password
Setting/procedure
1. Select “RESTORE PASSWORD” and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select “YES” and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Return the password set at “INTERFACE MENU / SYSTEM DEFAULT MENU /
MAINTENANCE MENU” to “0000.”
• The default setting is NO.
YES “NO”
1
Function
• Not used.Use
Setting/procedure
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 12. Mechanical adjustment
187
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
12. Mechanical adjustment
12.1 Mechanical adjustment of the tray 1
12.1.1 Adjustment of the tray 1 media size unit
This adjustment must be made in the following case:• The tray 1 media size unit has been removed.
1. Install the gear so that the protrusion of the gear [1] and the mark [3] on the tray 1 guide rack gear [2] are aligned in a straight line.
2. Install the tray 1 unit cover so that part A (edge) [2] of the rack gear [1] for the tray 1 media size unit and part B [3] of the tray 1 unit cover are aligned in a straight line.
[1][3]
[3]
[2]
[2]
4038F3C003DB
[3]
4038F3C004DC
[1]
[2]
12. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
188
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
3. When the tray 1 media size unit base is mounted, align the lever position of the tray 1 media size unit with the tab at the center in a straight line.
4. After the tray 1 media size unit base has been mounted, check that the lever of the tray 1 media size unit moves smoothly in a manner operatively connected to the tray 1 guide.
5. Call the SERVICE MENU to the screen and carry out [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [FUNC-TION MENU] → [TRAY1 ADJ-MIN] / [TRAY1 ADJ-MAX]. See P.181
4038F3C512DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 12. Mechanical adjustment
189
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
12.2 PH unit mechanical adjustment
12.2.1 Skew adjustment
This adjustment must be made in the following case:• When the PH units are replaced.
1. Turn on the main power switch.2. Select the items described below to display [CAUTION STATUS] on the control panel.
[SERVICE MENU] → [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [FUNCTION MENU] → [PH SKEW ADJ] → [CAUTION STATUS]
3. Check that Bit number 11 “Color shift test pattern failure”, and Bit number 12 “Color shift adjust failure” on [CAUTION STATUS 1] did not occur.See P.182
4. Set A3 or 11 x 17 media on the tray.(The media to be set depends on the setting on [SYS DEFAULT MENU] → [PAPER] → [UNIT OF MEASURE].)
5. Select [SERVICE MENU] → [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [FUNCTION MENU] → [PH SKEW ADJ] → [ADJUSTMENT PRINT] and output the test pattern.
6. Display [SERVICE MENU]] → [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [FUNCTION MENU] → [PH SKEW ADJ] → [PH REGIST VALUE] and check if the Regist Value is within the specifi-cation.
Specification: within ± 4
4039F3E519DB
Y
M
C
=
=
=
-5
3
-1
PH REGIST VALUE
12. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
190
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
• If either value is out of the specifica-tion, follow the procedures shown below to adjust it to satisfy the specifi-cation.
• If the value of all color, C,M,Y,K, satisfy the specification, proceed to step 11.
7. Open the front door.8. Turn the dkew adjustment dial of the
corresponding PH with flathead screwdriver.
• To the left: When the step value goes - direction
• To the right: When the step value goes + direction
<Adjustment sample>If the yellow value, among the step values confirmed in step 6, is [-5], which means out of the specification, turn the skew adjustment dial of PH (Yellow) to the left (- direction) for 5 clicks.
9. Close the front door and select [SERVICE MENU] → [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [FUNC-TION MENU] → [PH SKEW ADJ] → [ADJUSTMENT PRINT] and output the test pat-tern.
10. After ADJUSTMENT PRINT is completed, display [SERVICE MENU]] → [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [FUNCTION MENU] → [PH SKEW ADJ] → [PH REGIST VALUE] again and check if the regist value of each color C,M,Y, is within the specification.
NOTE• Each color’s regist value displayed on [PH REGIST VALUE] changes every time the
image stabilization is conducted. Therefore the value may change even if skew adjustment is not made.
• If either value is out of the specification, repeat step 7 to 10 to continue the adjustment until all CMYK colors satisfy the specification.
11. Finish the adjustment.
4038F3C006DC
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 13. Jam display
191
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
Troubleshooting13. Jam display
13.1 Misfeed display
• When a media misfeed occurs a message is displayed on the control panel.
13.2 Misfeed display resetting procedure
• Open the relevant door, clear the sheet of misfed media, and close the door.
DisplayMisfeed location
Misfeed processing location
ActionLCD 1 LCD 2
PAPER JAM
FUSER/EXIT • Fusing/exit section • Right door (Main body)• Fusing unit
See P.193
SECOND TRANS
• Transfer section • Right door (Main body) See P.194
VERTICAL TRANS
See P.29 of the lower feeder unit service manual.
DUPLEX1 See P.9 of the duplex option service manual.
DUPLEX2
TRAY1 • Tray 1 media feed (Manual feed tray)
• Tray 1• Right door (Main body)
See P.195
TRAY2 • Tray 2 media feed • Tray 2• Right door (Main body)
See P.196
TRAY3 See P.29 of the lower feeder unit service manual.
TRAY4
TRAY5
4039F4E510DB
PAPER JAM
for help
TRAY1
1
1
1
13. Jam display Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
192
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
13.3 Sensor layout
*1: Two different types of sensors are located in the area near [4].
[1] Exit sensor PC2 [6] Paper take-up sensor (tray 3) PC9
[2] Duplex unit transport sensor 1 PC1 [7] Vertical transport sensor (tray 4) PC8
[3] Duplex unit transport sensor 2 PC2 [8] Take-up sensor (tray 4) PC9
[4]*1 Registration roller sensor PC1 [9] Vertical transport sensor (tray 5) PC8
[4]*1 OHP sensor PC4 [10] Take-up sensor (tray 5) PC9
[5] Vertical transport sensor (tray 3) PC8
4039F4C501DC
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 13. Jam display
193
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
13.4 Solution
13.4.1 Initial check items
• When a media misfeed occurs, first make checks of the following initial check items
13.4.2 Misfeed at fusing/exit section
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Check item Action
• Does media meet product specifications? Change media.
• Is media curled, wavy, or damp. Change media.Instruct user in correct media storage.
• Is a foreign object present along the media path, or is the media path deformed or worn?
Clean or change the media path.
• Are the media separator fingers dirty, deformed, or worn?
Clean or change the defective media separa-tor finger.
• Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn? Clean or change the defective roll/roller.
• Are the edge guide and trailing edge stop at correct position to accommodate media?
Set as necessary.
• Are actuators found operational as checked for correct operation?
Correct or change the defective actuator.
Type Description
Detection of misfeed at fusing/exit section
• PC2 is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the media has blocked the exit sensor (PC2).
• The duplex unit transport sensor 1 (PC1) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the exit sensor (PC2) has been unblocked by the media during a switchback sequence.
Detection of media left in exit section
• Exit sensor (PC2) is blocked when the main power switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Relevant electrical parts
Exit sensor (PC2)Duplex unit transport sensor 1 (PC1)
Duplex control board (PWB-A)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1 Initial check items — —
2 PC2 I/O check, sensor check PWB-M CNTH2-8 (ON) C-14
3 PC1 I/O check, sensor check —
4 Change PWB-A — —
5 Change PWB-M — —
13. Jam display Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
194
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
13.4.3 Misfeed at 2nd image transfer section
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Type Description
Detection of misfeed at 2nd image transfer section
• The leading edge of the media does not block the exit sensor (PC2) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the registration roller clutch (CL1) has been energized.
• The registration roller sensor (PC1) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the media.
Detection of media left in 2nd image transfer section
• The registration roller sensor (PC1) is blocked when the main power switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
• The OHP sensor (PC4) is blocked when the main power switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
• The exit sensor (PC2) is blocked when the image transfer belt unit is being cleaned.
Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactiva-tion of sensor
• Registration roller sensor (PC1) does not transmit the media even after the lapse of a given period of time after the media has blocked PC1 at tray 1 feed.
2nd image transfer section loop registration reversing JAM
• Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making loop at front of the registration roller when the sensor at front of the registration roller is blocked at media feed.
Relevant electrical parts
Registration roller sensor (PC1)Exit sensor (PC2)OHP sensor (PC4)Registration roller clutch (CL1)
Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1 Initial check items — —
2 PC1 I/O check, sensor check PWB-M CNSEN-3 (ON) C-3 to 4
3 PC2 I/O check, sensor check PWB-M CNTH2-8 (ON) C-14
4 PC4 I/O check, sensor check PWB-M CNSEN-6 (ON) C-4
5 CL1 operation check PWB-M CNSEN-18 (ON) C-5
6 Change PWB-M — —
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 13. Jam display
195
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
13.4.4 Misfeed at tray 1 media feed section
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Type Description
Detection of misfeed at tray 1 media feed section
• The leading edge of the media does not block the registration roller sensor (PC1) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the tray 1 feed clutch (CL5) has been energized.
Tray 1 media feed section loop regis-tration reversing JAM
• Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making the loop at front of the registration roller at tray 1 feed.
Relevant electrical parts
Registration roller sensor (PC1)Tray 1 feed clutch (CL5)
Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1 Initial check items — —
2 PC1 I/O check, sensor check PWB-M CNSEN-3 (ON) C-3 to 4
3 CL5 operation check PWB-M CNTRY1-2 (ON) C-9
4 Change PWB-M — —
13. Jam display Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
196
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
13.4.5 Misfeed at tray 2 media feed section
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Type Description
Detection of misfeed at tray 2 media feed section
• The leading edge of the media does not block the registration roller sensor (PC1) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the tray 2 media feed clutch (CL2) has been energized.
Tray 2 media feed section loop regis-tration reversing JAM
• Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making the loop at front of the registration roller at tray 2 feed.
Relevant electrical parts
Tray 2 media feed clutch (CL2)Registration roller sensor (PC1)
Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control SignalLocation (electri-cal component)
1 Initial check items — —
2 PC1 I/O check, sensor check PWB-M CNSEN-3 (ON) C-3 to 4
3 CL2 operation check PWB-M CNLP-13 (ON) C-11
4 Change PWB-M — —
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 14. Service call message
197
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
14. Service call message
14.1 Trouble codes
• The printer’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding malfunction code and service call message on the control panel.
14.1.1 Trouble code list
• For the details of the malfunction codes of the options, see the service manual for the corresponding option.
4039F4E511DB
SERVICE CALL C002M MOTOR 2
Code Item Description
0001 Main motor turning at abnormal timing
• The motor lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains sta-tionary.
0018 Color PC drum motor’s failure to turn
• The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning.
0019 Color PC drum motor’s turning at abnormal timing
• The motor lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains sta-tionary.
001A Color developing motor’s failure to turn
• The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning.
001B Color developing motor’s turn-ing at abnormal timing
• The motor lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains sta-tionary.
0040 Suction fan motor’s failure to turn
• The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains sta-tionary.
0043 Cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn
• The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains sta-tionary.
0046 Fusing cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn
• The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains sta-tionary.
0048 Fusing cooling fan motor/2’s failure to turn
• The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains sta-tionary.
004C Ozone ventilation fan motor’s failure to turn
• The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains sta-tionary.
004E Power supply cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn
• The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains sta-tionary.
14. Service call message Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
198
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
004F Cooling fan motor 2’s failure to turn
• The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains sta-tionary.
0094 2nd image transfer roller separation
• The 2nd image transfer pressure position sensor doesn’t turn ON (retracting) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the 2nd image transfer pressure/retraction motor has started rotating during the 2nd image transfer roller is retracting.
• The 2nd image transfer pressure position sensor doesn’t turn OFF (pressuring) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the 2nd image transfer pressure/retraction motor has started rotating during the 2nd image transfer roller is pressuring.
0096 Transfer belt separation • The 1st image transfer pressure/retraction position sen-sor doesn’t turn ON (retracting) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the 1st image transfer pressure/retraction clutch has turned ON during the transfer belt unit is retracting.
• The 1st image transfer pressure/retraction position sen-sor doesn’t turn OFF (pressuring) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the 1st image transfer pres-sure/retraction clutch has turned ON during the transfer belt unit is pressuring.
0301 Polygon motor/C failure to turn • The polygon motor fails to turn stably even after the lapse of a given period of time after activating the polygon motor.
• Motor lock signal detects H for a given period time con-secutively during the polygon motor is rotating.
0302 Polygon motor/M failure to turn
0303 Polygon motor/Y failure to turn
0304 Polygon motor/K failure to turn
0311 Laser malfunction (cyan) • SOS signal is not detected even after the lapse of a given period of time after staring the laser output.
• SOS signal is not detected for a given period of time dur-ing printing or IDC sensor adjustment.
0312 Laser malfunction (magenta)
0313 Laser malfunction (yellow)
0314 Laser malfunction (black)
0500 Heating roller warm-up failure • The heating roller thermistor/1 (TH1) and the heating roller thermistor/2 (TH3) fails to raise a given degree of temperature even after the lapse of a given period of time after the heating roller heater lamp/1 (H1) is turned ON.
• The detected temperature of the heating roller thermistor/1 (TH1) is lower for a given level of degree than one of the fusing pressure roller thermistor/1 (TH2) after the front door is opened or closed, the main power switch is turned ON or TROUBLE RESET is implemented.
• The counter value of zero cross signal input is not updated for a given period of time.
0501 Fusing pressure roller warm-up failure
• The fusing pressure roller thermistor/1 (TH2) fails to raise a given degree of temperature even after the lapse of a given period of time after the fusing pressure heater lamp (H3) is turned ON.
• The detected temperature of the fusing pressure roller thermistor/1 (TH2) is lower for a given level of degree than one of the heating roller thermistor/1 (TH1) after the front door is opened or closed, the main power switch is turned ON or TROUBLE RESET is implemented.
Code Item Description
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 14. Service call message
199
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
0510 Abnormally low heating roller temperature
• The temperature of the heating roller thermistor/1 (TH1) is lower than a given level of degree for 1 second or more uninterruptedly during ready mode, low power mode or printing.
• The temperature of the heating roller thermistor/2 (TH3) is lower than a given level of degree for 1 second or more uninterruptedly during ready mode, low power mode or printing.
0511 Abnormally low fusing pressure roller temperature
• The temperature of the fusing pressure roller thermistor /1 (TH2) is lower than a given level of degree for 1 second or more uninterruptedly during ready mode, low power mode or printing.
0520 Abnormally high heating roller temperature
• The temperatures of the heating roller thermistor/1 (TH1) and the heating roller thermistor/2 (TH3) are higher than a given level of degree for 1 second or more uninterrupt-edly.
• The feater relay is OFF.
0521 Abnormally high fusing pressure roller temperature
• The temperature of the fusing pressure roller thermistor/1 (TH2) is higher than a given level of degree for 1 second or more uninterruptedly before the heater temperature control starts.
• The temperature of the fusing pressure roller thermistor/1 (TH2) is higher than a given level of degree for 1 second or more uninterruptedly after the heater temperature con-trol starts.
0900 Tray 4 elevator failure See P.33 of the lower feeder unit service manual.
0910 Tray 3 elevator failure
0950 Tray 5 elevator failure
0960 Manual tray rise descent error • The bypass lift-up sensor is not blocked even when the tray 2 vertical transport motor has turned for a given number of pulses after the sequence to move the media lifting plate from the standby position to the feed position was started.
• The bypass lift-up sensor is not unblocked even when the tray 2 vertical transport motor has turned for a given number of pulses after the sequence to move the media lifting plate from the feed position to the standby position was started.
0F30 Abnormally low toner density detected cyan TCR sensor
• TC ratio in the developing machine, which is determined by toner replenishing amount control mechanism, is 5 % or less for a given number of times consecutively.
0F31 Abnormally high toner density detected cyan TCR sensor
• TC ratio in the developing machine, which is determined by toner replenishing amount control mechanism, is 12 % or more for a given number of times consecutively.
0F32 Abnormally low toner density detected magenta TCR sensor
• TC ratio in the developing machine, which is determined by toner replenishing amount control mechanism, is 5 % or less for a given number of times consecutively.
0F33 Abnormally high toner density detected magenta TCR sensor
• TC ratio in the developing machine, which is determined by toner replenishing amount control mechanism, is 12 % or more for a given number of times consecutively.
Code Item Description
1
14. Service call message Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
200
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
0F34 Abnormally low toner density detected yellow TCR sensor
• TC ratio in the developing machine, which is determined by toner replenishing amount control mechanism, is 5 % or less for a given number of times consecutively.
0F35 Abnormally high toner density detected yellow TCR sensor
• TC ratio in the developing machine, which is determined by toner replenishing amount control mechanism, is 12 % or more for a given number of times consecutively.
0F36 Abnormally low toner density detected black TCR sensor
• TC ratio in the developing machine, which is determined by toner replenishing amount control mechanism, is 4 % or less for a given number of times consecutively.
0F37 Abnormally high toner density detected black TCR sensor
• TC ratio in the developing machine, which is determined by toner replenishing amount control mechanism, is 12 % or more for a given number of times consecutively.
0F3A Cyan TCR sensor adjustment failure
• TCR sensor automatic adjustment does not function properly, failing to adjust to an appropriate value.
0F3B Magenta TCR sensor adjustment failure
0F3C Yellow TCR sensor adjustment failure
0F3D Black TCR sensor adjustment failure
13B0 RTC failure • When correct access to the RTC board is failed during access.
13C8 Transfer unit new article release • A new installation is not detected when a new transfer cleaner unit (transfer belt unit) is installed.
13CA Fusing unit new article release • A new installation is not detected when a new fusing unit is installed.
13D0 Trouble related to security • Contact the responsible people of KONICA MINOLTA before taking some countermeasures.
13D1 Cyan imaging unit EEPROM access error
• The re-written data, which has been read out, checked and founded as error, is read out again and found as error.
• The error was found when reading out the counter value.13D2 Magenta imaging unit EEPROM
access error
13D3 Yellow imaging unit EEPROM access error
13D4 Black imaging unit EEPROM access error
13D9 Cyan Toner Cartridge EEPROM access error
• The re-written data, which has been read out, checked and founded as error, is read out again and found as error.
• The error was found when reading out the counter value.13DA Magenta toner cartridge
EEPROM access error
13DB Yellow toner cartridge EEPROM access error
13DC Black toner cartridge EEPROM access error
13E2 Flash ROM write error • Flash ROM writing is found faulty during a check.
3000 Main motor's failure to turn • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning.
C002 RAM (standard) error at startup • RAM error at standard memory is detected during printer start-up.
Code Item Description
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 14. Service call message
201
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
*1: After a trouble occurred, an automatic format will be carried out when restarting the printer.
14.2 How to reset
• To reset a malfunction, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.
C003 RAM (option) error at startup • RAM error at extension memory is detected during printer start-up.
C013 MAC address error at startup (MAC address is invalid)
• Invalid MAC address is detected during printer start-up.
C015 Boot ROM error at startup • Boot ROM error is detected during printer start-up.
C022 NVRAM access error • Correct access to NVRAM is failed during the printer starting.
C025 Controller ROM error • Lead error of destination setting file is detected during the printer starting.
C026 • Flash ROM access error is detected during the printer starting.
C027 • Final check sum error is detected during the printer start-ing.
C050 HDD access error • When correct access to the hard disk kit is failed during access.
C051*1
HDD full error • Range for user space is full during access to the hard disk kit.
C052 Compact flash access error • When correct access to the compact flash is failed during access.
C053*1
Compact flash full error • Range for user space is full during access to the compact flash.
C054 Compact flash uninstallation • Compact flash is not installed while accessing to the compact flash.
C060 Firmware update error • Firmware update fails to complete correctly during update.
C061 Hold job error/no duplex unit • The duplex option is not installed, but it is required for printing the job held in the HDD.
C062 Hold job error/no tray 3 • Tray 3 is not set when the tray 3 is required for printing of the job hold in HDD.
C063 Hold job error/no tray 4 • Tray 4 is not set when the tray 4 is required for printing of the job hold in HDD.
C064 Hold job error/no memory • Expansion memory is not set when the expansion mem-ory is required for printing of the job hold in HDD.
C065 Hold job error/no tray 5 • Tray 5 is not set when the tray 5 is required for printing of the job hold in HDD.
FFFF Interface communication error • Correct communication is failed when receiving/sending the command between PWB-A and PWB-P.
Code Item Description
14. Service call message Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
202
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
14.3 Solution
14.3.1 0001: Main motor turning at abnormal timing
14.3.2 0018: Color PC drum motor’s failure to turn
14.3.3 0019: Color PC drum motor’s turning at abnormal timing
Relevant electrical parts
Main motor (M1) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)DC power supply (PU1)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1 M1 operation checkPWB-M CNDM1-5 (REM)PWB-M CNDM1-8 (LOCK)
K to L-2
2 Change PWB-M — —
3 Change PU1 — —
Relevant electrical parts
Color PC drum motor (M2) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
2Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.
— —
3Check the PWB-M connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
4 M2 operation checkPWB-M CNDM3-5 (REM)PWB-M CNDM3-8 (LOCK)
C-23
5 Change PWB-M — —
Relevant electrical parts
Color PC drum motor (M2) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1 M2 operation checkPWB-M CNDM3-5 (REM)PWB-M CNDM3-8 (LOCK)
C-23
2 Change PWB-M — —
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 14. Service call message
203
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
14.3.4 001A: Color developing motor’s failure to turn
14.3.5 001B: Color developing motor’s turning at abnormal timing
14.3.6 0040: Suction fan motor’s failure to turn
Relevant electrical parts
Color developing motor (M3) DC power supply (PU1)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
2Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.
— —
3Check the PU1 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
4Check the PWB-M connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
5 M3 operation checkPWB-M CNDM2-5 (REM)PWB-M CNDM2-8 (LOCK)
C-22
6 Change PU1 — —
7 Change PWB-M — —
Relevant electrical parts
Color developing motor (M3) DC power supply (PU1)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1 M3 operation check PWB-M CNDM2-5 (REM)PWB-M CNDM2-8 (LOCK)
C-22
2 Change PU1 — —
3 Change PWB-M — —
Relevant electrical parts
Mechanical control board (PWB-M) Right door assy
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
2 Change the right door assy — —
3 Change PWB-M — —
14. Service call message Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
204
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
14.3.7 0043: Cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn
14.3.8 0046: Fusing cooling fan motor /1’s failure to turn
14.3.9 0048: Fusing cooling fan motor /2’s failure to turn
Relevant electrical parts
Cooling fan motor/1 (M12) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
2Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.
— —
3 M12 operation checkPWB-M CNDM2-15 (ON)
PWB-M CNDM2-16 (LOCK)C-22
4 Change PWB-M — —
Relevant electrical parts
Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (M11) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
2Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.
— —
3 M11 operation checkPWB-M CNDM1-12 (ON)
PWB-M CNDM1-14 (LOCK)K to L-1 to 2
4 Change PWB-M — —
Relevant electrical parts
Fusing cooling fan motor/2 (M13) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
2Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.
— —
3 M13 operation checkPWB-M CNDM1-14 (ON)
PWB-M CNDM1-17 (LOCK)K to L-1
4 Change PWB-M — —
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 14. Service call message
205
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
14.3.10 004C: Ozone ventilation fan motor’s failure to turn
14.3.11 004E: Power supply cooling fan motor’s failure to turn
14.3.12 004F: Cooling fan motor 2’s failure to turn
Relevant electrical parts
Ozone ventilation fan motor (M14) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
2Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.
— —
3 M14 operation checkPWB-M CNLP-9 (ON)
PWB-M CNLP-11 (LOCK)C-11
4 Change PWB-M — —
Relevant electrical parts
Power supply cooling fan motor/1 (M8) DC power supply (PU1)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
2Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.
— —
3 M8 operation checkPWB-M CNLV3-2 (ON)
PWB-M CNLV3-3 (LOCK)C-27
4 Change PU1 — —
Relevant electrical parts
Cooling fan motor/2 (M22) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
2Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.
— —
3 M22 operation checkPWB-M CNR2FAN-4 (ON)
PWB-M CNR2FAN-6 (LOCK)L-22
4 Change PWB-M — —
14. Service call message Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
206
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
14.3.13 0094: 2nd image transfer roller separation
14.3.14 0096: Transfer belt separation
Relevant electrical parts
Mechanical control board (PWB-M) Right door assy
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
2 Change the right door assy — —
3 Change PWB-M — —
Relevant electrical parts
1st image transfer pressure/retraction position sensor (PC6)1st image transfer pressure/retraction clutch (CL3)
Main motor (M1)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Check the M1 connector for proper connec-tion and correct as necessary.
— —
2 PC6 I/O check, sensor check — —
3 CL3 operation check PWB-M CNDM1-11 (ON) K to L-2
4 M1 operation checkPWB-M CNDM1-5 (REM)PWB-M CNDM1-8 (LOCK)
K to L-2
5 Change PWB-M — —
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 14. Service call message
207
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
14.3.15 0301: Polygon motor/C failure to turn
14.3.16 0302: Polygon motor/M failure to turn
14.3.17 0303: Polygon motor/Y failure to turn
14.3.18 0304: Polygon motor/K failure to turn
14.3.19 0311: Laser malfunction (cyan)
14.3.20 0312: Laser malfunction (magenta)
14.3.21 0313: Laser malfunction (yellow)
14.3.22 0314: Laser malfunction (black)
Relevant electrical parts
PH unit PH interface board (PWB-D)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Check the connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
2 Change PH unit — —
3 Change PWB-D — —
4 Change PWB-M — —
Relevant electrical parts
PH unit PH interface board (PWB-D)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Check the connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
2 Change PH unit — —
3 Change PWB-D — —
4 Change PWB-M — —
14. Service call message Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
208
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
14.3.23 0500: Heating roller warm-up failure
14.3.24 0501: Fusing pressure roller warm-up failure
14.3.25 0510: Abnormally low heating roller temperature
14.3.26 0511: Abnormally low fusing pressure roller temperature
14.3.27 0520: Abnormally high heating roller temperature
14.3.28 0521: Abnormally high fusing pressure roller temperature
14.3.29 0960: Manual tray rise descent error
Relevant electrical parts
Fusing unit DC power supply (PU1)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it is secured in position).
— —
2Check the fusing unit, PWB-M and PU1 for proper connection and correct or change as necessary.
— —
3 Change fusing unit — —
4 Change PWB-M — —
5 Change PU1 — —
Relevant electrical parts
Tray 1 lift-up sensor (PC14)Vertical transport motor (M2)
Control board (PWB-Z)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Check the M2 connector for proper connec-tion and correct as necessary.
— —
2Check the connector of M2 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.
— —
3 PC14 I/O check, sensor check PWB-M CNTRY1-10 (ON) C-10
4 M2 operation check PWB-Z PJ5Z PC-5 to 8 Q-22
5 Change PWB-Z — —
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 14. Service call message
209
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
14.3.30 0F30: Abnormally low toner density detected cyan TCR sensor
14.3.31 0F32: Abnormally low toner density detected magenta TCR sensor
14.3.32 0F34: Abnormally low toner density detected yellow TCR sensor
14.3.33 0F31: Abnormally high toner density detected cyan TCR sensor
14.3.34 0F33: Abnormally high toner density detected magenta TCR sensor
14.3.35 0F35: Abnormally high toner density detected yellow TCR sensor
Relevant electrical parts
Imaging unit /CImaging unit /MImaging unit /YToner supply motor C/K (M6)Toner supply motor Y/M (M7)
Mechanical control board (PWB-M)Controller board (PWB-P)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Perform image troubleshooting procedure if image density is low.
— —
2Clean the TCR sensor window on the underside of the imaging unit if dirty
— —
3 M6, M7 operation checkPWB-M CNDM2-10 to 13 (M6)PWB-M CNDM3-10 to 13 (M7)
C-22C-23
4 Reinstall imaging unit — —
5 Change imaging unit — —
6 Change PWB-M — —
7 Change PWB-P. — —
Relevant electrical parts
Imaging unit /CImaging unit /MImaging unit /Y
Mechanical control board (PWB-M)Controller board (PWB-P)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Clean the TCR sensor window on the underside of the imaging unit if dirty
— —
2 Reinstall imaging unit — —
3 Change imaging unit — —
4 Change PWB-M — —
5 Change PWB-P — —
14. Service call message Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
210
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
14.3.36 0F36: Abnormally low toner density detected black TCR sensor
14.3.37 0F37: Abnormally high toner density detected black TCR sensor
Relevant electrical parts
Imaging unit /KToner supply motor C/K (M7)
Mechanical control board (PWB-M)Controller board (PWB-P)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Perform image troubleshooting procedure if image density is low.
— —
2Clean the TCR sensor window on the underside of the imaging unit if dirty
— —
3 M7 operation check PWB-M CNDM3-10 to 13 C-23
4 Reinstall imaging unit — —
5 Change imaging unit /K — —
6 Change PWB-M — —
7 Change PWB-P — —
Relevant electrical parts
Imaging unit /K Mechanical control board (PWB-M)Controller board (PWB-P)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Correct the TCR connection on the underside of the imaging unit if faulty.
— —
2 Reinstall imaging unit — —
3 Change imaging unit — —
4 Change PWB-M — —
5 Change PWB-P — —
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 14. Service call message
211
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
14.3.38 0F3A: Cyan TCR sensor adjustment failure
14.3.39 0F3B: Magenta TCR sensor adjustment failure
14.3.40 0F3C: Yellow TCR sensor adjustment failure
14.3.41 0F3D: Black TCR sensor adjustment failure
Relevant electrical parts
Imaging unit /CImaging unit /MImaging unit /YToner supply motor Y/M (M6)Toner supply motor C/K (M7)
Mechanical control board (PWB-M)Controller board (PWB-P)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Clean the TCR sensor window on the underside of the imaging unit if dirty
— —
2 M6, M7 operation checkPWB-M CNDM2-10 to 13 (M6)PWB-M CNDM3-10 to 13 (M7)
C-22C-23
3 Reinstall imaging unit — —
4 Change imaging unit — —
5 Change PWB-M — —
6 Change PWB-P — —
Relevant electrical parts
Imaging unit /KToner supply motor C/K (M7)
Mechanical control board (PWB-M)Controller board (PWB-P)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Clean or correct each contact of the imaging unit if faulty.
— —
2 M7 operation check PWB-M CNDM3-10 to 13 C-23
3 Reinstall imaging unit /K — —
4 Change imaging unit /K — —
5 Change PWB-M — —
6 Change PWB-P — —
14. Service call message Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
212
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
14.3.42 13B0: RTC failure
14.3.43 13C8: Transfer unit new article release
14.3.44 13CA: Fusing unit new article release
Relevant electrical parts
RTC board (PWB-R) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Check the connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
2 Change PWB-R — —
3 Change PWB-M — —
Relevant electrical parts
Mechanical bontrol board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1 Reinstall unit — —
2 Change PWB-M — —
Relevant electrical parts
Fusing unit Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it is secured in position).
— —
2Check the fusing unit, PWB-M for proper connection and correct or change as nec-essary.
— —
3 Reinstall fusing unit — —
4 Change fusing unit — —
5 Change PWB-M — —
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 14. Service call message
213
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
14.3.45 13D1: Cyan imaging unit EEPROM access error
14.3.46 13D2: Magenta imaging unit EEPROM access error
14.3.47 13D3: Yellow imaging unit EEPROM access error
14.3.48 13D4: Black imaging unit EEPROM access error
14.3.49 13D9: Cyan toner cartridge EEPROM access error
14.3.50 13DA: Yellow toner cartridge EEPROM access error
14.3.51 13DB: Magenta toner cartridge EEPROM access error
14.3.52 13DC: Black toner cartridge EEPROM access error
Relevant electrical parts
Imaging unit CImaging unit MImaging unit YImaging unit K
Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Clean the connection between the imaging unit and the machine if dirty
— —
2 Reinstall imaging unit — —
3 Change imaging unit — —
4 Change PWB-M — —
Relevant electrical parts
Toner cartridge CToner cartridge MToner cartridge YToner cartridge K
Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Clean the connection between the toner cartridge and the machine if dirty
— —
2 Reinstall toner cartridge — —
3 Change toner cartridge — —
4 Change PWB-M — —
14. Service call message Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
214
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
14.3.53 13E2: Flash ROM write error
14.3.54 3000: Main motor’s failure to turn
14.3.55 C002: RAM (standard) error at startup
14.3.56 C003: RAM (option) error at startup
Relevant electrical parts
Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1 Change PWB-M. — —
Relevant electrical parts
Main motor (M1) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)DC power supply (PU1)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Check the M1 connector for proper connec-tion and correct as necessary.
— —
2Check M1 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.
— —
3Check the PWB-M connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
4 M1 operation checkPWB-M CNDM1-5 (REM)PWB-M CNDM1-8 (LOCK)
K to L-2
5 Change PWB-M — —
6 Change PU1 — —
Relevant electrical parts
Controller board (PWB-P) Extension memory
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Turn OFF the main power switch of the printer and turn it ON again (Restart of the printer.)
— —
2Check connection state of the extension memory and correct as necessary.
— —
3Check the PWB-P connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
4 Change the extension memory. — —
5 Change PWB-P — —
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 14. Service call message
215
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
14.3.57 C013: MAC address error
14.3.58 C015: BOOT ROM error
14.3.59 C022: NVRAM error
14.3.60 C025, C026, C027: Controller ROM error
Relevant electrical parts
Controller board (PWB-P)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Turn OFF the main power switch of the printer and turn it ON again (Restart of the printer.)
— —
2Check the PWB-P connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
3 Change PWB-P — —
Relevant electrical parts
Controller board (PWB-P)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Turn OFF the main power switch of the printer and turn it ON again (Restart of the printer.)
— —
2Check the PWB-P connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
3If this error message is displayed after update of firmware, conduct the firmware update procedures again.
— —
4 Change PWB-P — —
14. Service call message Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
216
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
14.3.61 C050: Hard disk access error
14.3.62 C051: Hard disk full error
Relevant electrical parts
Controller board (PWB-P) Hard disk kit (HDD)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Turn OFF the main power switch of the printer and turn it ON again (Restart of the printer.)
— —
2Check the HDD connector for proper con-nection and correct as necessary.
— —
3Check the PWB-P connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
4 Change HDD — —
5 Change PWB-P — —
Relevant electrical parts
Controller board (PWB-P) Hard disk kit (HDD)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Turn OFF the main power switch of the printer and turn it ON again (Restart of the printer.)
— —
2Check the HDD connector for proper con-nection and correct as necessary.
— —
3 Change HDD — —
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 14. Service call message
217
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
14.3.63 C052: Compact flash access error
14.3.64 C053: Compact flash full error
Relevant electrical parts
Controller board (PWB-P) Compact flash
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Turn OFF the main power switch of the printer and turn it ON again (Restart of the printer.)
— —
2Check the compact flash for proper con-nection and correct as necessary.
— —
3Check the PWB-P connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
4 Change compact flash. — —
5 Change PWB-P — —
Relevant electrical parts
Controller board (PWB-P) Compact flash
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Turn OFF the main power switch of the printer and turn it ON again (Restart of the printer.)
— —
2Check the compact flash for proper con-nection and correct as necessary.
— —
3 Change compact flash. — —
14. Service call message Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
218
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
14.3.65 C054: Compact flash uninstallation
14.3.66 C060: Firmware update error
Relevant electrical parts
Controller board (PWB-P) Compact flash
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Turn OFF the main power switch of the printer and turn it ON again (Restart of the printer.)
— —
2Check the compact flash for proper con-nection and correct as necessary.
— —
3Check the PWB-P connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
4 Change compact flash — —
5 Change PWB-P — —
Relevant electrical parts
Controller board (PWB-P)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Turn OFF the main power switch of the printer and turn it ON again (Restart of the printer.)
— —
2Check the cable that has been used for update of the firmware for proper connec-tion and correct as necessary.
— —
3Check the frmware data and correct as necessary.
— —
4 Update the firmware again. — —
5Check the PWB-P connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
6 Change PWB-P — —
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 14. Service call message
219
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
14.3.67 C061: Hold job error/no duplex unit
14.3.68 C062: Hold job error/no tray 3
14.3.69 C063: Hold job error/no tray 4
14.3.70 C064: Hold job error/no memory
14.3.71 C065: Hold job error/no tray5
14.3.72 FFFF: Interface communication error
Relevant electrical parts
Controller board (PWB-P) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Turn OFF the main power switch of the printer and turn it ON again (Restart of the printer.)
— —
2Return to the same state as the device configuration when job was held.
— —
3Check the options that are mounted on the printer for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
4Check the PWB-M connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
5Delete the job hold in [PROOF/PRINT MENU].
— —
Relevant electrical parts
Print control board (PWB-P) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Turn OFF the main power switch of the printer and turn it ON again (Restart of the printer.)
— —
2Check the PWB-P connector for proper connection and correct as necessary
— —
3Check the PWB-M connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
— —
4Change the cable which the PWB-M and the PWB-P are connected to.
— —
5 Change PWB-M. — —
15. Power supply trouble Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
220
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
15. Power supply trouble
15.1 Machine is not energized at all (PU1 operation check)
Relevant electrical parts
Main power switch (S1)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
DC power supply (PU1)
Step Check itemWIRING
DIAGRAM (Location)
Result Action
1 Is a power voltage supplied across CN1PU1-1 and 2 on PU1?
S to T-2 NO Check the wiring from the wall outlet to S1 CN1PU1.
2 Are the fuses on PU1 conducting ? — NO Change PU1.
3 Is DC3.3 V being output from CN6PU1-1 on PU1?
R-4 NO Change PU1.
4 Is “Low” being output from CN7PU1-2 on PU1?
R-5 NO Check the wiring from the PWB-P to PWB-M to CN1PU1.
5 Is DC24 V being output from CN5PU1-2 on PU1?
R-6 NO Change PU1.
6 Is DC5 V being input to CN5PU1-3 on PU1? R-4 NO Change PU1.
5 Is DC5 V being input to CNPOW-2 on the Control Board? (LED on PWB-M does not blink.)
I-6 NO Change PU1.
YES Change PWB-M
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 15. Power supply trouble
221
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
15.2 Control panel indicators do not light.
15.3 Fusing heaters do not operate
Relevant electrical parts
Controller board (PWB-P)Control panel (PWB-OP)
DC power supply (PU1)
Step Check itemWIRING
DIAGRAM (Location)
Result Action
1 Is a power voltage being applied across CN1PU1-1 and 2 on PU1 ?
S to T-2 NO Check the wiring from the wall outlet to S1 to CN1PU1.
2 Is the fuse on PU1 conducting ? — NO Change PU1.
3 Is DC3.3 V being output from CN6PU1-1 on PU1?
R-4 NO Change PU1.
4 Is “Low” being output from CN7PU1-2 on PU1?
R-5 NO Check the wiring from the PWB-P to PWB-M to CN1PU1.
5 Is DC5 V being output from CN6PU1-2 on PU1?
R-4 NO Change PU1.
6 Is J22P on PWB-P securely connected ? T-10 NO Reconnect.Check the wiring from the PWB-P to PWB-M.
7 Is CN20P on PWB-OP securely connected ?
V to W-10 NO Reconnect.
YES Change PWB-OP.Change PWB-P.
Relevant electrical parts
Primary interlock switch (S2)Fusing unit
DC power supply (PU1)
Step Check itemWIRING
DIAGRAM (Location)
Result Action
1 Is the power source voltage applied across CN2PU1-1 to 2 on PU1 ?During this time, the right door should be closed.
S to T-2 NO Check wiring from power outlet to S2 to CN2PU1.
2 Is the power source voltage applied across CN30-1 and 3, or across 2 and 3 ?
U-6 YES Fusing unit
NO Change PU1.
15. Power supply trouble Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
222
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
15.4 Power is not supplied to option
15.4.1 Optional lower feeder unit
15.4.2 Power is not supplied to duplex option
Step Check itemWIRING
DIAGRAM (Location)
Result Action
1 Is DC24 V being applied to hookup connec-tor CN44-2 ?
O-21 NO Malfunction in lower feeder unit
2 Is DC24 V being output from CNCST-2 on PWB-M ?
I-21 NO Check wiring from PWB-M to CN44 to lower feeder unit.
3 Is DC24 V being output from CN5PU1-2 on PU1 ?
— YES Change PU1.
NO Malfunction in lower feeder unit
Step Check itemWIRING
DIAGRAM (Location)
Result Action
1 Is DC24 V being output from CN19-2 on Duplex ?
O-19 NO Malfunction in duplex option.
2 Is DC24 V being output from CNDUP-2 on PWB-M ?
I-19 NO Check wiring from PWB-M to CN19 to duplex.
3 Is DC24 V being output from CNCOP-3 on PWB-M ?
— YES Change PU1.
NO Malfunction in duplex option.
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 16. Image quality problem
223
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16. Image quality problem
16.1 How to read element date
• Utilize the element data which is output by selecting [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [PRINT MENU] → [ELEMENT PAGE] on the SERVICE MENU to specify the cause for the trou-ble.
• For details on element data for each item, see “Adjustment/Setting.”See P.174
4039F4C503DB
Engine Element Data Information
Product Name : magicolor7450
Printer Name : MC7450-******
CONTROLLER F/W : 403930G0080100 (US)
403950G0010001 (US)
403999G0010000
321700001
0x10
ENGINE F/W :
BOOT F/W :
SERIAL NUMBER :
ENGINE OEM CODE :
DATE : 07.04.2008
03:07TIME :
Element Data
INSIDE HUMIDITY 44%
0x1555
0x1c23
0x0c00
0x0100
0x03a0
0x000d
4.62V
4.14V
8.31%
8.54%
8.57%
8.20%
545V
505V
455V
403V
436V
417V
363V
307V
43
41
171 C
171 C
33 C
16g/cm3ABSOLUTE HUMIDITY
INSIDE TEMPERATURE
SENSOR INFORMATION1
SENSOR INFORMATION2
SENSOR INFORMATION3
SENSOR INFORMATION4
SENSOR INFORMATION5
SENSOR INFORMATION6
FUSER HEATER1 TEMPERATURE
FUSER HEATER2 TEMPERATURE
IDC REGIST SENSOR1
IDC REGIST SENSOR2
TCR SENSOR C
TCR SENSOR M
TCR SENSOR Y
TCR SENSOR K
VG VOLT C
VG VOLT M
VG VOLT Y
VG VOLT K
VB VOLT C
VB VOLT M
VB VOLT Y
VB VOLT K
IDC BASE REFLECTION1
IDC BASE REFLECTION2
THICKSTOCK VG VOLT C 544V
403V
436V
417V
363V
307V
403V
403V
307V
307V
307V
307V
+783V
+937V
-4
+2
1
403V
403V
455V
504VTHICKSTOCK VG VOLT M
THICKSTOCK VG VOLT Y
THICKSTOCK VG VOLT K
THICKSTOCK VB VOLT C
THICKSTOCK VB VOLT M
THICKSTOCK VB VOLT Y
THICKSTOCK VB VOLT K
MONOCHROME VG VOLT C
MONOCHROME VG VOLT M
MONOCHROME VG VOLT Y
MONOCHROME VG VOLT K
MONOCHROME VB VOLT C
MONOCHROME VB VOLT M
MONOCHROME VB VOLT Y
MONOCHROME VB VOLT K
TRANS CURRENT1
TRANS CURRENT2
REGIST SKEW C
REGIST SKEW M
REGIST SKEW Y
16. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
224
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.2 How to identify problematic part
• This chapter is divided into two parts: “Initial check items” and “Solution.”• When an image quality problem occurs, first go through the “Initial check items” and, if
the cause is yet to be identified, go to “Solution.”
16.2.1 Initial check items
• Let the machine produce a test print and determine whether the image problem occurs in a specific mono color or four colors
• Evaluation procedure
4039F4C505DB
4 colors
Mono color
Image problem
Action Result Cause Next step
Lines, bands From [Service Menu], select [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [PRINT MENU] → [GRADATION], and produce a test print. Is image problem evident in each of all four colors?
YES 4 colors P.239
NO Mono color P.225
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 16. Image quality problem
225
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3 Solution
16.3.1 Monocolor: white lines, white bands, colored lines, colored bands in sub scan direction
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C507DA
White lines in sub scan direction
White bands in sub scan direction
Colored lines in sub scan direction
Colored bands in sub scan direction
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Imaging unit The surface of the PC drum is scratched.
YES Change imaging unit.
2 Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
3 Contact terminals make good con-nection between each IU and machine.
NO Clean contact terminals.
4 Developing bias contact terminal makes good connection.
NO Clean contact terminal and check ter-minal position.
5 PH unit The surface of the PH window is dirty.
YES Clean with cleaning jig.
6 The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5.
NO Change imaging unit.→ Change transfer belt unit.→ Change PH unit.
16. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
226
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.2 Monocolor: white lines, white bands, colored lines, colored bands in main scan direction
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C508DA
White lines in main scan direction
White bands in main scan direction
Colored lines in main scan direction
Colored bands in main scan direction
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Imaging unit The surface of the PC drum is scratched.
YES Change imaging unit.
2 Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
3 Contact terminals make good con-nection between each IU and machine.
NO Clean contact terminals.
4 Developing bias contact terminal makes good connection.
NO Clean contact terminal and check ter-minal position.
5 PH unit The surface of the PH window is dirty.
YES Clean with cleaning jig.
6 The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 6.
NO Change imaging unit.→ Change transfer belt unit.→ Change PH unit.
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 16. Image quality problem
227
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.3 Monocolor: uneven density in sub scan direction
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
1
A02EF4C521DA
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 High image density original
Uneven density in sub scan direc-tion occurs at a pitch of 40 mm to 50 mm when a multi-print cycle is run using an original with high image density (50% or more).
YES Feed 10 to 20 blank sheets of media with no originals placed, as the IU fails to keep up with a high demand for toner.
2 Imaging unit The surface of the PC drum is scratched.
YES Change imaging unit.
3 Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
4 PH unit The surface of the PH window is dirty.
YES Clean with cleaning jig.
5 Transfer belt unit
Cam gear operates properly. NO Change transfer belt unit.
6 The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5.
NO Change IU.→ Change PH unit.→ Change controller board.→ Change high voltage unit (Image transfer, neutralizing).
16. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
228
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.4 Monocolor: uneven density in main scan direction
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
1
A02EF4C520DA
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Imaging unit The surface of the PC drum is scratched.
YES Change imaging unit.
2 Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
3 PH unit The surface of the PH window is dirty.
YES Clean with cleaning jig.
4 Transfer belt unit Transfer belt makes positive contact with plates on rails.
NO Check and correct contacts.
5 Cam gear operates properly. NO Change transfer belt unit.
6 The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5.
NO Change imaging unit.→ Change PH unit.→ Change high voltage unit(Image transfer, neutralizing).
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 16. Image quality problem
229
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.5 Monocolor: low image density
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C516DA
ABCDEABCDEABCDEABCDEABCDE
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 [SERVICE MENU] →[DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [PRINT MENU] → [ELEMENT PAGE]
Check data for Vg and Vdc.Color Vdc: Around 400 V
Vg : Around 500 VBlack Vdc: Around 400 V
Vg : Around 500 V
NO Go to next step.
2 Check TCR data. NO Go to next step.
3 IDC output value is around 4.3 V.
NO Clean IDC sensor.Check transfer belt unit for damage.
4 Element data check results
Low TCR and low Vg and Vdc
YES Go to step 8.
5 Low TCR and high Vg and Vdc
YES Go to step 13.
6 TCR falling within specified range and low Vg and Vdc
YES Go to step 8.
7 TCR falling within specified range and high Vg and Vdc
YES Go to step 13.
8 Imaging unit Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
9 PH unit The surface of the PH win-dow is dirty.
YES Clean with cleaning jig.
10 TCR sensor window The color TCR sensor win-dow on the LED assy is dirty.
YES Clean.
11 Transfer belt unit Transfer belt makes positive contact with plates on rails.
NO Check and correct contacts.
12 Cam gear operates properly. NO Change transfer belt unit.
13 Hopper unit Connectors are loose. YES Reconnect.
14 Gear is cracked. YES Change gear.
15 [SERVICE MENU] →[DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [FUNCTION MENU] → [TONER REPLENISH]
Toner is properly supplied when TONER REPLENISH is run.
NO Go to next step.
16. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
230
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16 [SERVICE MENU] →[ALIGNMENT] → [MAXIMUM DENSITY]
The problem has been elimi-nated through the adjust of MAXIMUM DENSITY.
NO Go to next step.
17 The problem has been elimi-nated through the checks of steps up to 16.
NO Change imaging unit.→ Change controller board→ Change PH unit.→ Change high voltage unit (Image transfer, neutralizing).
Step Section Check Item Result Action
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 16. Image quality problem
231
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.6 Monocolor: gradation reproduction failure
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C522DA
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Imaging unit Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
2 PH unit The surface of the PH win-dow is dirty.
YES Clean with cleaning jig.
3 TCR Sensor window TCR sensor window is dirty. YES Clean.
4 [SERVICE MENU] →[DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [PRINT MENU] → [ELEMENT PAGE]
IDC output value is around 4.3 V.
NO Clean IDC sensor. Check transfer belt unit for damage.
5 [SERVICE MENU] →[ALIGNMENT] → [MAXIMUM DENSITY]
The problem has been elimi-nated through the adjust of MAXIMUM DENSITY.
NO Go to next step.
6 The problem has been elimi-nated through the checks of steps up to 5.
NO Change imaging unit.→ Change controller board→ Change PH unit.→ Change high voltage unit (Image transfer, neutralizing).
16. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
232
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.7 Monocolor: foggy background
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C510DA
ABCDABCDABCDABCDABCD
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 [SERVICE MENU] →[DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [PRINT MENU] → [ELEMENT PAGE]
Check data for Vg and Vb.Color Vdc: Around 400 V
Vg : Around 500 VBlack Vdc: Around 400 V
Vg : Around 500 V
NO Go to next step.
2 Check TCR data. NO Go to next step.
3 IDC output value is around 4.3 V.
NO Clean IDC sensor.Check transfer belt unit for damage.
4 Element data check results
Low TCR and low Vg and Vdc
YES Go to step 8.
5 Low TCR and high Vg and Vdc
YES Go to step 11.
6 TCR falling within specified range and low Vg and Vdc
YES Go to step 8.
7 TCR falling within specified range and high Vg and Vdc
YES Go to step 11.
8 Imaging unit Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
9 PH unit The surface of the PH win-dow is dirty.
YES Clean with cleaning jig.
10 TCR sensor window The color TCR Sensor win-dow is dirty.
YES Clean.
11 [SERVICE MENU] →[ALIGNMENT] → [ELECTRIFICATION]
The problem is eliminated after ELECTRIFICATION has been adjusted.
NO Go to next step.
12 [SERVICE MENU] →[ALIGNMENT] → [MAXIMUM DENSITY]
The problem has been elimi-nated through the adjust of MAXIMUM DENSITY.
NO Go to next step.
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 16. Image quality problem
233
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
13 The problem has been elimi-nated through the checks of steps up to 12.
NO Change imaging unit.→ Change controller board→ Change PH unit.→ Change high voltage unit (Image transfer, neutralizing).
Step Section Check Item Result Action
16. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
234
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.8 Monocolor: void areas, white spots
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C523DA
Void areas White spots
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Image check There are void areas at the front side or high density section.
YES See P.229
2 There is void area at the rear side section.
YES Perform [TRANSFER POWER]/[1’ST TRANSFER] under Service Menu.
3 Imaging unit The surface of the PC drum is scratched.
YES Change imaging unit.
4 Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
5 Toner cartridge Foreign matter or caked toner in the toner cartridge.
YES Remove foreign matter.
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 16. Image quality problem
235
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.9 Monocolor: colored spots
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C524DA
AAAA
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Imaging unit Developing bias contact ter-minal makes good connec-tion.
NO Clean contact terminal and check terminal position.
2 The surface of the PC drum is scratched.
YES Change imaging unit.
3 Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
16. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
236
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.10 Monocolor: blurred image
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C511DA
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 PH unit The surface of the PH win-dow is dirty.
YES Clean with cleaning jig.
2 Imaging unit Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
3 The problem has been elimi-nated through the checks of steps up to 2.
NO Change imaging unit.→ Change PH unit.
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 16. Image quality problem
237
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.11 Monocolor: blank print, black print
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C518DA
Blank print Black print
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Image check A blank print occurs. YES Check PH unit connector for proper connection.
2 Imaging unit Coupling of IU drive mecha-nism is installed properly.
NO Check and correct drive trans-mitting coupling. Change IU.
3 The PC drum charge corona voltage contact or PC drum ground contact of the imag-ing unit is connected prop-erly.
NO Check, clean, or correct the contact.
4 High voltage unit (Image transfer, neutralizing)
Connector is connected properly.
NO Reconnect.
5 The problem has been elimi-nated through the check of step 4.
NO Change high voltage unit (Image transfer, neutralizing).→ Change controller board→ Change PH unit.
16. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
238
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.12 Monocolor: uneven image
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C525DA
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Toner cartridge The toner cartridge of every color is surely installed.
NO Re-install it.
2 PH unit The PH unit is surely installed.
NO Re-install it.
3 Uneven pitch occurs in 3.0 mm pitch.
YES Replace the PH unit holder.
4 Toner cartridge There is any stain or break-age on the drive section of the toner cartridge.
YES Clean/replace the toner cartridge.
5 Imaging unit There is any stain, damage or abrasion on the PC drum.
YES Replace the imaging unit.
6 Transfer roller There is any stain, damage, deformation or abrasion on the transfer roller.
YES Replace the transfer roller.
7 Fusing unit There is any stain, damage, deformation or abrasion on the roller and drive section of the fusing unit.
YES Replace the fusing unit.
8 The problem has been elimi-nated through the check of step 7.
NO Replace the transfer belt.
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 16. Image quality problem
239
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.13 4-Color: white lines, white bands, colored lines, colored bands in sub scan direction
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C507DA
White lines in sub scan direction
White bands in sub scan direction
Colored bands in sub scan direction
Colored lines in sub scan direction
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Transfer belt unit Fingerprints, oil, or other for-eign matter is evident on the transfer belt unit.
YES Clean with specified solvent. (See Maintenance.)
2 Transfer belt unit is dirty or scratched.
YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth.Change transfer belt unit if belt is damaged.
3 Cleaning blade is not effec-tive in removing toner com-pletely.
YES Clean cleaning blade.Change transfer belt unit.
4 Transfer roller Transfer roller is dirty or scratched.
YES Change transfer roller.
5 Media path There is foreign matter on media path.
YES Remove foreign matter.
6 Image transfer media sepa-rator fingers are damaged or dirty.
YES Clean or change.
7 Fusing unit Fusing entrance guide plate is dirty or damaged.
YES Clean.Change fusing unit.
8 Fusing media separator fin-gers are dirty.
YES Clean.
9 The problem has been elimi-nated through the checks of steps up to 8.
NO Change controller board
16. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
240
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.14 4-Color: white lines, white bands, colored lines, colored bands in main scan direction
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C508DA
White lines in main scan direction
White bands in main scan direction
Colored lines in main scan direction
Colored bands in main scan direction
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Transfer belt unit Fingerprints, oil, or other for-eign matter is evident on the Transfer belt unit.
YES Clean with specified solvent. (See Maintenance.)
2 Transfer belt unit is dirty or scratched.
YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. Change transfer belt if belt is damaged.
3 Cleaning blade is not effec-tive in removing toner com-pletely.
YES Clean cleaning blade.Change transfer belt unit.
4 Transfer roller Transfer roller is dirty or scratched.
YES Change transfer roller.
5 Media path There is foreign matter on media path.
YES Remove foreign matter.
6 Image transfer media sepa-rator fingers are damaged or dirty.
YES Clean or change.
7 Fusing unit Fusing entrance guide plate is dirty or damaged.
YES Clean.Change fusing unit.
8 Fusing media separator fin-gers are dirty.
YES Clean.
9 Neutralizing brush The resistance values between the neutralizing brush and the ground termi-nal is not ∞.
NO Check the contact.Change neutralizing brush.
10 The problem has been elimi-nated through the checks of steps up to 9.
NO Change controller board
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 16. Image quality problem
241
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.15 4-Color: uneven density in sub scan direction
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C526DA
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Transfer belt unit Fingerprints, oil, or other for-eign matter is evident on the transfer belt unit.
YES Clean with specified solvent.(See Maintenance.)
2 Transfer belt is dirty or scratched.
YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth.Change transfer belt unit if belt is damaged.
3 Terminal is dirty. YES Clean.
4 Transfer roller Transfer roller is installed properly.
NO Reinstall.
5 Transfer roller is dirty or scratched.
YES Change transfer roller.
6 The problem has been elimi-nated through the checks of steps up to 5.
NO Change transfer belt unit.
16. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
242
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.16 4-Color: uneven density in main scan direction
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C521DA
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Transfer belt unit Fingerprints, oil, or other for-eign matter is evident on the transfer belt unit.
YES Clean with specified solvent.(See Maintenance.)
2 Transfer belt is dirty or scratched.
YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth.Change transfer belt unit if belt is damaged.
3 Terminal is dirty. YES Clean.
4 Transfer roller Transfer roller is installed properly.
NO Reinstall.
5 Transfer roller is dirty or scratched.
YES Change transfer roller.
6 The problem has been elimi-nated through the checks of steps up to 5.
NO Change transfer belt unit.→ Change high voltage unit (Image transfer, neutralizing).
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 16. Image quality problem
243
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.17 4-Color: low image density
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C516DA
ABCDEABCDEABCDEABCDEABCDE
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Media Media is damp. YES Change media to one just unwrapped from its package. Install media dehumidifying heater.
2 Transfer belt unit Terminal is dirty. YES Clean.
3 Transfer roller Transfer roller is installed properly.
NO Reinstall.
4 Transfer roller is dirty or scratched.
NO Change transfer roller.
5 IDC sensor Sensor is dirty. YES Clean with blower brush.
6 [SERVICE MENU] →[ALIGNMENT] → [MAXIMUM DENSITY]
The problem has been elimi-nated through the adjust of MAXIMUM DENSITY.
NO Go to next step.
7 The problem has been elimi-nated through the checks of steps up to 6.
NO Change transfer belt unit.→ Change controller board→ Change high voltage unit (Image transfer, neutralizing).
16. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
244
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.18 4-Color: poor color reproduction
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C527DA
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Media Media is damp. YES Change media to one just unwrapped from its package. Install media dehumidifying heater.
2 Transfer belt unit Terminal is dirty. YES Clean.
3 Transfer roller Transfer roller is installed properly.
NO Reinstall.
4 Transfer roller is dirty or scratched.
NO Change transfer roller.
5 IDC sensor Sensor is dirty. YES Clean with blower brush.
6 [SERVICE MENU] →[ALIGNMENT] → [MAXIMUM DENSITY]
The problem has been elimi-nated through the adjust of MAXIMUM DENSITY.
NO Go to next step.
7 The problem has been elimi-nated through the checks of steps up to 6.
NO Change transfer belt unit.→ Change controller board→ Change high voltage unit (Image transfer, neutralizing).
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 16. Image quality problem
245
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.19 4-Color: incorrect color image registration
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C512DA
AAAAAA
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Machine condition Vibration is given to the machine after main power switch has been turned ON.
YES Turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.
2 Transfer belt unit Fingerprints, oil, or other for-eign matter is evident on the transfer belt unit.
YES Clean with specified solvent. (See Maintenance.)
3 Transfer belt unit is dirty or scratched.
YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. Change transfer belt unit if belt is damaged.
4 Drive coupling to the machine is dirty.
YES Clean.
5 Imaging unit The surface of the PC drum is scratched.
YES Change imaging unit.
6 Transfer roller Transfer roller is installed properly.
NO Reinstall.
7 Transfer roller is dirty or scratched.
YES Change transfer roller.
8 [SERVICE MENU] →[ALIGNMENT] → [FUSER SPEED]
Brush effect or blurred image occurs.
YES Readjust fusing transport speed.
9 [SERVICE MENU] →[ALIGNMENT] → [REGISTRATION]
Check the specific color in which color shift occurs.
YES Perform “REGISTRATION.” If color shift is not corrected even with a correction of ± 1 dot, go to next step.
10 The problem has been elimi-nated through the checks of steps up to 10.
NO Change transfer belt unit.→ Change controller board
16. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
246
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.20 4-Color: void areas, white spots
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C523DA
Void areas White spots
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Image check There are void areas at the front side or high density section.
YES See P.244
2 There are void areas in the trailing edge.
YES Perform [TRANSFER POWER]/[1’ST TRANSFER] under Service Menu.
3 Transfer belt unit Fingerprints, oil, or other for-eign matter is evident on the transfer belt unit.
YES Clean with specified solvent. (See Maintenance.)
4 Transfer belt unit is dirty or scratched.
YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth.Change transfer belt unit is damaged.
5 Transfer roller Transfer roller is dirty or scratched.
YES Change transfer roller.
6 Charge neutralizing cloth is not separated and ground terminal is connected prop-erly.
NO Correct or change.
7 Media path There is foreign matter on media path.
YES Remove foreign matter.
8 Pre-image transfer guide plate is damaged or dirty.
YES Clean or change.
9 The problem has been elimi-nated through the checks of steps up to 8.
NO Change transfer belt unit.
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 16. Image quality problem
247
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.21 4-Color: colored spots
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C509DA
AAAA
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Imaging unit The surface of the PC drum is scratched.
YES Change imaging unit.
2 Transfer belt unit Fingerprints, oil, or other for-eign matter is evident on the transfer belt unit.
YES Clean with specified solvent. (See Maintenance.)
3 Transfer belt unit is dirty or scratched.
YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth.Change transfer belt unit if belt is damaged.
4 Transfer roller Transfer roller is dirty or scratched.
YES Change transfer roller.
5 Media path There is foreign matter on media path.
YES Remove foreign matter.
6 Fusing unit Fusing belt is dirty or scratched.
YES Change fusing unit.
7 The problem has been elimi-nated through the checks of steps up to 6.
NO Change transfer belt unit.
16. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
248
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.22 4-Color: poor fusing performance, offset
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C528DA
C FC FC F
C FC F
OffsetPoor fusing performance
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Media Media type does not match. YES Change the setting.
2 [SERVICE MENU] →[ALIGNMENT] →[TEMPERATURE1/2]
Changing fusing tempera-ture eliminates the problem of poor fusing performance and offset.
YES Readjust fusing temperature.
3 The problem has been elimi-nated through the checks of steps up to 2.
NO Change fusing unit.
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 16. Image quality problem
249
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.23 4-Color: brush effect, blurred image
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C529DA
Blurred imageBrush effect
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Media Media is damp. YES Change media to one just unwrapped from its package. Install media dehumidifying heater.
2 Media type does not match. YES Change the setting.
3 Fusing unit Fusing entrance guide plate is dirty.
YES Clean.
4 Fusing belt is dirty or scratched.
YES Change fusing unit.
5 [SERVICE MENU] →[ALIGNMENT] →[FUSER SPEED]
Changing fusing speed elimi-nates the problem of brush effect and blurred image.
YES Readjust fusing transport speed.
16. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
250
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.24 4-Color: back marking
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C530DA
AAAA
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Transfer roller Transfer roller is scratched or dirty.
YES Change transfer roller.
2 Media path There is foreign matter on media path.
YES Remove foreign matter.
3 Fusing unit Fusing entrance guide plate is scratched or dirty.
YES Clean or change.
4 Lower fusing roller is scratched or dirty.
YES Change fusing unit.
5 Transfer belt unit Fingerprints, oil, or other for-eign matter is evident on the Transfer Belt.
YES Clean with specified solvent. (See Maintenance.)
6 The problem has been elimi-nated through the checks of steps up to 5.
NO Change transfer belt unit.→ Change high voltage unit (Image transfer, neutralizing).
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 16. Image quality problem
251
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
16.3.25 4-Color: uneven image
A. Typical faulty images
B. Troubleshooting procedure
A02EF4C525DA
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Toner cartridge The toner cartridge of every color is surely installed.
NO Re-install it.
2 PH unit The PH unit is surely installed.
NO Re-install it.
3 Uneven pitch occurs in 3.0 mm pitch.
YES Replace the PH unit holder.
4 Toner cartridge There is any stain or break-age on the drive section of the toner cartridge.
YES Clean/replace the toner car-tridge.
5 Imaging unit There is any stain, damage or abrasion on the PC drum.
YES Replace the imaging unit.
6 Transfer roller There is any stain, damage, deformation or abrasion on the transfer roller.
YES Replace the transfer roller.
7 Fusing unit There is any stain, damage, deformation or abrasion on the roller and drive section of the fusing unit.
YES Replace the fusing unit.
8 The problem has been elimi-nated through the check of step 7.
NO Replace the transfer belt.
16. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
252
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Tro
ub
lesh
oo
tin
g
Blank Page
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 17. Parts layout drawing
253
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ap
pe
nd
ix
Appendix17. Parts layout drawing
17.1 Main body
17.1.1 Engine section
[1] IDC/registration sensor/2 (SE2) [6] Controller board (PWB-P)
[2] IDC/registration sensor/1 (SE1) [7] DIMM/0 (WORK0)
[3] Control panel (PWB-OP) [8] RTC board (PWB-RTC)
[4] PH interface board (PWB-D) [9] Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
[5] DC power supply (PU1) [10] High voltage unit (HV1)
4039F5C501DB
[1][10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
17. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
254
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ap
pe
nd
ix
[1] Fusing drive motor (M4) [7] Cooling fan motor/1 (M12)
[2] Main motor (M1) [8] Toner supply motor Y/M (M6)
[3] Fusing cooling fan motor/2 (M11) [9] Cooling fan motor/2 (M22)
[4] Power supply cooling fan motor/1 (M8) [10] Toner supply motor C/K (M7)
[5] Ozone ventilation fan motor (M14) [11] Color PC drum motor (M2)
[6] Color developing motor (M3) [12] Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (M13)
4039F5C502DB
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[6]
[8][9]
[10]
[11] [12]
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 17. Parts layout drawing
255
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ap
pe
nd
ix
[1] Right door switch (S5) [6] Front door switch/2 (S4)
[2] Primary interlock switch (S2) [7] Main erase lamp/Y (LA4)
[3] PH unit [8] Main erase lamp/M (LA3)
[4] Main power switch (S1) [9] Main erase lamp/C (LA2)
[5] Front door switch/1 (S3) [10] Main erase lamp/K (LA1)
4039F5C503DB
[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
17. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
256
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ap
pe
nd
ix
[1] Developing clutch/K (CL4) [8] Waste toner full sensor (PC8)
[2] Exit sensor (PC2) [9] Color PC drive main sensor (PC17)
[3] Temperature/humidity sensor (SE3) [10] Color PC drive sub sensor (PC18)
[4] Registration roller sensor (PC1) [11] Black PC drive main sensor (PC15)
[5] OHP sensor (PC4) [12] Black PC drive sub sensor (PC16)
[6] 1st image transfer pressure/retraction position sensor (PC6)
[13] 1st image transfer pressure/retraction clutch (CL3)
[7] Registration roller clutch (CL1) [14] Exit full sensor (PC19)
4039F5C504DB
[5]
[3]
[1][14][2]
[4]
[6][8]
[10]
[9]
[7]
[12] [13]
[11]
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 17. Parts layout drawing
257
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ap
pe
nd
ix
17.1.2 Tray 1 / Tray 2
[1] Tray 2 paper feed clutch (CL2) [7] Tray 2 paper empty sensor (PC10)
[2] Tray 1 lift-up sensor (PC14) [8] Tray 2 CD paper size sensor (PC9)
[3] Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL5) [9] Tray 2 paper size board (PWB-I)
[4] Tray 1 pick-up solenoid (SL2) [10] Tray 2 paper near-empty sensor (PC11)
[5] Tray 1 paper empty sensor (PC13) [11] Tray 2 device detection sensor (PC12)
[6] Tray 1 paper size VR (UN1)
4039F5C505DB[8]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[1][2]
[3][4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
17. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
258
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ap
pe
nd
ix
17.2 Lower feeder unit (option)
[1] Vertical transport motor (M2) [8] Control board (PWB-Z)
[2] Door set sensor (PC5) [9] CD paper size sensor/1 (PC4)
[3] Vertical transport sensor (PC8) [10] Set sensor (PC2)
[4] Paper take-up sensor (PC9) [11] CD paper size sensor/2 (PC3)
[5] Paper empty sensor (PC6) [12] Lift-up motor (M3)
[6] Lift-up sensor (PC7) [13] Paper near-empty sensor (PC1)
[7] Paper size board (PWB-I) [14] Paper feed motor (M1)
4039F5C506DB
[3]
[4]
[6][5]
[14][1] [2]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10][11]
[12] [13]
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 17. Parts layout drawing
259
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ap
pe
nd
ix
17.3 Duplex option (option)
[1] Duplex unit switchback motor (M1) [4] Duplex unit transport sensor 2 (in PWB-A) (PC2)
[2] Duplex unit door set sensor (PCI) [5] Duplex control board (PWB-A)
[3] Duplex unit transport motor (M2) [6] Duplex unit transport sensor 1 (in PWB-A) (PC1)
4038F5C512DB
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
18. Connector layout drawing Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
260
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ap
pe
nd
ix
18. Connector layout drawing
No. CN No.Location in the wiring diagram
No. CN No.Location in the wiring diagram
[1] CN32 E-13 to 14 [8] CN9 E-2
[2] CN30 U-6 [9] CN28 E-9
[3] CN31 U-6 [10] CN27 E-9
[4] CN56 E-17 to 18 [11] CN22 E-9
[5] CN55 E-15 to 16 [12] CN29 E-10
[6] CN7 E-27 [13] CN13 O-18 to 19
[7] CN44 O-21 [14] CN19 O-19
DescriptionNumber of pin Possible to confirm by removing external cover.
Not possible to confirm by removing external cover.
➀
1
4039F5C507DB
[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5][6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12][13] [14]
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 18. Connector layout drawing
261
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ap
pe
nd
ix
No. CN No.Location in the wiring diagram
No. CN No.Location in the wiring diagram
[1] CN14 K-2 [10] CN18 E-12
[2] CN8 D-8 [11] CN17 E-20
[3] CN6 E-4 to 5 [12] CN39 E-22
[4] CN3 E-21 [13] CN59 K-2
[5] CN43 E-11 [14] CN42 K-22
[6] CN21 E-8 [15] CN38 E-12
[7] CN4 E-8 [16] CN45 K-2
[8] CN5 D-8 [17] CN41 K-1
[9] CN40 E-11
4039F5C508DB
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[6][7]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[15][14]
[16] [17]
[8]
1
19. Timing chart Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
262
ma
gic
olo
r 7
45
0/7
45
0II
Ap
pe
nd
ix
19. Timing chart
19.1 Main body
Print request received
4038F5E514DB
Main motor (M1)
Polygon motor
Color PC drum motor (M2)
Color developing
motor (M3)
2nd image transfer
pressure/retraction
motor (M5)
1st image transfer
pressure/retraction
Fusing drive motor (M4)
LD compulsion
luminescence
Color developing bias AC
Black developing bias AC
Image write start signal
Video data (Y)
Video data (M)
Video data (C)
Video data (K)
Main erase lamp/C (LA2)
Main erase lamp/Y (LA4)
Main erase lamp/M (LA3)
Main erase lamp/K (LA1)
Drum charge corona bias
(Y/M/C/K)
Developing bias DC
(Y/M/C/K)
1
SERVICE MANUAL
2008.08Ver. 2.0
FIELD SERVICE
Lower feeder unit
Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change forimprovement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will beissued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:• To indicate clearly a specific section revised within text, is shown at the left margin of the
corresponding revised section.The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a specific page that contains a revision or revisions, the page number appear-ing at the left or right bottom of the specific page is marked with .The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0: The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0: The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
1
1
11
2008/08 2.0 Error corrections
2006/05 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
1
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itO
utlin
eM
ain
ten
an
ce
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
gT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
g
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
i
CONTENTS
Lower feeder unit
Outline1. Product specifications ............................................................................................. 1
Maintenance2. Periodical check ...................................................................................................... 3
2.1 Maintenance procedure (periodical check parts).................................................. 3
2.1.1 Replacing the separation roller ..................................................................... 3
2.1.2 Replacing the feed roller ............................................................................... 5
2.1.3 Replacing the pick-up roller........................................................................... 9
3. Other ..................................................................................................................... 12
3.1 Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items .......................................................... 12
3.2 Disassembly/assembly/cleaning list (other parts)............................................... 13
3.2.1 Disassembly/assembly parts list ................................................................. 13
3.2.2 Cleaning parts list ....................................................................................... 13
3.3 Disassembly/assembly procedure ...................................................................... 14
3.3.1 Rear right cover/rear left cover.................................................................... 14
3.3.2 Right rear cover........................................................................................... 14
3.3.3 Control board (PWB-Z) ............................................................................... 15
3.3.4 Paper size board (PWB-I) ........................................................................... 16
3.3.5 Lift-up motor (M3) ....................................................................................... 18
3.3.6 Paper feed motor (M1) ................................................................................ 18
3.3.7 Vertical transport motor (M2) ...................................................................... 20
3.4 Cleaning procedure ............................................................................................ 21
3.4.1 Feed roller/pick-up roller ............................................................................. 21
3.4.2 Separation roller.......................................................................................... 23
3.4.3 Transport roller ............................................................................................ 24
Adjustment/Setting4. How to use the adjustment section ....................................................................... 25
5. Sensor check......................................................................................................... 26
5.1 Check procedure ................................................................................................ 26
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itO
utlin
eM
ain
ten
an
ce
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
gT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
gField Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
ii
Troubleshooting6. Jam display ........................................................................................................... 29
6.1 Misfeed display................................................................................................... 29
6.1.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure ........................................................... 29
6.2 Sensor layout...................................................................................................... 30
6.3 Solution .............................................................................................................. 31
6.3.1 Initial check items ....................................................................................... 31
6.3.2 Misfeed at tray 3 to 5 feed, tray 3 to 5 vertical transport section................. 32
7. Trouble code ......................................................................................................... 33
7.1 Trouble code display........................................................................................... 33
7.2 Trouble code list.................................................................................................. 33
7.3 Solution .............................................................................................................. 34
7.3.1 0900: Tray 4 elevator failure........................................................................ 34
7.3.2 0910: Tray 3 elevator failure........................................................................ 34
7.3.3 0950: Tray 5 elevator failure........................................................................ 34
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 1. Product specifications
1
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itO
utlin
e
Outline1. Product specificationsA. Type
B. Paper type
C. Machine specifications
D. Operating environmentConforms to the operating environment of the main body.
NOTE• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Name Paper Take-Up Cabinet
Type Front loading type 1 way paper take-up device
Installation Desk type
Document Alignment Center
Type Plain paper 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb)
Recycled paper 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb)
Size A5R to A3, 5.5 × 8.5R to 11 × 17
Capacity Plain Paper
(80 g/m2, 21.25 lb)
500 sheets
Power Requirements DC 24 V ± 10 % (supplied from the main body)
DC 5 V ± 5 %
Max. Power Consumption
12 W or less
Dimensions 380 mm (W) × 485 mm (D) × 178 mm (H)15.0 inch (W) × 19.1 inch (D) × 7.0 inch (H)
Weight 14.8 kg (32.6 lb)
1. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
2
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itO
utlin
e
Blank Page
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 2. Periodical check
3
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
Maintenance2. Periodical check
2.1 Maintenance procedure (periodical check parts)
NOTE• The following procedure mainly uses photos and illustrations of the lower feeder
unit for magicolor 7450. The same procedure is applicable to the lower feeder unit for magicolor 7450II unless otherwise noted.
2.1.1 Replacing the separation roller
A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Separation roller: 300,000 prints
B. Procedure1. Slide out the tray.2. Open the vertical transport door.
3. Remove two tabs [1], and remove the vertical transport door [2].
1
1
[1]
[2]
4039F2C048DB
2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
4
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the jam clearing cover [2].
NOTE• Make sure the position of the mylar
when installing the jam clearing cover.
5. Remove two screws [1] and the sep-aration roller installation plate assy [2].
6. Remove two C-rings [1] and the shaft [2], and remove the separation roller fixing plate assy [3].
NOTE• Use care not to miss the spring [4].
[1][1]
[2]
OK NG
4039F2C049DB
[1]
[2]
4038F2C013DB
4038F2C508DB
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 2. Periodical check
5
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
7. Remove the C-ring [1] and guide [2], and remove the separation roller [3].
2.1.2 Replacing the feed roller
A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Feed roller: 300,000 prints
B. Procedure1. Remove the separation roller installation plate assy.• See the procedures 1 to 5 in “Separation roller assy.”
See P.3
2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the right rear cover [2].
3. Disconnect the connector [1].
4038F2C559DB
[1]
[2]
[3]
1
[1]
[2]
4039F2C050DB
[1]4039F2C051DB
2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
6
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the reinforcement plate [2].
5. Remove four screws [1] and remove the feed roller assy [2].
6. Remove two screws [1] and the Installation flame [2] of the separa-tion roller installation plate assy.
[1][2]
4067F2C501DB
[1]
[1][2]
4067F2C502DB
[1]
[1]
[2]4067F2C503DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 2. Periodical check
7
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
7. Remove two screws [1] and feed roller cover [2].
8. Remove the C-ring [1] and bushing [2].
9. Remove the C-ring [2] and gear [3] while sliding out the shaft assy [1] in the direction indicated in left figure.
[1]
[2]
4067F2C504DB
[2]
[1]4067F2C505DB
[1]
4067F2C506DB
[2]
[3]
2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
8
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
10. Remove the C-ring [1] and bushing [2], and remove the shaft assy [3].
11. Remove two E-rings [1] and bushing [2], and remove the pick-up roller fix-ing plate assy [3].
12. Remove the C-ring [1] and feed roller [2].
[2]
[1]
[3] 4067F2C507DB
4067F2C508DB
[1][1]
[2]
[3]
4067F2C509DB
[1]
[2]
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 2. Periodical check
9
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
2.1.3 Replacing the pick-up roller
A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Pick-up roller: 300,000 prints
B. Procedure1. Remove the separation roller installation plate assy.• See the procedures 1 to 5 in “Separation roller assy.”
See P.3
2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the right rear cover [2].
3. Disconnect the connector [1].
4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the reinforcement plate [2].
1
[1]
[2]
4039F2C050DB
[1]4039F2C051DB
[1][2]
4067F2C501DB
2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
10
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
5. Remove four screws [1] and remove the feed roller assy [2].
6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the separation eoller installation plate assy [2] together with frame.
7. Remove two screws [1] and feed roller cover [2].
8. Remove two C-rings [1] and two bushings [2], and remove the pick-up roller assy [3].
[1]
[1][2]
4067F2C502DB
[1]
[1]
[2]4067F2C503DB
[1]
[2]
4067F2C504DB
4067F2C510DB
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 2. Periodical check
11
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
9. Snap off the C-ring [1], and remove the pick-up roller [2].
4067F2C511DB
[1]
[2]
3. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
12
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
3. Other
3.1 Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items
A. Paint-locked screws
NOTE• To prevent loose screws, a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to
the screws.• The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations
and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during transportation.
• If the screw lock coated screws are loosened or removed, be sure to apply a screw lock after the screws are tightened.
B. Red-painted screws
NOTE• The screws which are difficult to be adjusted in the field are painted in red in order
to prevent them from being removed by mistake.• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also
be noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one repre-sentative screw may be marked with the red paint.
C. Variable resistors on board
NOTE• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions
are given in Adjustment/Setting.
D. Removal of PWBs
CAUTION• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “Handling of
PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.• Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components
on the board, be sure to ground your body.
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. Other
13
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
3.2 Disassembly/assembly/cleaning list (other parts)
3.2.1 Disassembly/assembly parts list
3.2.2 Cleaning parts list
No. Section Part name Ref.Page
1
Exterior parts
Rear right cover P.14
2 Rear left cover P.14
3 Right rear cover P.14
4Board and etc.
Control board P.15
5 Paper size board P.16
6
Others
Lift-up motor P.18
7 Paper feed motor P.18
8 Vertical transport motor P.20
No. Section Part name Ref.Page
1
Paper feed section
Feed roller P.21
2 Pick-up roller P.21
3 Separation roller P.23
4 Transport section Transport roller P.24
3. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
14
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
3.3 Disassembly/assembly procedure
NOTE• The following procedure mainly uses photos and illustrations of the lower feeder
unit for magicolor 7450. The same procedure is applicable to the lower feeder unit for magicolor 7450II unless otherwise noted.
3.3.1 Rear right cover/rear left cover
1. Remove four screws [1], and remove the rear right cover [2].
2. Remove three screws [1], and remove the rear left cover [2].
3.3.2 Right rear cover
1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the right rear cover [2].
1
[1]
[1]
[2]
4039F2C052DB
[1]
[2]
4039F2C053DB
[1]
[2]
4039F2C050DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. Other
15
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
3.3.3 Control board (PWB-Z)
1. Remove the screw [1], and remove the metal blanking plate [2].
2. Remove the harness [2] from two wire saddles [1].
3. Remove all the connectors on the control board.
[1][2]
4039F2C054DB
[1]
[2]
4039F2C055DB
4039F2C056DB
3. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
16
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the control board [2].
3.3.4 Paper size board (PWB-I)
1. Remove the screw [1], and remove the metal blanking plate [2].
2. Remove the harness [2] from the edge cover [1].
[1]
[1]
[2]
4039F2C057DB
[1][2]
4039F2C054DB
[1]
[2]
4039F2C058DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. Other
17
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
3. Remove three screws [1], and remove the control board assy [2].
4. Remove two tabs [1] and the con-nector [2], and remove the paper size board assy [3].
5. Remove the lever [1], and remove the paper size board [2].
[1][2]
4067F2C512DB
[1]
[2] [3]4067F2C513DB
4067F2C514DB
[1]
[2]
3. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
18
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
3.3.5 Lift-up motor (M3)
1. Pull out the tray.2. Remove the rear right cover.
See P.143. If the optional paper feed cabinet is mounted, remove it.
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the reinforcement plate [2].
5. Disconnect the connector [1].6. Remove three screws [2], and
remove the lift-up motor [3].
3.3.6 Paper feed motor (M1)
1. Pull out the tray.2. Remove the rear right cover and the rear left cover.
See P.14
3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the reinforcement plate [2].
[1]
[2]
4038F2C165DB
[1]
[2]
[3]
4038F2C166DB
[1]
[2]
4038F2C165DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. Other
19
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
4. Remove the harness of the motor assy [2] from five wire saddles [1].
5. Disconnect two connectors [3].
6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the motor assy [2].
7. Remove two screws [1], and remove the paper feed motor [2].
[1]
[2] [3]
4038F2C167DB
[1]
[2]
4038F2C168DB
[1]
[2]
4038F2C519DB
3. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
20
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
3.3.7 Vertical transport motor (M2)
1. Pull out the tray.2. Remove the rear right cover and the rear left cover.
See P.14
3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the reinforcement plate [2].
4. Remove the harness of the motor assy [2] from five wire saddles [1].
5. Disconnect two connectors [3].
6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the motor assy [2].
[1]
[2]
4038F2C165DB
[1]
[2] [3]
4038F2C167DB
[1]
[2]
4038F2C168DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. Other
21
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
7. Remove two screws [1], and remove the vertical transport motor [2].
3.4 Cleaning procedure
NOTE• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol.
3.4.1 Feed roller/pick-up roller
1. Slide out the tray.2. Open the vertical transport door.
3. Remove two tabs [1], and remove the vertical transport door [2].
[2]
[1]
4038F2C520DB
[1]
[2]
4039F2C048DB
3. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
22
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the jam clearing cover [2].
NOTE• Make sure the position of the mylar
when installing the jam clearing cover.
5. Remove two screws [1] and the sep-aration roller installation plate assy [2].
6. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the feed roller [1] and the pick-up roller [2].
[1][1]
[2]
OK NG
4039F2C049DB
[1]
[2]
4038F2C013DB
[2]
[1]
4038F2C179DC
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. Other
23
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
3.4.2 Separation roller
1. Slide out the tray.2. Open the vertical transport door.
3. Remove two tabs [1], and remove the vertical transport door [2].
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the jam clearing cover [2].
NOTE• Make sure the position of the mylar
when installing the jam clearing cover.
5. Remove two screws [1] and the sep-aration roller installation plate assy [2].
[1]
[2]
4039F2C048DB
[1][1]
[2]
OK NG
4039F2C049DB
[1]
[2]
4038F2C013DB
3. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
24
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itM
ain
ten
an
ce
6. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the separation roller [1].
3.4.3 Transport roller
1. Open the vertical transport door.
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the transport roller [1].
4038F2C523DB
[1]
[1] 4039F2C059DA
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 4. How to use the adjustment section
25
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itA
dju
stm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
Adjustment/Setting4. How to use the adjustment section• “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce-
dures for this machine.• Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”.
Advance checksBefore attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.Check to see if:
• The power supply voltage meets the specifications.• The power supply is properly grounded.• The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current
intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise).• The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity,
direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site.• The density is properly selected.• Correct paper is being used for printing.• The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC drum, etc.) are properly
replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life.• Toner is not running out.
Caution• Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job
procedures.• If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use
utmost care not to be caught in the scanner cables or gears of the exposure unit.• Special care should be used when handling the fusing unit which can be
extremely hot.• The developing unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring
instruments away from it.• Take care not to damage the PC drum with a tool or similar device.• Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.
5. Sensor check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
26
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itA
dju
stm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
5. Sensor check
5.1 Check procedure
• To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main body in the standby state (including a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).
<Procedure>1. Set to the SERVICE MENU.• For displaying the SERVICE MENU, see “Adjustment/Setting” in the main body service
manual.See P.161
2. Select [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [PRINT MENU] → [ELEMENT PAGE].3. Select [PRINT] and press Menu/Select key.4. Sensor Information will be displayed at “SENSOR INFORMATION 1, 2 and 5” in hexa-
decimal number on the printed element information page.5. Check the Sensor status according to the bit allocation chart below.
A. Allocating the Bit(SENSOR INFORMATION 1)
BIT Part nameOperation characteristics
1 0
0 Tray 2 set sensor In position Out of position
1 Tray 2 paper empty sensor Paper not present Paper present
2 Tray 2 paper near-empty sensor Blocked Unblocked
3 Tray 3 set sensor In position Out of position
4 Tray 3 paper empty sensor Paper not present Paper present
5 Tray 3 paper near-empty sensor Blocked Unblocked
6 Tray 3 vertical transport sensor Paper present Paper not present
7 Tray 4 set sensor In position Out of position
8 Tray 4 paper empty sensor Paper not present Paper present
9 Tray 4 paper near-empty sensor Blocked Unblocked
10 Tray 4 vertical transport sensor Paper present Paper not present
11 Tray 5 set sensor In position Out of position
12 Tray 5 paper empty sensor Paper not present Paper present
13 Tray 5 paper near-empty sensor Blocked Unblocked
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 5. Sensor check
27
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itA
dju
stm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
(SENSOR INFORMATION 2)
(SENSOR INFORMATION 5)
BIT Part nameOperation characteristics
1 0
0 Tray 5 vertical transport sensor Paper present Paper not present
1 Tray 1 paper empty sensor Paper not present Paper present
2 Registration roller sensor Paper present Paper not present
3 Exit sensor Paper present Paper not present
4 Tray 1 lift-up sensor At raised positionNot at raised
position
5 Duplex unit door set sensor Close Open
6 — — —
7 — — —
8 OHP sensor OHP Not OHP
9 — — —
10 Tray 3 paper take-up sensor Paper present Paper not present
11 Tray 4 paper take-up sensor Paper present Paper not present
12 Tray 5 paper take-up sensor Paper present Paper not present
13 Fusing loop detect sensor Loop present Loop not present
BIT Part nameOperation characteristics
1 0
01st image transfer pressure/retraction position sensor
Not retracted Retracted
1 2nd image transfer pressure position sensor Not retracted Retracted
2 — — —
3 — — —
4 Color PC drive main sensor Blocked Unblocked
5 Color PC drive sub sensor Blocked Unblocked
6 Black PC drive main sensor Blocked Unblocked
7 Black PC drive sub sensor Blocked Unblocked
8 — — —
9 — — —
10 — — —
11 Lift-up sensor (tray 3) At raised positionNot at raised
position
12 Lift-up sensor (tray 4) At raised positionNot at raised
position
13 Lift-up sensor (tray 5) At raised positionNot at raised
position
5. Sensor check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
28
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itA
dju
stm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
Blank Page
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Jam display
29
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
g
Troubleshooting6. Jam display
6.1 Misfeed display
• When a media misfeed occurs a message is displayed on the control panel.
6.1.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure
• Open the corresponding door, clear the sheet of paper misfeed, and close the door.
DisplayMisfeed Location
Misfeed processing location
ActionLCD 1 LCD 2
PAPER JAM
TRAY3• Tray 3 take-up• Vertical conveyance
• Tray 3• Tray 3 right door
See P.32TRAY4• Tray 4 take-up• Vertical conveyance
• Tray 4• Tray 4 right door
TRAY5• Tray 5 take-up• Vertical conveyance
• Tray 5• Tray 5 right door
4039F4E513DB
PAPER JAM
for help
TRAY 3
6. Jam display Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
30
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
g
6.2 Sensor layout
[1] Registration roller sensor (PC1) [5] Tray 4 Paper take-up sensor (PC9)
[2] Tray 3 Vertical transport sensor (PC8) [6] Tray 5 Vertical transport sensor (PC8)
[3] Tray 3 Paper take-up sensor (PC9) [7] Tray 5 Paper take-up sensor (PC9)
[4] Tray 4 Vertical transport sensor (PC8)
4039F4C502DB
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Jam display
31
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
g
6.3 Solution
6.3.1 Initial check items
• When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items.
Check item Action
• Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper.
• Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Replace paper.Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures.
• Is a foreign object present along the paper path, or is the paper path deformed or worn?
Clean the paper path and replace if necessary.
• Are the paper separator fingers dirty, deformed, or worn?
Clean or replace the defective paper separator finger.
• Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn? Clean or replace the defective roll/roller.
• Are the edge guide and trailing edge stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper?
Set as necessary.
• Are the actuators operating correctly? Correct or replace the defective actuator.
6. Jam display Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
32
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
g
6.3.2 Misfeed at tray 3 to 5 feed, tray 3 to 5 vertical transport section
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Type Description
Detection of misfeed at tray 3 to 5 feed section
• The leading edge of the paper does not block the vertical transport sen-sor (PC8) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper feed motor (M1) has been energized.
Detection of misfeed at tray 3 to 5 vertical trans-port section
• The registration roller sensor (PC1) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the vertical transport sensor (PC8).
• Vertical transport sensor (PC8) does not transmit the paper even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked PC8.
Tray 3 to 5 vertical transport section loop reg-istration reversing JAM
• Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making the loop at front of the registration roller at feed.
Detection of paper left in tray 3 to 5
• Vertical transport sensor (PC8) is blocked when the main power switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or mal-function is reset.
• Paper take-up sensor (PC9) is blocked when the main power switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or mal-function is reset.
Relevant electrical parts
Paper take-up sensor (PC9)Vertical transport sensor (PC8)Registration roller sensor (PC1)Paper feed motor (M1)
Control board (PWB-Z)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1 Initial check items — —
2 PC9 I/O check, sensor check PWB-Z PC PJ6Z PC-8 (ON) V-22
3 PC8 I/O check, sensor check PWB-Z PC PJ6Z PC-11 (ON) V-22
4 PC1 I/O check, sensor check PWB-M CNSEN-3 (ON) C-3 to 4
5 M1 operation check PWB-Z PC PJ5Z PC-1 to 4 Q-22
6 Change PWB-Z — —
7 Change PWB-M — —
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 7. Trouble code
33
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
g
7. Trouble code
7.1 Trouble code display
• The printer’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding malfunction code and service call message on the control panel.
7.2 Trouble code list
• To reset a malfunction, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.
4039F4E514DB
SERVICE CALL 0910TRAY3 LIFT
Code Item Description
0900 Tray 4 elevator failure • The lift-up sensor is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the lifting motion has been started.
0910 Tray 3 elevator failure • The lift-up sensor is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the lifting motion has been started.
0950 Tray 5 elevator failure • The lift-up sensor is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the lifting motion has been started.
7. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
34
Lo
we
r fe
ed
er
un
itT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
g
7.3 Solution
7.3.1 0900: Tray 4 elevator failure
7.3.2 0910: Tray 3 elevator failure
7.3.3 0950: Tray 5 elevator failure
Relevant electrical parts
Lift-up sensor (PC7)Lift-up motor (M3)
Control board (PWB-Z)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)
1Check the M3 connector for proper connec-tion and correct as necessary.
— —
2Check the connector of M3 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.
— —
3 PC7 I/O check, sensor check PWB-Z PJ6Z PC-3 (ON) V-21 to 22
4 M3 operation check PWB-Z PJ4Z PC-4 to 5 Q-24
5 Change PWB-Z — —
SERVICE MANUAL
2008.08Ver. 2.0
FIELD SERVICE
Duplex option
Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change forimprovement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will beissued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:• To indicate clearly a specific section revised within text, is shown at the left margin of the
corresponding revised section.The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a specific page that contains a revision or revisions, the page number appear-ing at the left or right bottom of the specific page is marked with .The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0: The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0: The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
1
1
11
2008/08 2.0 Error corrections
2008/08 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
1
Du
ple
x o
ptio
nO
utlin
eM
ain
ten
an
ce
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
gT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
g
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
i
CONTENTS
Duplex option
Outline1. Product specifications ............................................................................................. 1
Maintenance2. Other ....................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items ............................................................ 3
2.2 Disassembly/assembly/cleaning list (Other parts) ................................................ 4
2.2.1 Disassembly/assembly parts list ................................................................... 4
2.2.2 Cleaning parts list ......................................................................................... 4
2.3 Disassembly/assembly procedure ........................................................................ 4
2.3.1 Duplex unit .................................................................................................... 4
2.4 Cleaning procedure .............................................................................................. 5
2.4.1 Transport roller/roll 1, 2 ................................................................................. 5
2.4.2 Transport roller/roll 3 ..................................................................................... 6
2.4.3 Ventilation section ......................................................................................... 6
Adjustment/Setting3. How to use the adjustment section ......................................................................... 7
4. Sensor check........................................................................................................... 8
4.1 Check procedure .................................................................................................. 8
Troubleshooting5. Jam display ............................................................................................................. 9
5.1 Misfeed display ..................................................................................................... 9
5.1.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure ............................................................. 9
5.2 Sensor layout ...................................................................................................... 10
5.3 Solution............................................................................................................... 11
5.3.1 Initial check items........................................................................................ 11
5.3.2 Duplex unit pre-registration section misfeed ............................................... 12
5.3.3 Duplex unit transport section misfeed ......................................................... 13
Du
ple
x o
ptio
nO
utlin
eM
ain
ten
an
ce
Ad
justm
en
t /
Se
ttin
gT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
gField Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
ii
Blank Page
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 1. Product specifications
1
Du
ple
x o
ptio
nO
utlin
e
Outline1. Product specificationsA. Type
B. Paper type
C. Machine specifications
D. Operating environmentConforms to the operating environment of the main unit
NOTE• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Name Duplex Unit
Type Switchback and Circulating Duplex Unit
Installation Mounted on the right side door of main body
Document Alignment Center
Type Plain paper 64 to 256 g/m2 (17 to 68 lb)
Size A5R to A3 Wide, 5.5 × 8.5R to 12 × 18
Print paper size width 139.7 to 311.1 mm (5.5 × 12.25 inch)
length 148.0 to 457.2 mm (5.75 × 18 inch)
Power Requirements DC 24 V ± 10 % (supplied from the main unit)
DC 5 V ± 5 % (supplied from the main unit)
Dimensions 110 mm (W) × 440 mm (D) × 345 mm (H)4.25 inch (W) × 17.25 inch (D) × 13.5 inch (H)
Weight 3.0 kg (6.5 lb)
1. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
2
Du
ple
x o
ptio
nO
utlin
e
Blank Page
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 2. Other
3
Du
ple
x o
ptio
nM
ain
ten
an
ce
Maintenance2. Other
2.1 Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items
A. Paint-locked screws
NOTE• To prevent loose screws, a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to
the screws.• The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations
and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during transportation.
• If the screw lock coated screws are loosened or removed, be sure to apply a screw lock after the screws are tightened.
B. Red-painted screws
NOTE• The screws which are difficult to be adjusted in the field are painted in red in order
to prevent them from being removed by mistake.• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also
be noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one repre-sentative screw may be marked with the red paint.
C. Variable resistors on board
NOTE• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions
are given in Adjustment/Setting.
D. Removal of PWBs
CAUTION• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “Handling of
PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.• Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components
on the board, be sure to ground your body.
2. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
4
Du
ple
x o
ptio
nM
ain
ten
an
ce
2.2 Disassembly/assembly/cleaning list (Other parts)
2.2.1 Disassembly/assembly parts list
2.2.2 Cleaning parts list
2.3 Disassembly/assembly procedure
NOTE• The following procedure mainly uses photos and illustrations of the duplex option
for magicolor 7450. The same procedure is applicable to the duplex option for magicolor 7450II unless otherwise noted.
2.3.1 Duplex unit
1. Release the tab [1], and remove the connector cover [2].
2. Disconnect the connector [1].
1
No Section Part name Ref. page
1 Duplex option Duplex unit P.4
No. Section Part name Ref. page
1
Duplex option
Transport roller/roll 1, 2 P.5
2 Transport roller/roll 3 P.6
3 Cleaning ventilation section P.6
1
4066F2C507DB
[1] [2]
4066F2C508DB
[1]
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 2. Other
5
Du
ple
x o
ptio
nM
ain
ten
an
ce
3. Open the duplex unit door [1].4. Remove two screws [2], and remove
the duplex unit [3].
2.4 Cleaning procedure
NOTE• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the
isopropyl alcohol.
2.4.1 Transport roller/roll 1, 2
1. Open the duplex unit door [1].2. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the transport roller/roll 1 [2], 2 [3] clean of dirt.
4066F2C509DB
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3] 4039F2C045DB
2. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
6
Du
ple
x o
ptio
nM
ain
ten
an
ce
2.4.2 Transport roller/roll 3
1. Remove the duplex unit.See P.4
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the transport roller/roll 3 [1] clean of dirt.
2.4.3 Ventilation section
1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the outside of the venti-lation section [1] clean of dirt.
2. Open the duplex unit door [1].3. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the inside of the venti-lation section [2] clean of dirt.
4066F2C504DB
[1]
[1]4039F2C046DB
[1]
[2]
4039F2C047DB
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. How to use the adjustment section
7
Du
ple
x o
ptio
nA
dju
stm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
Adjustment/Setting3. How to use the adjustment section• “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce-
dures for this machine.• Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”.
Advance ChecksBefore attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.Check to see if:
• The power supply voltage meets the specifications.• The power supply is properly grounded.• The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current
intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise).• The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity,
direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site.• The original has a problem that may cause a defective image.• The density is properly selected.• Correct paper is being used for printing.• The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC drum, etc.) are properly
replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life.• Toner is not running out.
Caution• Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job
procedures.• If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use
utmost care not to be caught in the scanner cables or gears of the exposure unit.• Special care should be used when handling the fusing unit which can be
extremely hot.• The developing unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring
instruments away from it.• Take care not to damage the PC drum with a tool or similar device.• Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.
4. Sensor check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
8
Du
ple
x o
ptio
nA
dju
stm
en
t /
Se
ttin
g
4. Sensor check
4.1 Check procedure
• To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main body in the standby state (including a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).
<Procedure>1. Set to the SERVICE MENU.• For displaying the SERVICE MENU, see “Adjustment/Setting” in the main body service
manual.See P.161
2. Select [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [PRINT MENU] → [ELEMENT PAGE].3. Select [PRINT] and press Menu/Select key.4. Sensor Information will be displayed at “SENSOR INFORMATION 3” in hexadecimal
number on the printed element information page.5. Check the Sensor status according to the Bit allocation chart below.
A. Allocating the Bit(SENSOR INFORMATION 3)
BIT Part nameOperation characteristics
1 0
0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1 Duplex unit transport sensor1 Paper present Paper not present
2 Duplex unit transport sensor2 Paper present Paper not present
3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
4 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
5 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
6 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
7 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
8 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
9 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
10 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
11 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
12 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
13 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 5. Jam display
9
Du
ple
x o
ptio
nT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
g
Troubleshooting5. Jam display
5.1 Misfeed display
• When a media misfeed occurs a message is displayed on the control panel.
5.1.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure
• Open the corresponding door, clear the sheet of paper misfeed, and close the door.
DisplayMisfeed location
Misfeed processing location
ActionLCD 1 LCD 2
PAPER JAM
DUPLEX1 • Duplex transport section
• Duplex Option door
P.13
DUPLEX2 • Duplex pre-registration section
P.12
4039F4E512DB
PAPER JAM
for help
DUPLEX1
5. Jam display Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
10
Du
ple
x o
ptio
nT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
g
5.2 Sensor layout
[1] Duplex unit transport sensor 1 (PC1) [3] Registration roller sensor (PC1)
[2] Duplex unit transport sensor 2 (PC2)
4066F4C501DB
[1]
[2]
[3]
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 5. Jam display
11
Du
ple
x o
ptio
nT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
g
5.3 Solution
5.3.1 Initial check items
• When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items.
Check item Action
• Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper.
• Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Replace paper.Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures.
• Is a foreign object present along the paper path, or is the paper path deformed or worn?
Clean the paper path and replace if necessary.
• Are the paper separator fingers dirty, deformed, or worn?
Clean or replace the defective paper separator finger.
• Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn? Clean or replace the defective roll/roller.
• Are the edge guide and trailing edge stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper?
Set as necessary.
• Are the actuators operating correctly? Correct or replace the defective actuator.
5. Jam display Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
12
Du
ple
x o
ptio
nT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
g
5.3.2 Duplex unit pre-registration section misfeed
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Type Description
Detection of misfeed at duplex pre-registration section
• The registration roller sensor (PC1) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the duplex paper take-up sequence started.
Duplex unit pre-registra-tion section loop registra-tion reversing JAM detection
• Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making the loop at front of the registration roller at pre-registration take-up.
Relevant electrical parts
Registration roller sensor (PC1) Duplex control board (PWB-A)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal components)
1 Initial check items — —
2 PC1 I/O, sensor check PWB-M CNSEN-3 (ON) C-4
3 PWB-A replacement — —
4 PWB-M replacement — —
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 5. Jam display
13
Du
ple
x o
ptio
nT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
g
5.3.3 Duplex unit transport section misfeed
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Type Description
Detection of misfeed at duplex transport section
• The duplex unit transport sensor 2 (PC2) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the duplex unit transport sensor 1 (PC1) is blocked by the paper.
• The duplex unit transport sensor 1 (PC1) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the duplex unit transport sensor 1 (PC1) is blocked by the paper.
• The duplex unit transport sensor 2 (PC2) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the duplex unit transport sensor 2 (PC2) is blocked by the paper.
Detection of paper remaining in the duplex unit transport section
• The duplex unit transport sensor 1 (PC1) or duplex unit transport sensor 2 (PC2) are blocked when the main power switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Relevant electrical parts
Registration roller sensor (PC1)Duplex unit transport sensor 1 (PC1)Duplex unit transport sensor 2 (PC2)Duplex unit switchback motor (M1)Duplex unit transport motor (M2)
Duplex control board (PWB-A)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signalLocation (electri-cal components)
1 Initial check items — —
2 PC1 I/O, sensor check PWB-M CNSEN-3 (ON) C-4
3 PC1 I/O, sensor check — U-18
4 PC2 I/O, sensor check — U-18
5 M1 operation check PWB-A PJ4A-1 to 4 V-19
6 M2 operation check PWB-A PJ5A-1 to 4 V-19
7 PWB-A replacement — —
8 PWB-M replacement — —
5. Jam display Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008
14
Du
ple
x o
ptio
nT
rou
ble
sh
oo
tin
g
Blank Page
POSITIVE LOCK RECEPTACLE#110 WITH HOUSING
20 20-L
EXTRA LARGECLOSED END CONNECTORS
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
DESTINATION
MEDIUM
SMALLCLOSED END CONNECTORS
POSITIVE LOCK RECEPTACLE
POSITIVE LOCK RECEPTACLE
OUTPUT OF ACTIVE LOW
#250 WITH HOUSING
#187 WITH HOUSING
INPUT OF ACTIVE HIGH
INPUT OF ACTIVE LOW
DC24V
OUTPUT OF ACTIVE HIGH
CLOSED END CONNECTORS
DC5V
HIGH OR LOWINPUT OF ACTIVEHIGH OR LOWOUTPUT OF ACTIVE
CLOSED END CONNECTORSLARGE
28
281 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
272625242322212019181716151413121110987654321
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Z
Y Y
Z
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
4039-B001-1AAug.2008
13 2
1 32CN
42
M22
_LO
CK
M22
ON
GN
DC
oolin
g F
an M
otor
/2
M22
GR
R GR
GY
GR
8 12111094 765321
CNR2FAN
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
GN
D
NC
GN
DN
C
CNTM
NC
24610 8
PWB-OPControl Panel
CN2OP
123567 4910 8
TUBE
GR
PI
Y OR
OR
PI
YGY
GY
W
79 5 3 1
J22P
CNCF
CF_CARDCompact Flash Card
Bat
tery
1 3 2
J15P
1 91922
94 18418393
J4P
Memory Module(DIMM)DIMM1
NC
J28P
(Option)(Expansion)
DIMM0Memory Module(DIMM)
J6P93 183
18494
2 92911
J27P
NCNC
J26P
1 49502
2 50
Hard DiscHDD
PJ01HDD
491
J13P
cassettes or moreIn case of two add-on paper
From the lower cassette
GY
PH Unit/K
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
PH Unit/C
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
PH Unit/MPH Unit/Y
NC
17
N1
1
Imag
ing
Uni
t/Y
Imag
ing
Uni
t/M
Imag
ing
Uni
t/C
Imag
ing
Uni
t/K
T2
T1
Mechanical Control BoardPWB-M
DC
5VS
OS
_LO
W_Y
SO
S_Y
GN
DLD
_PO
WE
R_Y
GN
DS
/H_Y
1
DC
5VS
/HB
_Y2
S/H
_Y2
LD_E
N_Y
S/H
B_Y
1
GN
DD
C24
VN
C
GN
DLD
_PO
WE
R_M
GN
DS
OS
_MD
C5V
SO
S_L
OW
_M
S/H
B_M
2S
/H_M
2LD
_EN
_MS
/HB
_M1
S/H
_M1
DC
5V NC
NC
DC
5V
S/H
_C1
S/H
B_C
1LD
_EN
_CS
/H_C
2S
/HB
_C2
SO
S_L
OW
_CD
C5V
SO
S_C
GN
DLD
_PO
WE
R_C
GN
D
GN
DLD
_PO
WE
R_K
GN
DS
OS
_KD
C5V
SO
S_L
OW
_K
S/H
B_K
2S
/H_K
2LD
_EN
_KS
/HB
_K1
S/H
_K1
DC
5V NC
DC
24V
GN
D
GN
DC
SIC
_RX
D *
4C
SIC
_TX
D *
3
GN
DC
SIC
_RX
D *
4C
SIC
_TX
D *
3
GN
DC
SIC
_RX
D *
4C
SIC
_TX
D *
3
GN
D
CS
IC_T
XD
*3
CS
IC_R
XD
*4
GN
DC
SIC
_RX
D *
4C
SIC
_TX
D *
3
GN
DC
SIC
_RX
D *
4C
SIC
_TX
D *
3
GN
DC
SIC
_RX
D *
4C
SIC
_TX
D *
3
CS
IC_T
XD
*3
CS
IC_R
XD
*4
GN
D
M2-
DU
M1-
DU
GN
DD
C24
VG
ND
DC
24V
4th
GR
ID_P
WM
2nd
GR
ID_P
WM
2nd
P.C
._R
EM
*2
1st G
RID
_PW
M3r
d G
RID
_PW
M1s
t P.C
._R
EM
*2
GY
GY
GY
D.B
. _C
LK *
61s
t D.B
._A
C_R
EM
*6
2nd_
I.T. M
ON
ITO
R *
11s
t D.B
._D
C_P
WM
*6
1st I
.T. M
ON
ITO
R *
1
I.T._
RE
M *
11s
t I.T
._P
WM
*1
1st I
.T./2
nd I.
T_R
EM
*1
2nd
I.T._
PW
M *
1
3rd
D.B
. _D
C_P
WM
*6
2nd
D.B
. _D
C_P
WM
*6
4th
D.B
. _D
C_P
WM
*6
GN
DG
ND
DC
24V
DC
24V
D.B. : Developing Bias
*6
I.T. : Image Transfer
*1
P.C. : Photo Conductor
*2
*3
TXD : Transmission Data
*4
RXD : Reception Data
CW/CCW : Clock Wise/Counter Clock Wise
*5
NC
DC
5VD
UP
_RE
V_M
O_B
DU
P_F
EE
D_M
O_E
NA
DU
P_F
EE
D_M
O_E
NB
DU
P_S
ET
DU
P_F
EE
D_M
O_B
DU
P_F
EE
D_M
O_A
DU
P_R
EV
_PD
DU
P_R
EV
_MO
_EN
BD
UP
_RE
V_M
O_E
NA
GN
DD
C24
VD
UP
_CO
VE
R_O
PD
UP
_FE
ED
_PS
DU
P_E
XIT
_PS
DU
P_R
EV
_MO
_AD
UP
_FE
ED
_PD
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
Rig
ht D
oor
Sw
itch
Fro
nt D
oor
Sw
itch/
1
Mai
n E
rase
Lam
p/K
Mai
n E
rase
Lam
p/C
Mai
n E
rase
Lam
p/M
Mai
n E
rase
Lam
p/Y
I.T. U
nit *
1
Fus
ing
Driv
e M
otor
Col
or P
C D
rum
Mot
or
Ton
er S
uppl
y M
otor
C/K
Col
or D
evel
opin
g M
otor
2nd
Imag
e T
rans
fer
2nd
Imag
e T
rans
fer
Exi
t Sen
sor
Hea
ting
Rol
ler
The
rmis
tor/
2
Hea
ting
Rol
ler
The
rmis
tor/
1
Fus
ing
Pre
ssur
e R
olle
r T
herm
isto
r/1
Fus
ing
Pre
ssur
e R
olle
r T
herm
isto
r/2
Hea
ting
Rol
ler
The
rmis
tor/
3
GN
DD
C24
V
Pol
ygon
_CLK
_KP
olyg
on_L
OC
K_K
Pol
ygon
_RE
M_K
NC
DC
5V
S/H
_K1
S/H
B_K
1LD
_EN
_KS
/H_K
2S
/HB
_K2
SO
S_L
OW
_KD
C5V
SO
S_K
GN
DLD
_PO
WE
R_K
GN
D
NC
19
GN
DLD
_PO
WE
R_C
GN
DS
OS
_CD
C5V
SO
S_L
OW
_C
S/H
B_C
2S
/H_C
2LD
_EN
_CS
/HB
_C1
S/H
_C1
DC
5VN
CP
olyg
on_R
EM
_CP
olyg
on_L
OC
K_C
Pol
ygon
_CLK
_C
CS
IC_R
XD
*4
CS
IC_T
XD
*3
CS
IC_T
XD
*3
GN
DC
SIC
_RX
D *
4C
SIC
_TX
D *
3G
ND
CS
IC_R
XD
*4
GN
DC
SIC
_TX
D *
3C
SIC
_RX
D *
4G
ND
GN
DA
TD
C_M
ON
_KD
C24
VA
TD
C_C
ON
T_K
GN
DA
TD
C_M
ON
_CD
C24
VA
TD
C_C
ON
T_C
GN
DA
TD
C_M
ON
_MD
C24
VA
TD
C_C
ON
T_M
PW
B-I M
4
M7
M6
SIZ
E4
GN
D
SIZ
E3
SIZ
E2
14 15 1716
PC
11 O
N
PC
12 O
N GN
D
8
PC
10 O
N SIZ
E1
LED
_RE
M
PC
9 O
N
12 13
GN
D
11109
LED
_RE
M
GN
D
LED
_RE
M
LED
_RE
M
GN
D
4 765321
CNMP
PC9
Tra
y 2
CD
Pap
er S
ize
Sen
sor
PC10
Tra
y 2
Pap
er E
mpt
y S
enso
r
2 1
PJ1
6 32 13
PJ1
5
5 4 3
432
6
1
CN
9
1
6
2
5
PJ3
8 3 12 3
PJ3
9 12
Tra
y 2
Dev
ice
Det
ectio
n S
enso
r
PC12
Tra
y 2
Pap
er N
ear-
Em
pty
Sen
sor
PC11T
ray
2 P
aper
Siz
e B
oard
PW
B-I
SIZ
E4
2
GN
D
1
SIZ
E1
SIZ
E3
SIZ
E2
5 34
PJ1I
PW
B-I
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
CNSEN
1 2 3 5 6 74
LED
_RE
M
LED
_RE
M
DC
5V
GN
D
SE
1 V
O1
9 10 11
SE
1_R
EF
1312
SE
2 V
O1
GN
D
SE
2 V
O2
DC
5V
8
SE
1 V
O2
PC
1 O
N
PC
4 O
N
16 171514
DC
5VG
ND
DC
24V
SE
2_R
EF
18
CL1
ON
CN
20 151413
2 13
9 10 11
567
5 6 7
91011
8
8
21 3
1415 13
4
12
12
4161718
16 17 18
181716
18 17 16 4
12
12
4
1315 14
31 2
8
8
11 10 9
765
7 6 5
11109
3 12
13 14 15
CN
6
2 1345
PJ1
2
PC4PC12 1
PJ1
1 32 13
PJ1
0
OH
P S
enso
r
Reg
istr
atio
n R
olle
r S
enso
r
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
IDC
/Reg
istr
atio
n S
enso
r /1
SE1 SE2
IDC
/Reg
istr
atio
n S
enso
r /2
PJ1
3 5 4 3 12
1 2
2 1CN
24
CL1
1814 15 17168 12 1311109
DC
24V
4 765321
CNHV2
19
19
CN2HV1
123567 49101113 12 81617 15 1418
CNHV1
DC
24V
GN
DG
ND
4th
D.B
. _D
C_P
WM
*6
2nd
D.B
. _A
C_R
EM
*6
3rd
D.B
. _A
C_R
EM
*6
4th
D.B
. _A
C_R
EM
*6
2nd
D.B
. _D
C_P
WM
*6
3rd
D.B
. _D
C_P
WM
*6
2nd
I.T._
PW
M *
11s
t I.T
./2nd
I.T
_RE
M *
11s
t I.T
._P
WM
*1
I.T._
RE
M *
1
1st I
.T. M
ON
ITO
R *
11s
t D.B
._D
C_P
WM
*6
2nd_
I.T. M
ON
ITO
R *
11s
t D.B
._A
C_R
EM
*6
D.B
. _C
LK *
6
DC
5VS
E3
ON G
ND
SE
3 O
NM
10 O
N
NC
M10
_LO
CK
GN
D
1st P
.C._
RE
M *
23r
d G
RID
_PW
M1s
t GR
ID_P
WM
2nd
P.C
._R
EM
*2
2nd
GR
ID_P
WM
4th
GR
ID_P
WM
DC
24V
GN
DD
C24
V
1 2 3 5 6 74
GN
D
9 10 11 13128 16 171514 18
810 9 47 6 5 3 2 1
CN1HV1
4
1CN
21 1 2 3
4 3 2
Reg
istr
atio
n R
olle
r C
lutc
h
(W)
R(W
)
R(W
)
(W)
Hig
h P
ress
ure
2nd
I.T. *
1
Hig
h P
ress
ure
1st I
.T. *
1
CN
4
2 1
321
3
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
3
1 2 3
12CN
5
234
321
CN
8
1
4
SE34 3 12
PJ2
6
Tem
pera
ture
/Hum
idity
Sen
sor
M10
Suc
tion
Fan
Mot
orG
YG
Y
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
Y GR
GY
GY
DU
P_R
EV
_MO
_EN
AD
UP
_RE
V_M
O_E
NB
DU
P_R
EV
_PD
DU
P_F
EE
D_M
O_A
DU
P_F
EE
D_M
O_B
NC
DU
P_S
ET
DU
P_F
EE
D_M
O_E
NB
DU
P_F
EE
D_M
O_E
NA
DU
P_F
EE
D_P
DD
UP
_RE
V_M
O_A
DU
P_R
EV
_MO
_BD
C5V
NC
DU
P_E
XIT
_PS
DU
P_F
EE
D_P
SD
UP
_CO
VE
R_O
PD
C24
V
19
CNDUP
123567 4
GN
D
9101113 12 81617 15 1418
4
4 3 12
8
8
11109
7 6 5
765
11 10 9
31 2CN
13
CN
19
21 3 5 6 7
567 2 134
4
CN
15
15 14 13 91011 5678 2 13412161718
18 17 16 12 4 3 128 7 6 511 10 9131415
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
DC
24V
SL2
ON
LED
_RE
MG
ND
PC
14 O
N
PC
13 O
NGN
DLE
D_R
EM
CL5
ON
CNTRY1
1 2 3 5 6 74
DC
24V
9 108
1 2
2 1CN
27 4
1CN
22 1 2 3
4 3 2 CN
28
12
21
Tra
y 1
Lift-
Up
Sen
sor
3
PJ1
8 12
PC14SL2
Tra
y 1
Pic
k-U
p S
olen
oid
PC132 1
PJ1
7 3
Tra
y 1
Pap
er E
mpt
y S
enso
r
CL5
Tra
y 1
Pap
er F
eed
Clu
tch
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
21 3
31 2
CN
29
DC
4.7V
321
CNTRY2
UN
1 O
N GN
D
UN1
Tra
y 1
Pap
er S
ize
VR
Y GR
GY
PU1DC Power Supply
141516 81213 11 10 9
NC
47 6 5 3 2 1
CNLP
NC
NC
CL2
ON
DC
24V
GN
DP
C8
ON
M14
ONG
ND
M14
_LO
CK
DC
24V
CL4
ON
LED
_RE
MG
ND
PC
6 O
NLE
D_R
EM
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
CN
40 2 1
321
3
1 2
2 1
CN
43
PC82 3
PJ4
1 1
Was
te T
oner
Ful
l Sen
sor
CL2
Tra
y 2
Pap
er F
eed
Clu
tch
M14
Ozo
ne V
entil
atio
n F
an M
otor
4
1
CN
18
1 2 3
4 3 2
1 2
2 1
CN
38
Pos
ition
Sen
sor
1
PJ3
7 32
PC6
Dev
elop
ing
Clu
tch/
K
CL4
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
8 11109
*
4 765321
*T
H4
ON G
ND
TH
5 O
N
TH
1 O
NGN
DT
H2
OND
C5V
GN
D
GN
D
CNTH1 CNTH2
LED
_RE
MG
ND
PC
2 O
NDC
5VG
ND
TH
3 O
ND
C5V
_OU
T
1 2 3 5 6 74
DC
5V_I
N
8
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
181716
18 17 16 4
12
12
4
1315 14
31 2
8
8
11 10 9
765
7 6 5
11109
3 12
13 14 15
CN
32
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
19
19
GY
1 2
2 1CN
36
TH4 TH5
CN
37
12
21
5 4 3
432
6
1
CN
34
1
6
2
5
TH2 TH1
4
1CN
35 1 2 3
4 3 2
PC22 13
PJ1
9
TH3
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
8 1211109
GN
D
4 765321
CS
IC_R
XD
*4
CS
IC_T
XD
*3
GN
DC
SIC
_RX
D *
4
GN
DC
SIC
_TX
D *
3C
SIC
_RX
D *
4G
ND
CS
IC_T
XD
*3
CS
IC_T
XD
*3
CS
IC_R
XD
*4
CNCI1
4
12
12
431 2
8
8
11 10 9
765
7 6 5
11109
3 12CN
55
2 13
IU E
EP
RO
M B
oard
/MP
WB
-E
PW
B-E
IU E
EP
RO
M B
oard
/Y
3 12
PW
B-E
IU E
EP
RO
M B
oard
/C
3 12
PW
B-E
IU E
EP
RO
M B
oard
/K
3 12
PJ1E PJ1E PJ1E PJ1E
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GN
DP
C16
ON
LED
_RE
MG
ND
PC
3 O
N
M5
ON
PC
7 O
NGN
DLE
D_R
EM
PC
15 O
NLE
D_R
EM
GN
DP
C18
ON
LED
_RE
M
GN
DLE
D_R
EM
PC
17 O
NGN
D
19
CNPC
1 2 3 5 6 74
LED
_RE
M
9 10 11 13128 16 171514 18 20
GN
DG
Y
4
12
12
431 2
8
8
11 10 9
765
7 6 5
11109
3 12CN
17
4
431 2
8
8765
7 6 5 3 12CN
3
PC182 1
PJ2
4 3
Col
or P
C D
rive
Sub
Sen
sor
Bla
ck P
C D
rive
Mai
n S
enso
r
3
PJ2
1 12
PC15
Col
or P
C D
rive
Mai
n S
enso
r
3
PJ2
3 12
PC17
Bla
ck P
C D
rive
Sub
Sen
sor
3
PJ2
2 12
PC16
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
PC72 1
PJ2
3
Pre
ssur
e P
ositi
on S
enso
r
Fus
ing
Loop
Det
ect S
enso
r
3
PJ1
12
PC3 M512
PJ3
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
Pre
ssur
e/R
etra
ctio
n M
otor
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
NC
M3_
RE
MD
C5V
GN
DG
ND
DC
24VA A
M3_
H/L
M3_
LOC
KM
3_C
LK
BBG
ND
M12
ON
CNDM2
123567 4
M12
_LO
CK
9101113 12 816 15 14
Coo
ling
Fan
Mot
or/1
M12
3
1 2 3
12
CN
39
M6
Ton
er S
uppl
y M
otor
Y/M
321 4
PJ5
93 6 7 84 51 2
M3
PJ6
81213 11 10 9 47 6 5 3 2 1
CNDM3
B B
M2_
CLK
M2_
LOC
KM
2_H
/LAA
DC
24V
GN
DG
ND
DC
5VM
2_R
EMNC
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
PJ8
M221 54 8763 941 2 3
M7
PJ7
PJ2
0
M4321 4
B B A A
CNSM
1234
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
2 1
CNMT
**(B
L)(W
)
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GN
DN
CN
CN
CLA
1 O
N GN
D
LA4
ON G
ND
LA3
ON G
ND
LA2
ON
CNER
123567 491011 8
GY
PJ4
5 1 2
LA4 LA321
PJ4
4
LA221
PJ4
3
LA121
PJ4
2
GR
Y R
321
CNCOP
DC
5VG
ND
DC
24V
(W)
S5-
NO
CN
4PU
1-2
Y(W
)C
N4P
U1-
1
3 2 1
CNLV3
GN
DM
8 O
NM
8_LO
CK
GY
GR
GY
CN
7 2 1
321
3
M8
Pow
er S
uppl
y C
oolin
g F
an M
otor
/1
S4-
NO
(W)
R(W
)
6-P1
14 15 168 12 13111094 765321
CNINF2
17 1918 222120
9-R4
CNLV2
21
DC
15V
GN
D
CNLV1
123567 4
FLI
CK
ER
_RE
M
DC
3.3V
H1_
RE
M
GN
D
H3_
RE
M
910
HE
AT
ER
_RY
SLE
EP
_RE
M
8
ZE
RO
CR
OS
S
DC
5V
H2_
RE
M
CN7PU1
1 2 3 5 6 74
SLE
EP
_RE
MH
EA
TE
R_R
Y
H3_
RE
M
9 10
DC
5VH
1_R
EM
FLI
CK
ER
_RE
M
8
H2_
RE
M
ZE
RO
CR
OS
S
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
CN
8PU
1-4
GR
PI
CN
8PU
1-3
NC
CNPOW
1 2 3 5 6 74 8
CN5PU1
4 3 2 1
GN
D
GN
D
DC
5VD
C24
V
DC
5VG
ND
DC
24V
123
CN4PU1
GR
Y RGR
R GR
(R)
(W)
RS
5-C
OM
26-E1
CN
CO
P-2
S4-
CO
M
141517 16 81213 11 10 9
DC
24V
47 6 5 3 2 1
CNDM1
GN
DG
ND
DC
5VM
1_R
EM
DC
24V
NC
M1_
LOC
KM
1_C
LKM
1_R
EV
M13
ON
M13
_LO
CK
GN
DM
11_L
OC
KG
ND M
11 O
NC
L3 O
N
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
CN
41
2 13
21 3
4
431 2
3 12CN
45 1 2
12CN
59
95 6 7 821 3 4
M1
PJ9
31 2
3 12CN
14
CL3M11M13
GR
YR GY
GR
GR
GR
Y GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
2 135 469 781112 10
M3-PC
PJ1
06
12
GY
GY
Y GY
54321
PJ4Z PC
GR
PJ1Z PC
M3-
PC
-+P
C1-
PC
OND
C5V
GN
D
3 2 1
PJ1
05
PC1-PC
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
10 1211 13 14
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
986 754321
PJ3Z PC
GY
GY
GY
PC2-PC
PJ3
1 123
PC4-PC
PJ2
9 123 3 2 1
PJ3
0
PC3-PC
5 4 3 2 1
PJ1I PC
SIZ
E1
PW
B-I
PC
SIZ
E4
SIZ
E2
SIZ
E3
GN
D
PC
4-P
C O
N
PC
3-P
C O
N
PC
2-P
C O
NDC
5VG
ND
GN
DD
C5V
GN
DD
C5V
PW
B-I
PC
SIZ
E2
SIZ
E3
GN
DS
IZE
4
SIZ
E1
1012 111314
141311 1210
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GN
D
DC
5VD
C5VP
C8-
PC
ON
GN
D
10 1211 13 14
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
9
DC
5V
86 7
PC
6-P
C O
NG
ND P
C9-
PC
ON
5
GN
D
43
PC
7-P
C O
N
21
DC
5VG
ND
DC
5V
PJ6Z PC
GY
GY
GY
CN
107
8 79 6 45 3 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PC7-PC
PJ1
09
123
PC6-PC
PJ1
10
123 3 2 1PJ1
11
PC9-PC PC5-PC
PJ1
13
1233 2 1PJ1
12
PC8-PC
15
GY
15
15
PC
5-P
C O
N
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
M1-PC
4 3 12
1 2 3 4
CN
101
CN
102
4321
2 134
M2-PC
86 754321
PJ5Z PC
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
B
M2-
PC
M1-
PC
A B ABAA B
Set
Sen
sor
Lift-
Up
Mot
or
PWB-I PC
Pap
er S
ize
Boa
rd
PWB-Z PCPC Control Board
Pap
er F
eed
Mot
or
Ver
tical
Tra
nspo
rt M
otor
Lift-
Up
Sen
sor
Pap
er E
mpt
y S
enso
r
Pap
er T
ake-
Up
Sen
sor
Ver
tical
Tra
nspo
rt S
enso
r
Doo
r S
et S
enso
r
CD
Pap
er S
ize
Sen
sor/
1
Pap
er N
ear-
Em
pty
Sen
sor
CD
Pap
er S
ize
Sen
sor/
2
GN
D
RX
D *
4
DC
5VD
C5V
RT
S
GN
D
FLM
GN
D
A1_
INA
2_IN
TX
D *
3C
LK
DC
24V
GN
D
PJ2Z PC
1 2
14
14
12
12
10
10
8
8
6
64
1CN
44
1 2 3
4 3 2
5
5
7
7
9
9
11
11
13
13
DC
5VG
ND
GN
DF
LMD
C24
VG
ND
CA
SS
ET
TE
_CLK
CA
SS
ET
TE
_TX
D *
3C
AS
SE
TT
E_R
XD
*4
CA
SS
ET
TE
_RT
SD
C5V
GN
D
CNCST
1 2 3 5 6 74 9 10 11 128
4 3 127 6 591011 5678 2 134
PJ2A DUPJ1A DU
321
PJ3A DU
DC
5VG
ND P
CI-
DU
ON
3 2 1
PCI-DU
A
4 3 2 1
PJ5A DU
ABB
M2-DUM1-DU
PJ4A DU
1234
B B A A
Duplex Control BoardPWB-A DU
PJ4
0
1st I
mag
e T
rans
fer
Pre
ssur
e/R
etra
ctio
n
CN3PU1
1 2 3 4 5
H3_
RE
MH
2_R
EM
H1_
RE
M
TS
1_O
UT
TS
2_O
UT
21
21
CN
31
CN
30 31 2
1 2 3
BK
WBK
W WF
usin
g U
nit
BK
W W WBK
CN
PO
W-1
CN
PO
W-5
CN
PO
W-2
CN
PO
W-7
CN
5PU
1-1
CN
5PU
1-2
R GR
GR
YC
N5P
U1-
4C
N5P
U1-
3
CN
LV1-
6
CN
LV1-
4C
NLV
1-5
CN
LV1-
7
CN
LV1-
9C
NLV
1-8
CN
LV1-
10C
N7P
U1-
1
CN
7PU
1-3
CN
7PU
1-2
CN
7PU
1-4
CN
7PU
1-8
CN
7PU
1-6
CN
7PU
1-7
CN
7PU
1-5
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
TUBE
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
AT
DC
_CO
NT
_YD
C24
VA
TD
C_M
ON
_Y
CNAT
123567 4
GN
D
9101113 12 816 15 14
431 2CN
62
431 2CN
61
431 2CN
63
431 2CN
64
GN
DN
CD
C24
VN
CN
CD
C5V
GN
D
NC
DC
24V
GN
DP
olyg
on_R
EM
_YP
olyg
on_L
OC
K_Y
Pol
ygon
_CLK
_Y
S/H
B_Y
1LD
_EN
_YS
/H_Y
2S
/HB
_Y2
DC
5V
S/H
_Y1
GN
DLD
_PO
WE
R_Y
GN
D
CNPH1
1 2 3 5 6 74
SO
S_Y
9 10 11 13128 161514
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
17 18
SO
S_L
OW
_YD
C5V
GY
GY
18 141517 16 81213 11 10 9 47 6 5 3 2 1
PJ2D PJ3D
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
14 15 168 12 1311109
Pol
ygon
_CLK
_M
4 765321
CNPH2
Pol
ygon
_LO
CK
_MP
olyg
on_R
EM
_MN
CD
C5V
S/H
_M1
S/H
B_M
1LD
_EN
_MS
/H_M
2S
/HB
_M2
SO
S_L
OW
_MD
C5V
SO
S_M
GN
DLD
_PO
WE
R_M
GN
D
CNPH4
1 2 3 5 6 74 9 10 11 13128 161514
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
17 18
GY
GY
PJ4D
123567 49101113 12 816 15 14 123567 49101113 12 81617 15 1418
HV1High Voltage Unit
TUBE
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
PJ1EPJ1EPJ1EPJ1E
2 13
PW
B-E
2 13
PW
B-E
2 13
PW
B-E
PW
B-E
3 12
CN
56
2 13
9 10 11
567
5 6 7
91011
8
8
21 3 4
12
12
4
CNCI2
1 2 3 5 6 74 9 10 11 128
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
TC
EE
PR
OM
Boa
rd/K
TC
EE
PR
OM
Boa
rd/C
TC
EE
PR
OM
Boa
rd/Y
TC
EE
PR
OM
Boa
rd/M
CSIC Developing Section CSIC Hopper Section
141516 81213 11 10 9 47 6 5 3 2 1
CNPH3
1 2 3 5 6 74 9 10 11 13128 161514
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
PJ5D
L2N2
1 2
CN2PU1
S2
(R)
(R)
(W)
(W)
1A 2A 1B 2B
BK
W
4231
(W)
(W)
(R)
(R)
S1
1
2
CN1PU1
2
L1
BK
WP
G1
(L)
(G)
(N)
Y/G
BK
W
CN
1
WBK
W BK
BK
WBK
W
Mai
n P
ower
Sw
itch
Prim
ary
Inte
rlock
Sw
itch
CO
MN
O
S5S3
NO
CO
M
2 1
S4
CO
MN
O
4 5321
PJ6D
DC
24V
GN
DP
olyg
on S
/SP
olyg
on L
DP
olyg
on C
LK
Pol
ygon
CLK
Pol
ygon
LD
Pol
ygon
S/S
GN
DD
C24
V
PJ8D
1 2 3 54
GN
DLD
PO
WE
R Y
GN
DS
OS
YD
C5V
DA
TA
2 Y
GN
DD
AT
A1
YD
AT
A1
YG
ND
DA
TA
2 Y
GN
DS
/H1
YS
/HB
1 Y
PJ7D
1 2 3 5 6 74
EN
B Y
9 10 11 13128 161514 17 18
S/H
B2
YS
/H2
Y
GY
GR
GY
GY
YY GY
GR
GR
RGR
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
181714 15 168 12 13111094 765321
PJ9D
4 5321
PJ10D
DC
24V
GN
DP
olyg
on S
/SP
olyg
on L
DP
olyg
on C
LK
181714 15 168 12 13111094 765321
PJ11D
4 5321
PJ12D
DC
24V
GN
DP
olyg
on S
/SP
olyg
on L
DP
olyg
on C
LK
PJ13D
1 2 3 5 6 74 9 10 11 13128 161514 17 18
PH Interface BoardPWB-D
Fus
ing
Coo
ling
Fan
Mot
or/1
Fus
ing
Coo
ling
Fan
Mot
or/2
Pre
ssur
e/R
etra
ctio
n C
lutc
h
Mai
n M
otor
1st I
mag
e T
rans
fer
Fro
nt D
oor
Sw
itch/
2
GR
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
YGY
GY
GY
GY
RGY
GY
GY
GR
GY
GY
GY
RGY
GY
GY
GY
YGY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GR
GY
GY
GY
19
SO
S L
OW
Y
DC
5V
19 1919
DC
5V
SO
S L
OW
M
S/H
2 M
S/H
B2
M
EN
B M
S/H
B1
MS
/H1
MG
ND
DA
TA
2 M
GN
DD
AT
A1
MD
AT
A1
MG
ND
DA
TA
2 M
DC
5VS
OS
MG
ND
LDP
OW
ER
MG
ND
DC
5V
SO
S L
OW
C
S/H
2 C
S/H
B2
C
EN
B C
S/H
B1
CS
/H1
CG
ND
DA
TA
2 C
GN
DD
AT
A1
CD
AT
A1
CG
ND
DA
TA
2 C
DC
5VS
OS
CG
ND
LDP
OW
ER
CG
ND
DC
5V
SO
S L
OW
K
S/H
2 K
S/H
B2
K
EN
B K
S/H
B1
KS
/H1
KG
ND
DA
TA
2 K
GN
DD
AT
A1
KD
AT
A1
KG
ND
DA
TA
2 K
DC
5VS
OS
KG
ND
LDP
OW
ER
KG
ND
8-U2
To J24P
125
PJ1D
GN
DY
_HS
YN
CG
ND
EN
G_D
AT
AC
TL_
DA
TA
PD
PO
WE
R_M
ON
ITO
RC
TL_
BU
SY
EN
G_B
US
YN
C
SLE
EP
_RE
MS
UB
SW
_ON
MO
TIO
N_E
NG
ND
TO
DN
C
M_H
SY
NC
GN
DC
_HS
YN
CG
ND
K_H
SY
NC
GN
D
To CNINF2P
(In
PW
B-A
DU
)D
uple
x U
nit T
rans
port
Sen
sor
2
Dup
lex
Uni
t Tra
nspo
rt S
enso
r 1
(In
PW
B-A
DU
)
PC2-DUPC1-DU
Dup
lex
Uni
t Doo
r S
et S
enso
r
Dup
lex
Uni
t Sw
itchb
ack
Mot
or
Dup
lex
Uni
t Tra
nspo
rt M
otor
TUBE
TUBE
TUBE TUBE TUBE TUBE
FERRITE CORE
TUBETUBETUBETUBE
#4066 Duplex(Option) #4067 Lower Feeder Unit(Option)
4th
D.B
. _A
C_R
EM
*6
3rd
D.B
. _A
C_R
EM
*6
2nd
D.B
. _A
C_R
EM
*6
Pol
ygon
_CLK
_YP
olyg
on_L
OC
K_Y
Pol
ygon
_RE
M_Y
Pol
ygon
_CLK
_MP
olyg
on_L
OC
K_M
Pol
ygon
_RE
M_M
Pol
ygon
_CLK
_CP
olyg
on_L
OC
K_C
Pol
ygon
_RE
M_C
Pol
ygon
_CLK
_KP
olyg
on_L
OC
K_K
Pol
ygon
_RE
M_K
17 18 19 20 21
ED
AT
A_Y
GN
D
GN
D
E_D
AT
A_Y
2E
_DA
TA
_Y1
CNINF1
1 765432 1098 11 12 13 14 15 16
E_D
AT
A_K
2G
ND
GN
DE
_DA
TA
_K1
GN
DE
NB
DA
TA
_K
E_D
AT
A_C
2E
_DA
TA
_C2
ED
AT
A_C
GN
D
GN
DE
DA
TA
_M
E_D
AT
A_M
1G
ND
GN
DE
_DA
TA
_M2
2 1
2 1
CN
1
S2
(R)
(R)
(W)
(W)
1A 2A 1B 2B
4231
(R)
(R)
(R)
(R)
S1
Y/G
PG
1
WBK
W BK
BK
WBK
W
Mai
n P
ower
Sw
itch
Prim
ary
Inte
rlock
Sw
itch
TUBE
CN
7PU
1-9
GY
CN
7PU
1-10
GY
CN
LV1-
3C
NLV
1-2
CN
LV1-
1G
YG
Y
DC
.3V
GN
D
S3-
CO
MY
R
J9P
-2
CN
LV2-
2J9
P-4
CN
LV2-
1G
R
GR
PI
YG
ND
DC
15V
DC
5V
GN
D
1234
CN8PU1
TUBE
WBK
CN1PU1
2
1
WBK
CN2PU1
JapanChina120V Areas 230V Areas
TUBE
Prim
ary
Inte
rlock
Sw
itch
Mai
n P
ower
Sw
itch
WBK
W BK
BK
WBK
W
CN
1
W BK
Y/G
(N)
(G)
(L)
PG
1WB
K
CN1PU1
2
1
S1
(R)
(R)
(W)
(W)
1 3 2 4
WBK
2B1B2A1A
(W)
(W)
(R)
(R)
S2
CN2PU1
PG
1
GY
GY
GY
GY
SD
AS
CL
GN
D
DC
5V
NC
45 3 2 1
CNRC
SD
AG
ND
SC
LD
C5V
PJ1R
1 2 3 4
PW
B-R
RT
C B
oard
321
CNSKF
1234N
C
DC
5VG
NDP
C19
ON
GY
GY
GY
PC19
Exi
t Ful
l Sen
sor
PJ5
0
PJ8Z PC
NC
5 7-P
CN6PU1
4 3 2 1
NC
DC
3.3V
GN
DN
CYG
RJ9
P-3
J9P
-1
DC
5VD
C3.
3V
GN
D
J9P
1 2 3 4
Y GR
Y GR
GN
DC
N8P
U1-
2
CN
6PU
1-1
CN
6PU
1-3
CN
8PU
1-1
4-P5
To CNINF1P
3 8-R
To CNINF2
GN
DK
_HS
YN
CG
ND
C_H
SY
NC
GN
DM
_HS
YN
C
NC
TO
DG
ND
MO
TIO
N_E
NS
UB
SW
_ON
SLE
EP
_RE
MNC
EN
G_B
US
YC
TL_
BU
SY
PO
WE
R_M
ON
ITO
R PD
CT
L_D
AT
AE
NG
_DA
TA
GN
DY
_HS
YN
CG
ND
4 17-J
202122 1819 17
CNINF2P
123567 49101113 12 816 15 14
16-J3
To CNINF1
E_D
AT
A_M
2G
ND
GN
DE
_DA
TA
_M1
ED
AT
A_M
GN
D
GN
DE
DA
TA
_C
E_D
AT
A_C
2E
_DA
TA
_C2
EN
BD
AT
A_K
GN
D
E_D
AT
A_K
1G
ND
GN
DE
_DA
TA
_K2
16 15 14 13 12 11 8910 234567 1
CNINF1P
E_D
AT
A_Y
1E
_DA
TA
_Y2
GN
D
GN
DE
DA
TA
_Y
21 20 19 18 17
234567816 15 14 13 12 11 10 922 17181920212324
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
K_D
AT
A1[
+]K
_DA
TA
1[-]
GN
DK
_DA
TA
2[-]
K_D
AT
A2[
+]
C_D
AT
A2[
+]C
_DA
TA
2[-]
C_D
AT
A1[
-]C
_DA
TA
1[+]
M_D
AT
A1[
+]M
_DA
TA
1[-]
M_D
AT
A2[
-]M
_DA
TA
2[+]
Y_D
AT
A2[
+]Y
_DA
TA
2[-]
Y_D
AT
A1[
-]Y
_DA
TA
1[+]
Y_D
AT
A1[
+]Y
_DA
TA
1[-]
Y_D
AT
A2[
-]Y
_DA
TA
2[+]
M_D
AT
A2[
+]M
_DA
TA
2[-]
M_D
AT
A1[
-]M
_DA
TA
1[+]
C_D
AT
A1[
+]C
_DA
TA
1[-]
C_D
AT
A2[
-]C
_DA
TA
2[+]
K_D
AT
A2[
+]K
_DA
TA
2[-]
GN
D
K_D
AT
A1[
-]K
_DA
TA
1[+]
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
24 23 21 20 19 18 1722 910111213141516 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
J24P
25 1
To PJ1D
2 13-J
Controller BoardPWB-P
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
YGR
GR
GR
GY
R Y GY
DC
24V
GN
D
GN
D
RX
D *
4
DC
5VD
C5V
RT
S
GN
D
FLM
GN
D
A1_
INA
2_IN
TX
D *
3C
LK
PJ7Z PC
1311975321 4 6 8 10 12 14
14 12 10 8 6 1
CN
12 4 3 25791113
L1
2 21
N2
L2
1
N1
L1
2 21
N2
L2
1
N1
TUBETUBE
Prim
ary
Inte
rlock
Sw
itch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1413121110987654321
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
4039-B001-1A 1/4Aug.2008
8 6-P7 5-P6 4-P
Y_D
AT
A1[
+]Y
_DA
TA
1[-]
Y_D
AT
A2[
-]Y
_DA
TA
2[+]
M_D
AT
A2[
+]M
_DA
TA
2[-]
M_D
AT
A1[
-]M
_DA
TA
1[+]
C_D
AT
A1[
+]C
_DA
TA
1[-]
C_D
AT
A2[
-]C
_DA
TA
2[+]
K_D
AT
A2[
+]K
_DA
TA
2[-]
GN
D
K_D
AT
A1[
-]K
_DA
TA
1[+]
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
24 23 21 20 19 18 1722 910111213141516 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
PJ5
0
Exi
t Ful
l Sen
sor
PC19
GY
GY
GY
PC
19 O
NG
ND
DC
5V
NC
4 3 2 1
CNSKF
1 2 3
RT
C B
oard
PW
B-R
4321
PJ1R
DC
5VS
CL
GN
DS
DA
CNRC
1235 4
NC
DC
5V
GN
D
SC
LS
DA
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
CN
7PU
1-10
GY
CN
7PU
1-9
Pol
ygon
_RE
M_K
Pol
ygon
_LO
CK
_KP
olyg
on_C
LK_K
Pol
ygon
_RE
M_C
Pol
ygon
_LO
CK
_CP
olyg
on_C
LK_C
Pol
ygon
_RE
M_M
Pol
ygon
_LO
CK
_MP
olyg
on_C
LK_M
Pol
ygon
_RE
M_Y
Pol
ygon
_LO
CK
_YP
olyg
on_C
LK_Y
2nd
D.B
. _A
C_R
EM
*6
3rd
D.B
. _A
C_R
EM
*6
4th
D.B
. _A
C_R
EM
*6
PJ1D
25 1
To J24P
2 8-U
GN
DLD
PO
WE
R K
GN
DS
OS
KD
C5V
DA
TA
2 K
GN
DD
AT
A1
KD
AT
A1
KG
ND
DA
TA
2 K
GN
DS
/H1
KS
/HB
1 K
EN
B K
S/H
B2
KS
/H2
K
SO
S L
OW
K
DC
5V
GN
DLD
PO
WE
R C
GN
DS
OS
CD
C5V
DA
TA
2 C
GN
DD
AT
A1
CD
AT
A1
CG
ND
DA
TA
2 C
GN
DS
/H1
CS
/HB
1 C
EN
B C
S/H
B2
CS
/H2
C
SO
S L
OW
C
DC
5V
GN
DLD
PO
WE
R M
GN
DS
OS
MD
C5V
DA
TA
2 M
GN
DD
AT
A1
MD
AT
A1
MG
ND
DA
TA
2 M
GN
DS
/H1
MS
/HB
1 M
EN
B M
S/H
B2
MS
/H2
M
SO
S L
OW
M
DC
5V
19 1919
DC
5V
SO
S L
OW
Y19
GY
GY
GY
1st I
mag
e T
rans
fer
Mai
n M
otor
Pre
ssur
e/R
etra
ctio
n C
lutc
h
Fus
ing
Coo
ling
Fan
Mot
or/2
Fus
ing
Coo
ling
Fan
Mot
or/1
PWB-DPH Interface Board
181714 15 168 12 13111094 765321
PJ13D
Pol
ygon
CLK
Pol
ygon
LD
Pol
ygon
S/S
GN
DD
C24
V
PJ12D
1 2 3 54
PJ11D
1 2 3 5 6 74 9 10 11 13128 161514 17 18
Pol
ygon
CLK
Pol
ygon
LD
Pol
ygon
S/S
GN
DD
C24
V
PJ10D
1 2 3 54
PJ9D
1 2 3 5 6 74 9 10 11 13128 161514 17 18
S/H
2 Y
S/H
B2
Y
181714 15 168 12 1311109
EN
B Y
4 765321
PJ7D
S/H
B1
YS
/H1
YG
ND
DA
TA
2 Y
GN
DD
AT
A1
YD
AT
A1
YG
ND
DA
TA
2 Y
DC
5VS
OS
YG
ND
LDP
OW
ER
YG
ND
4 5321
PJ8D
DC
24V
GN
DP
olyg
on S
/SP
olyg
on L
DP
olyg
on C
LK
Pol
ygon
CLK
Pol
ygon
LD
Pol
ygon
S/S
GN
DD
C24
V
PJ6D
1 2 3 54
PJ5D
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
14 15 168 12 13111094 765321
CNPH3
123567 49101113 12 816 15 14
TUBE
High Voltage UnitHV1
18 141517 16 81213 11 10 9 47 6 5 3 2 1141516 81213 11 10 9 47 6 5 3 2 1
PJ4D
GY
GY
1817
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
14 15 168 12 13111094 765321
CNPH4
GN
DLD
_PO
WE
R_M
GN
DS
OS
_MD
C5V
SO
S_L
OW
_M
S/H
B_M
2S
/H_M
2LD
_EN
_MS
/HB
_M1
S/H
_M1
DC
5VN
CP
olyg
on_R
EM
_MP
olyg
on_L
OC
K_M
CNPH2
1 2 3 5 6 74
Pol
ygon
_CLK
_M
9 10 11 13128 161514
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
PJ3DPJ2D
123567 49101113 12 81617 15 1418
GY
GY
DC
5VS
OS
_LO
W_Y
1817
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
14 15 168 12 1311109
SO
S_Y
4 765321
CNPH1
GN
DLD
_PO
WE
R_Y
GN
DS
/H_Y
1
DC
5VS
/HB
_Y2
S/H
_Y2
LD_E
N_Y
S/H
B_Y
1
Pol
ygon
_CLK
_YP
olyg
on_L
OC
K_Y
Pol
ygon
_RE
M_Y
GN
DD
C24
VN
C
GN
DD
C5V
NC
NC
DC
24V
NC
GN
D
CN
64
21 3 4 CN
63
21 3 4 CN
61
21 3 4CN
62
21 3 4
141516 81213 11 10 9
GN
D
47 6 5 3 2 1
CNAT
AT
DC
_MO
N_Y
DC
24V
AT
DC
_CO
NT
_YG
Y
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
CN
7PU
1-5
CN
7PU
1-7
CN
7PU
1-6
CN
7PU
1-8
CN
7PU
1-4
CN
7PU
1-2
CN
7PU
1-3
CN
7PU
1-1
CN
5PU
1-3
CN
5PU
1-4
YGR
GR
RC
N5P
U1-
2
CN
5PU
1-1
1st I
mag
e T
rans
fer
Pre
ssur
e/R
etra
ctio
n
M13 M11 CL3
CN
14
2 13
21 3
PJ9
M1
431 2 8765 9
CN
59
2 1
21
CN
45
2 13
21 3 4
4
31 2
3 12CN
41
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
CL3
ON
M11
ON
GN
DM
11_L
OC
KG
ND
M13
_LO
CK
M13
ON
M1_
RE
VM
1_C
LKM
1_LO
CK
NC
DC
24V
M1_
RE
MD
C5V
GN
DG
ND
CNDM1
123567 4
DC
24V
9101113 12 81617 15 14 84 765321
CNPOWN
C
CN
8PU
1-3
PI
GR
CN
8PU
1-4
H2_
RE
M
DC
5V
ZE
RO
CR
OS
S
8
SLE
EP
_RE
MH
EA
TE
R_R
Y
10 9
H3_
RE
M
GN
D
H1_
RE
M
DC
3.3V
FLI
CK
ER
_RE
M
47 6 5 3 2 1
CNLV1
GN
DD
C15
V
1 2
CNLV2
TH3
PJ1
9 3 12
PC2
234
321
CN
35
1
4
TH1TH2
5
2
6
1CN
34 1
6
2 3 4
345
1 2
2 1CN
37
TH5TH4
CN
36
12
21
GY
19
19
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
CN
32 151413
2 13
9 10 11
567
5 6 7
91011
8
8
21 3
1415 13
4
12
12
4161718
16 17 18
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
8
DC
5V_I
N
4 765321
DC
5V_O
UT
TH
3 O
N GN
DD
C5V
PC
2 O
NGN
DLE
D_R
EM
CNTH2CNTH1
GN
D
GN
DD
C5V
TH
2 O
N GN
DT
H1
ON
TH
5 O
NGN
DT
H4
ON
*
1 2 3 5 6 74
*
9 10 118
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
CL4
Dev
elop
ing
Clu
tch/
K
PC62 3
PJ3
7 1
Pos
ition
Sen
sor
CN
38 12
21
234
321CN
18 1
4
Ozo
ne V
entil
atio
n F
an M
otor
M14
Tra
y 2
Pap
er F
eed
Clu
tch
CL2
Was
te T
oner
Ful
l Sen
sor
1
PJ4
1 32
PC8
CN
43 12
21
3
1 2 3
12
CN
40
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
LED
_RE
MP
C6
ON G
ND
LED
_RE
MC
L4 O
ND
C24
V
M14
_LO
CK
GN
DM
14 O
NP
C8
ON G
ND
DC
24V
CL2
ON
NC
NC
CNLP
123567 4
NC
9101113 12 816 15 14
GY
GR
Y
Tra
y 1
Pap
er S
ize
VR
UN1
GN
DU
N1
ON
CNTRY2
1 2 3
DC
4.7V
CN
29 21 3
31 2
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
Tra
y 1
Pap
er F
eed
Clu
tch
CL5
Tra
y 1
Pap
er E
mpt
y S
enso
r
3
PJ1
7 12
PC13
Tra
y 1
Pic
k-U
p S
olen
oid
SL2 PC142 1
PJ1
8 3
Tra
y 1
Lift-
Up
Sen
sor
1 2
2 1CN
28
234
321
CN
22
1
4
CN
27
12
21
8 109
DC
24V
4 765321
CNTRY1
CL5
ON
LED
_RE
MG
ND
PC
13 O
N
PC
14 O
NGN
DLE
D_R
EM
SL2
ON
DC
24V
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GR
YG
Y
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
Suc
tion
Fan
Mot
or
M10
Tem
pera
ture
/Hum
idity
Sen
sor
PJ2
6 2 134
SE3
4
1CN
8 1 2 3
4 3 2 CN
5
2 1
321
3
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
3
1 2 3
12CN
4
Hig
h P
ress
ure
1st I
.T. *
1
Hig
h P
ress
ure
2nd
I.T. *
1
(W)
(W)
R
(W)
R
(W)
Reg
istr
atio
n R
olle
r C
lutc
h
234
321
CN
21
1
4
CN1HV1
123567 4910 8
1814 15 17168 12 1311109
GN
D
4 765321
DC
24V
GN
DD
C24
V4t
h G
RID
_PW
M
2nd
GR
ID_P
WM
2nd
P.C
._R
EM
*2
1st G
RID
_PW
M3r
d G
RID
_PW
M1s
t P.C
._R
EM
*2
GN
DM
10_L
OC
KN
C
M10
ON
SE
3 O
NGN
DS
E3
OND
C5V
D.B
. _C
LK *
61s
t D.B
._A
C_R
EM
*6
2nd_
I.T. M
ON
ITO
R *
11s
t D.B
._D
C_P
WM
*6
1st I
.T. M
ON
ITO
R *
1
I.T._
RE
M *
11s
t I.T
._P
WM
*1
1st I
.T./2
nd I.
T_R
EM
*1
2nd
I.T._
PW
M *
1
3rd
D.B
. _D
C_P
WM
*6
2nd
D.B
. _D
C_P
WM
*6
4th
D.B
. _A
C_R
EM
*6
3rd
D.B
. _A
C_R
EM
*6
2nd
D.B
. _A
C_R
EM
*6
4th
D.B
. _D
C_P
WM
*6
GN
DG
ND
DC
24V
CNHV1
18 141517 16 81213 11 10 9 47 6 5 3 2 1
CN2HV1
19
19
CNHV2
1 2 3 5 6 74
DC
24V
9 10 11 13128 16 171514 18
CL1
CN
24
12
21
2 1345
PJ1
3
IDC
/Reg
istr
atio
n S
enso
r /2
SE2SE1
IDC
/Reg
istr
atio
n S
enso
r /1
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
Reg
istr
atio
n R
olle
r S
enso
r
OH
P S
enso
r
PJ1
0 3 12 3
PJ1
1 12
PC1 PC4
PJ1
2 5 4 3 12
CN
6 151413
2 13
9 10 11
567
5 6 7
91011
8
8
21 3
1415 13
4
12
12
4161718
16 17 18
181716
18 17 16 4
12
12
4
1315 14
31 2
8
8
11 10 9
765
7 6 5
11109
3 12
13 14 15
CN
20
CL1
ON
18
SE
2_R
EF
DC
24V
GN
DD
C5V
14 15 1716
PC
4 O
N
PC
1 O
N
SE
1 V
O2
8
DC
5V
SE
2 V
O2
GN
D
SE
2 V
O1
12 13
SE
1_R
EF
11109
SE
1 V
O1
GN
D
DC
5V
LED
_RE
M
LED
_RE
M
4 765321
CNSEN
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
PW
B-I
PJ1I
4 35
SIZ
E2
SIZ
E3
SIZ
E1
1
GN
D
2
SIZ
E4
PW
B-I
Tra
y 2
Pap
er S
ize
Boa
rd
PC11
Tra
y 2
Pap
er N
ear-
Em
pty
Sen
sor
PC12
Tra
y 2
Dev
ice
Det
ectio
n S
enso
r
2 1
PJ3
9 32 13
PJ3
8
5
2
6
1CN
9 1
6
2 3 4
345
PJ1
5 3 12 3
PJ1
6 12
Tra
y 2
Pap
er E
mpt
y S
enso
r
PC10
Tra
y 2
CD
Pap
er S
ize
Sen
sor
PC9
CNMP
1 2 3 5 6 74
GN
D
LED
_RE
M
LED
_RE
M
GN
D
LED
_RE
M
9 10 11
GN
D
1312
PC
9 O
N
LED
_RE
M
SIZ
E1
PC
10 O
N
8
GN
D
PC
12 O
N
PC
11 O
N
16 171514
SIZ
E2
SIZ
E3
GN
DS
IZE
4
PW
B-I
AT
DC
_CO
NT
_MD
C24
VA
TD
C_M
ON
_MG
ND
AT
DC
_CO
NT
_CD
C24
VA
TD
C_M
ON
_CG
ND
AT
DC
_CO
NT
_KD
C24
VA
TD
C_M
ON
_KG
ND
Pol
ygon
_CLK
_CP
olyg
on_L
OC
K_C
Pol
ygon
_RE
M_C
NC
DC
5V
S/H
_C1
S/H
B_C
1LD
_EN
_CS
/H_C
2S
/HB
_C2
SO
S_L
OW
_CD
C5V
SO
S_C
GN
DLD
_PO
WE
R_C
GN
D
19
NC
GN
DLD
_PO
WE
R_K
GN
DS
OS
_KD
C5V
SO
S_L
OW
_K
S/H
B_K
2S
/H_K
2LD
_EN
_KS
/HB
_K1
S/H
_K1
DC
5VN
C
Pol
ygon
_RE
M_K
Pol
ygon
_LO
CK
_KP
olyg
on_C
LK_K
DC
24V
GN
D
Hea
ting
Rol
ler
The
rmis
tor/
3
Fus
ing
Pre
ssur
e R
olle
r T
herm
isto
r/2
Fus
ing
Pre
ssur
e R
olle
r T
herm
isto
r/1
Hea
ting
Rol
ler
The
rmis
tor/
1
Hea
ting
Rol
ler
The
rmis
tor/
2
Exi
t Sen
sor
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
DC
24V
DC
24V
GN
DG
ND
4th
D.B
. _D
C_P
WM
*6
2nd
D.B
. _D
C_P
WM
*6
3rd
D.B
. _D
C_P
WM
*6
2nd
I.T._
PW
M *
11s
t I.T
./2nd
I.T
_RE
M *
11s
t I.T
._P
WM
*1
I.T._
RE
M *
1
1st I
.T. M
ON
ITO
R *
11s
t D.B
._D
C_P
WM
*6
2nd_
I.T. M
ON
ITO
R *
11s
t D.B
._A
C_R
EM
*6
D.B
. _C
LK *
6
1st P
.C._
RE
M *
23r
d G
RID
_PW
M1s
t GR
ID_P
WM
2nd
P.C
._R
EM
*2
2nd
GR
ID_P
WM
4th
GR
ID_P
WM
DC
24V
GN
DD
C24
VG
ND
GN
DD
C24
VN
CD
C5V
S/H
_K1
S/H
B_K
1LD
_EN
_KS
/H_K
2S
/HB
_K2
SO
S_L
OW
_KD
C5V
SO
S_K
GN
DLD
_PO
WE
R_K
GN
D
GN
DLD
_PO
WE
R_C
GN
DS
OS
_CD
C5V
SO
S_L
OW
_C
S/H
B_C
2S
/H_C
2LD
_EN
_CS
/HB
_C1
S/H
_C1
DC
5V NC
NC
DC
5V
S/H
_M1
S/H
B_M
1LD
_EN
_MS
/H_M
2S
/HB
_M2
SO
S_L
OW
_MD
C5V
SO
S_M
GN
DLD
_PO
WE
R_M
GN
D
NC
DC
24V
GN
D
S/H
B_Y
1LD
_EN
_YS
/H_Y
2S
/HB
_Y2
DC
5V
S/H
_Y1
GN
DLD
_PO
WE
R_Y
GN
DS
OS
_Y
SO
S_L
OW
_YD
C5V
PWB-M (1/2)Mechanical Control Board
T1
T2
Imag
ing
Uni
t/K
Imag
ing
Uni
t/C
Imag
ing
Uni
t/M
Imag
ing
Uni
t/Y
17
NC
PH Unit/Y PH Unit/MG
YG
YG
YG
YG
Y
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
PH Unit/C
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
PH Unit/K
GY
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
2827262524232221201918171615
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
4039-B001-1A 2/4Aug.2008
PWB-M (2/2)Mechanical Control Board
CN
44-4
CN
44-1
CN
44-6
CN
44-5
CN
44-8
CN
44-9
CN
44-7
CN
44-1
1C
N44
-10
CN
44-1
3C
N44
-14
CN
44-1
2
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
9 18-N
10 19-N
11 21-N
8-R3
To CNINF1P
R
E_D
AT
A_M
2G
ND
GN
DE
_DA
TA
_M1
ED
AT
A_M
GN
D
GN
DE
DA
TA
_C
E_D
AT
A_C
2E
_DA
TA
_C2
EN
BD
AT
A_K
GN
D
E_D
AT
A_K
1G
ND
GN
DE
_DA
TA
_K2
1615141312118 9 102 3 4 5 6 71
CNINF1
E_D
AT
A_Y
1E
_DA
TA
_Y2
GN
D
GN
DE
DA
TA
_Y
2120191817
TUBE TUBE TUBE TUBE
FERRITE CORE
TUBETUBETUBETUBE
TUBE
To CNINF2P
GN
DK
_HS
YN
CG
ND
C_H
SY
NC
GN
DM
_HS
YN
C
NC
TO
DG
ND
MO
TIO
N_E
NS
UB
SW
_ON
SLE
EP
_RE
M
NC
EN
G_B
US
YC
TL_
BU
SY
PO
WE
R_M
ON
ITO
RP
D
CT
L_D
AT
AE
NG
_DA
TA
GN
DY
_HS
YN
CG
ND
CN
19-7
CN
13-5
CN
13-3
CN
13-4
CN
13-7
CN
13-6
CN
13-1
CN
13-2
CN
13-1
0
CN
13-8
CN
19-1
CN
13-1
1
CN
19-5
CN
19-6
CN
19-3
CN
19-2
CN
19-4
GY
GR
R GR
GR
GY
Y Y GY
GY
GR
GY
12 CO
MN
O
S3 S5
NO
CO
M
CSIC Hopper SectionCSIC Developing Section
TC
EE
PR
OM
Boa
rd/M
TC
EE
PR
OM
Boa
rd/Y
TC
EE
PR
OM
Boa
rd/C
TC
EE
PR
OM
Boa
rd/K
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
8 12111094 765321
CNCI2
4
12
12
431 2
8
8
11 10 9
765
7 6 5
11109
3 12CN
562 13
PW
B-E
PW
B-E
3 12
PW
B-E
3 12
PW
B-E
3 12
PJ1E PJ1E PJ1E PJ1E
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
TUBE
8 12111094 765321
CNCST
GN
D
DC
5VC
AS
SE
TT
E_R
TS
CA
SS
ET
TE
_RX
D *
4C
AS
SE
TT
E_T
XD
*3
CA
SS
ET
TE
_CLK
GN
DD
C24
VF
LMG
ND
GN
DD
C5V
4 9-R
20 21 2218 1917
CNINF2
1 2 3 5 6 74 9 10 11 13128 161514
1 6-P
(W)
R(W
)S
4-N
O
Pow
er S
uppl
y C
oolin
g F
an M
otor
/1
M8
3
1 2 3
12
CN
7G
Y
GR
GY
M8_
LOC
KM
8 O
N GN
D
CNLV3
123
CN
4PU
1-1
(W)
Y
CN
4PU
1-2
S5-
NO
(W)
DC
24V
GN
DD
C5V
CNCOP
1 2 3
RY GR
PJ4
2 1 2
LA1
PJ4
3 1 2
LA2
PJ4
4 1 2
LA3LA421
PJ4
5
GY
811 10 9 47 6 5 3 2 1
CNER
LA2
ONG
ND
LA3
ONG
ND
LA4
ON G
ND
LA1
ON
NC
NC
NC
GN
D
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
(W)
(BL)
* *
CNMT
12
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
4 3 2 1
CNSM
AABB
41 2 3
M4
PJ2
0
PJ7
M7321 4 93 6 7 84 51 2
M2
PJ8
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
NC
M2_
RE
MD
C5V
GN
DG
ND
DC
24VA A
M2_
H/L
M2_
LOC
KM
2_C
LK
BB
CNDM3
123567 49101113 12 8
PJ6
M321 54 8763 9
PJ5
41 2 3
Ton
er S
uppl
y M
otor
Y/M
M6
CN
39 2 1
321
3
M12
Coo
ling
Fan
Mot
or/1
141516 81213 11 10 9
M12
_LO
CK
47 6 5 3 2 1
CNDM2
M12
ON G
ND B B
M3_
CLK
M3_
LOC
KM
3_H
/LAA
DC
24V
GN
DG
ND
DC
5VM
3_R
EMNC
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
Pre
ssur
e/R
etra
ctio
n M
otor
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
PJ3
2 1
M5PC32 1
PJ1
3
Fus
ing
Loop
Det
ect S
enso
r
Pre
ssur
e P
ositi
on S
enso
r
3
PJ2
12
PC7
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
PC162 1
PJ2
2 3
Bla
ck P
C D
rive
Sub
Sen
sor
PC172 1
PJ2
3 3
Col
or P
C D
rive
Mai
n S
enso
r
PC152 1
PJ2
1 3
Bla
ck P
C D
rive
Mai
n S
enso
r
Col
or P
C D
rive
Sub
Sen
sor
3
PJ2
4 12
PC18
CN
3
2 13567
5 6 7 8
8
21 3 4
4CN
17
2 13
9 10 11
567
5 6 7
91011
8
8
21 3 4
12
12
4
GY
GN
D
201814 15 17168 12 1311109
LED
_RE
M
4 765321
CNPC
19
GN
DP
C17
ON
LED
_RE
MG
ND
LED
_RE
MP
C18
ONG
ND
LED
_RE
MP
C15
ON
LED
_RE
MG
ND
PC
7 O
NM
5 O
N
PC
3 O
NGN
DLE
D_R
EM
PC
16 O
NGN
D
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
PJ1EPJ1EPJ1EPJ1E
2 13
IU E
EP
RO
M B
oard
/KP
WB
-E
2 13
IU E
EP
RO
M B
oard
/CP
WB
-E
2 13
IU E
EP
RO
M B
oard
/YP
WB
-E
PW
B-E
IU E
EP
RO
M B
oard
/M
3 12
CN
55
2 13
9 10 11
567
5 6 7
91011
8
8
21 3 4
12
12
4
CNCI1
CS
IC_R
XD
*4
CS
IC_T
XD
*3
CS
IC_T
XD
*3
GN
DC
SIC
_RX
D *
4C
SIC
_TX
D *
3G
ND
CS
IC_R
XD
*4
GN
DC
SIC
_TX
D *
3C
SIC
_RX
D *
4
1 2 3 5 6 74
GN
D
9 10 11 128
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
18 141517 16 81213 11 10 9
GN
D
47 6 5 3 2 1
CNDUP
19
DC
24V
DU
P_C
OV
ER
_OP
DU
P_F
EE
D_P
SD
UP
_EX
IT_P
S
NC
DC
5VD
UP
_RE
V_M
O_B
DU
P_R
EV
_MO
_AD
UP
_FE
ED
_PD
DU
P_F
EE
D_M
O_E
NA
DU
P_F
EE
D_M
O_E
NB
DU
P_S
ET
NC
DU
P_F
EE
D_M
O_B
DU
P_F
EE
D_M
O_A
DU
P_R
EV
_PD
DU
P_R
EV
_MO
_EN
BD
UP
_RE
V_M
O_E
NA
M6
M7
M4
GN
DC
SIC
_RX
D *
4C
SIC
_TX
D *
3G
ND
CS
IC_R
XD
*4
GN
DC
SIC
_TX
D *
3C
SIC
_RX
D *
4G
ND
CS
IC_T
XD
*3
CS
IC_T
XD
*3
CS
IC_R
XD
*4
2nd
Imag
e T
rans
fer
2nd
Imag
e T
rans
fer
Col
or D
evel
opin
g M
otor
Ton
er S
uppl
y M
otor
C/K
Col
or P
C D
rum
Mot
or
Fus
ing
Driv
e M
otor
I.T. U
nit *
1
Mai
n E
rase
Lam
p/Y
Mai
n E
rase
Lam
p/M
Mai
n E
rase
Lam
p/C
Mai
n E
rase
Lam
p/K
Fro
nt D
oor
Sw
itch/
1
Rig
ht D
oor
Sw
itch
GN
DC
SIC
_RX
D *
4C
SIC
_TX
D *
3
CS
IC_T
XD
*3
CS
IC_R
XD
*4
GN
D
CS
IC_T
XD
*3
CS
IC_R
XD
*4
GN
D
CS
IC_T
XD
*3
CS
IC_R
XD
*4
GN
D
CS
IC_R
XD
*4
CS
IC_T
XD
*3
GN
D
CS
IC_T
XD
*3
CS
IC_R
XD
*4
GN
D
CS
IC_T
XD
*3
CS
IC_R
XD
*4
GN
D
CS
IC_T
XD
*3
CS
IC_R
XD
*4
GN
D
NC
CNTM
NC
GN
DN
C
GN
DN
CN
CN
CN
C
NC
CNR2FAN
1 2 3 5 6 74 9 10 11 128
GR
GY
GR
RGR
M22
Coo
ling
Fan
Mot
or/2
GN
DM22
ON
M22
_LO
CK
CN
42
2 31
23 1
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
NN
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1413121110987654321
Aug.20084039-B001-1A 3/4
4-J6 5-J7 6-J8
Prim
ary
Inte
rlock
Sw
itch
TUBE TUBE
N1
1
L2N2
1 22
L1 N1
1
L2N2
1 22
L1
PWB-PController Board
13-J2
To PJ1D
125
J24P
234567816 15 14 13 12 11 10 922 17181920212324
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
GN
D
K_D
AT
A1[
+]K
_DA
TA
1[-]
GN
DK
_DA
TA
2[-]
K_D
AT
A2[
+]
C_D
AT
A2[
+]C
_DA
TA
2[-]
C_D
AT
A1[
-]C
_DA
TA
1[+]
M_D
AT
A1[
+]M
_DA
TA
1[-]
M_D
AT
A2[
-]M
_DA
TA
2[+]
Y_D
AT
A2[
+]Y
_DA
TA
2[-]
Y_D
AT
A1[
-]Y
_DA
TA
1[+]
1718192021
ED
AT
A_Y
GN
D
GN
D
E_D
AT
A_Y
2E
_DA
TA
_Y1
CNINF1P
17 6 5 4 3 210 9 8111213141516
E_D
AT
A_K
2G
ND
GN
DE
_DA
TA
_K1
GN
DE
NB
DA
TA
_K
E_D
AT
A_C
2E
_DA
TA
_C2
ED
AT
A_C
GN
D
GN
DE
DA
TA
_M
E_D
AT
A_M
1G
ND
GN
DE
_DA
TA
_M2
To CNINF1
3 16-J
141516 81213 11 10 9 47 6 5 3 2 1
CNINF2P
1719 1822 21 20
17-J4
GN
DY
_HS
YN
CG
ND
EN
G_D
AT
AC
TL_
DA
TA PD
PO
WE
R_M
ON
ITO
RC
TL_
BU
SY
EN
G_B
US
YN
C
SLE
EP
_RE
MS
UB
SW
_ON
MO
TIO
N_E
NG
ND
TO
DN
C
M_H
SY
NC
GN
DC
_HS
YN
CG
ND
K_H
SY
NC
GN
D
To CNINF2
5 4-P
CN
8PU
1-1
CN
6PU
1-3
CN
6PU
1-1
CN
8PU
1-2
GN
DG
R
Y GR
Y
4321
J9P
GN
D
DC
3.3V
DC
5V
J9P
-1
J9P
-3G
R
YN
CG
ND
DC
3.3VN
C
1234
CN6PU1
7-P5
PG
1
CN2PU1
S2
(R)
(R)
(W)
(W)
1A 2A 1B 2B
BK
W
4231
(W)
(W)
(R)
(R)
S1
1
2
CN1PU1
BK
WP
G1
(L)
(G)
(N)
Y/G
BK
W
CN
1
WBK
W BK
BK
WBK
W
Mai
n P
ower
Sw
itch
Prim
ary
Inte
rlock
Sw
itch
TUBE
230V Areas120V AreasChina
JapanCN2PU1
BK
W
1
2
CN1PU1
BK
W
TUBE
CN8PU1
4 3 2 1
GN
D
DC
5V
DC
15V
GN
DYP
IG
R
GR
CN
LV2-
1
J9P
-4C
NLV
2-2
J9P
-2
YS
3-C
OM
GN
DD
C.3
V
GY
GY
CN
LV1-
1C
NLV
1-2
CN
LV1-
3
TUBE
Prim
ary
Inte
rlock
Sw
itch
Mai
n P
ower
Sw
itch
WBK
W BK
BK
WBK
W
PG
1Y
/G
S1
(R)
(R)
(R)
(R)
1 3 2 4
2B1B2A1A
(W)
(W)
(R)
(R)
S2
CN
1 12
12
TUBE
Fro
nt D
oor
Sw
itch/
2N
OC
OM
S4
Prim
ary
Inte
rlock
Sw
itch
Mai
n P
ower
Sw
itch
WBK
W BK
BK
WBK
W
CN
1
W BK
Y/G
(N)
(G)
(L)
PG
1WB
K
L1
2
CN1PU1
2
1
S1
(R)
(R)
(W)
(W)
1 3 2 4
WBK
2B1B2A1A
(W)
(W)
(R)
(R)
S2
CN2PU1
21
N2
L2
CN
LV1-
10
CN
LV1-
8C
NLV
1-9
CN
LV1-
7
CN
LV1-
5C
NLV
1-4
CN
LV1-
6
CN
PO
W-7
CN
PO
W-2
CN
PO
W-5
CN
PO
W-1
BK
WWWBK
Fus
ing
Uni
tWWB
K
WBK
321
21 3
CN
30
CN
31 1 2
1 2T
S2_
OU
TT
S1_
OU
T
H1_
RE
MH
2_R
EM
H3_
RE
M
54321
CN3PU1
S4-
CO
MC
NC
OP
-2
1 26-E
S5-
CO
MR
(W)
(R)
GR
R GR
RY GR
CN4PU1
3 2 1
DC
24V
GN
DD
C5V
DC
24V
DC
5V
GN
D
GN
D
1234
CN5PU1
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
ZE
RO
CR
OS
S
H2_
RE
M
8
FLI
CK
ER
_RE
MH
1_R
EM
DC
5V
109
H3_
RE
M
HE
AT
ER
_RY
SLE
EP
_RE
M
4 765321
CN7PU1
DC Power SupplyPU1
1
N1
J13P
1 49
PJ01HDD
HDDHard Disc
502
2 50491
J26P
NC NC
J27P
1 91922
94 18418393
J6P
Memory Module(DIMM)DIMM0
(Expansion)(Option)
J28P
NC
DIMM1Memory Module(DIMM)
J4P93 183
18494
2 92911
J15P
231
Bat
tery
Compact Flash CardCF_CARD
CNCF
J22P
1359 7
W GY
GY
Y PI
OR
OR
Y PI
GR
TUBE
810 9 47 6 5 3 2 1
CN2OP
Control PanelPWB-OP
810 6 4 2
LARGECLOSED END CONNECTORS
OUTPUT OF ACTIVEHIGH OR LOWINPUT OF ACTIVEHIGH OR LOW
DC5V
CLOSED END CONNECTORS
OUTPUT OF ACTIVE HIGH
DC24V
INPUT OF ACTIVE LOW
INPUT OF ACTIVE HIGH
#187 WITH HOUSING
#250 WITH HOUSING
OUTPUT OF ACTIVE LOW
POSITIVE LOCK RECEPTACLE
POSITIVE LOCK RECEPTACLE
CLOSED END CONNECTORSSMALL
MEDIUM
DESTINATION
DESCRIPTION
LOCATION
CLOSED END CONNECTORSEXTRA LARGE
20-L20
#110 WITH HOUSINGPOSITIVE LOCK RECEPTACLE
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
ZZ
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
2827262524232221201918171615
Aug.20084039-B001-1A 4/4
CN
CS
T-1
1
CN
CS
T-1
2
CN
CS
T-9
CN
CS
T-1
0
CN
CS
T-7
CN
CS
T-6
CN
CS
T-8
CN
CS
T-4
CN
CS
T-5
CN
CS
T-2
CN
CS
T-1
CN
CS
T-3
CN
DU
P-4
CN
DU
P-6
CN
DU
P-5
CN
DU
P-2
CN
DU
P-3
CN
DU
P-8
CN
DU
P-7
CN
DU
P-1
1
CN
DU
P-9
CN
DU
P-1
7C
ND
UP
-18
CN
DU
P-1
3C
ND
UP
-12
CN
DU
P-1
5C
ND
UP
-16
CN
DU
P-1
4
CN
DU
P-1
GY
GR
GY
GY
YY GY
GR
GR
RGR
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
21-K1119-K10
18-K9
13 11 9 7 5 234
CN
12 168101214
1412108641 2 3 5 7 9 11 13
PJ7Z PC
CLK
TX
D *
3
A2_
INA
1_IN
GN
D
FLM
GN
D
RT
SD
C5V
DC
5V
RX
D *
4
GN
D
GN
DD
C24
V
GY
YR GY
GR
GR
GR
Y GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
NC
PJ8Z PC
#4067 Lower Feeder Unit(Option)#4066 Duplex(Option)
Dup
lex
Uni
t Tra
nspo
rt M
otor
Dup
lex
Uni
t Sw
itchb
ack
Mot
or
Dup
lex
Uni
t Doo
r S
et S
enso
r
PC1-DU PC2-DU
(In
PW
B-A
DU
)D
uple
x U
nit T
rans
port
Sen
sor
1
Dup
lex
Uni
t Tra
nspo
rt S
enso
r 2
(In
PW
B-A
DU
)
GR
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
YGY
GY
GY
GY
RGY
GY
GY
GR
GY
GY
GY
RGY
GY
GY
GY
YGY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GR
PJ4
0
PWB-A DUDuplex Control Board
AABB
4 3 2 1
PJ4A DU
M1-DU M2-DU
B B APJ5A DU
1234
A
PCI-DU
123
PC
I-D
U O
NG
ND
DC
5V
PJ3A DU
1 2 3
PJ1A DU PJ2A DU
4 3 128 7 6 511 10 9 567 2 134
13
13
11
11
9
9
7
7
5
5
234
321
CN
44
1
4 6
6
8
8
10
10
12
12
14
14
21
PJ2Z PC
GN
DD
C24
V
CLK
TX
D *
3
A2_
INA
1_IN
GN
D
FLM
GN
D
RT
SD
C5V
DC
5V
RX
D *
4
GN
D
CD
Pap
er S
ize
Sen
sor/
2
Pap
er N
ear-
Em
pty
Sen
sor
CD
Pap
er S
ize
Sen
sor/
1
Doo
r S
et S
enso
r
Ver
tical
Tra
nspo
rt S
enso
r
Pap
er T
ake-
Up
Sen
sor
Pap
er E
mpt
y S
enso
r
Lift-
Up
Sen
sor
Ver
tical
Tra
nspo
rt M
otor
Pap
er F
eed
Mot
or
PC Control BoardPWB-Z PC
Pap
er S
ize
Boa
rd
PWB-I PC
Lift-
Up
Mot
or
Set
Sen
sor
BA A B ABA
M1-
PC
M2-
PC
B
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
PJ5Z PC
1 2 3 4 5 76 8
M2-PC
4 3 12
1 2 3 4
CN
102
CN
101
4321
2 134
M1-PC
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
PC
5-P
C O
N
15
15
GY
15
PC8-PC
PJ1
12
123 3 2 1PJ1
13
PC5-PCPC9-PC
PJ1
11
1233 2 1PJ1
10
PC6-PC
3 2 1PJ1
09
PC7-PC
987654321
2 135 469 78
CN
107
GY
GY
GY
PJ6Z PC
DC
5V
GN
DD
C5V
1 2
PC
7-P
C O
N
3 4
GN
D
5
PC
9-P
C O
NG
NDP
C6-
PC
ON
76 8
DC
5V
9
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
141311 1210
GN
DPC
8-P
C O
ND
C5V
DC
5V
GN
D
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
10 1211 13 14
14 13 1112 10
SIZ
E1
SIZ
E4
GN
D
SIZ
E3
SIZ
E2
PW
B-I
PC
DC
5VG
ND
DC
5VG
ND
GN
DD
C5V
PC
2-P
C O
N
PC
3-P
C O
N
PC
4-P
C O
N GN
D
SIZ
E3
SIZ
E2
SIZ
E4
PW
B-I
PC
SIZ
E1
PJ1I PC
12345
PC3-PC
PJ3
0 1233 2 1
PJ2
9
PC4-PC3 2 1
PJ3
1
PC2-PC
GY
GY
GY
PJ3Z PC
1 2 3 4 5 76 8 9
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
141311 1210
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
PC1-PC
PJ1
05
123
GN
DD
C5V
PC
1-P
C O
N+ -
M3-
PC
PJ1Z PC
GR
PJ4Z PC
1 2 3 4 5
GY
Y GY
GY
2 1
PJ1
06
M3-PC
1012 11 8 79 6 45 3 12
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
YGR
GR
GR
GY
R Y GR
15 14 13 91011 5678 2 13412161718
18 17 16 12 4 3 128 7 6 511 10 9131415
CN
15
4
4 3 127 6 5
76531 2CN
19
CN
13
21 3
91011
5 6 7
567
9 10 11
8
8
2 134
4
DU
P_F
EE
D_P
DD
UP
_RE
V_M
O_A
DU
P_E
XIT
_PS
DU
P_F
EE
D_P
SD
UP
_CO
VE
R_O
PD
C24
VG
ND
DU
P_R
EV
_MO
_EN
AD
UP
_RE
V_M
O_E
NB
DU
P_R
EV
_PD
DU
P_F
EE
D_M
O_A
DU
P_F
EE
D_M
O_B
DU
P_S
ET
DU
P_F
EE
D_M
O_E
NB
DU
P_F
EE
D_M
O_E
NA
DU
P_R
EV
_MO
_BD
C5VNC
*5
CW/CCW : Clock Wise/Counter Clock Wise
RXD : Reception Data
*4
TXD : Transmission Data
*3
*2
P.C. : Photo Conductor
*1
I.T. : Image Transfer
*6
D.B. : Developing Bias
GY
GY
GY
M1-
DU
M2-
DU
From the lower cassette
In case of two add-on papercassettes or more
© 2006 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.© 2006 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Printed in JapanPrinted in JapanDD4039-A-FE1DD4039-A-FE1
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised toavoid disclosure of confidential information.Use of this manual should be strictly supervised toavoid disclosure of confidential information.